1H18B0 - Water Accessories Booklet Rev. 2A PDF

DOCUMENT FRONT PAGE
Type of Document : Specification

Project: 1H18B0, NB 1705, Barreras HJB
Owner: Builder: Supplier:
Supplier revision Codes:

A – For info
B – For Approval
C – As Built
Reference documents
Document number Document name Revision Date
Revision Index:
1A 06.06.2018 General update LPR LPR AOR

1A 07.03.2018 First issue LPR LPR AOR
Rev. Date Description Made Checked Approved
by: by: by:
Document title:
Water Accessories booklet

Document Number: Page No / Of
1 of 258
Contents
IN LINE STRAINER Y-TYPE UP TO DN 40 ................................................................................................................... 3
IN LINE STRAINER Y-TYPE DN 50 ............................................................................................................................... 6
BUTTERFLY VALVE ...................................................................................................................................................... 9
ANTIVIBRATION JOINT ............................................................................................................................................... 10
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVE ........................................................................................................ 11
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SELF ACTUATED .................................................................................................... 33
2/3-WAY GLOBE VALVE UP TO DN 40 ...................................................................................................................... 40
2/3-WAY GLOBE VALVE UP FROM DN 50 UP TO DN 150 ....................................................................................... 14
2/3-WAY GLOBE VALVE FROM DN 200 .................................................................................................................... 70
SSB61 ACTUATOR .................................................................................................................................................... 100
SQL ACTUATOR ........................................................................................................................................................ 110
SKD ACTUATOR ........................................................................................................................................................ 123
SKC ACTUATOR ........................................................................................................................................................ 136
S55158 ACTUATOR ................................................................................................................................................... 157
CHECK VALVE (CLAPET) ......................................................................................................................................... 203
BALANCING VALVE .................................................................................................................................................. 204
AUTOMATIC AIR VENT ............................................................................................................................................. 221
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE PSV ¾” .............................................................................................................................. 223
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE ZSH VTFN 40 .................................................................................................................... 226
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE WITH ELECTRO PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR ........................................................ 232
In line strainer y-type up to DN 40
Water accessories booklet page 3 of 258

Technical data sheet
Type Y222
Y pattern strainer
Applications • Protection of pumps, valves, pressure

and special features reducing valves, against any impurity in the
piping system (dirt, rust, seal fragments,
foreign bodies).
• Filtration : 500 microns
Technical description DN • Connection : female/female, BSP threaded

References Vvs-nr • Permissible operating pressure PFA - water : 25 bar
“ mm • Plug : 1/4”G
1/2 15/21 149B 6520 •θ Mini. -10 °C
Maxi. 110 °C
3/4 20/27 149B 1769 • Mediums : Clear liquids
• Approvals : ACS
1 26/34 149B 1770 • International construction Standards :
Thread connection according to NF EN ISO 228-1
1¼ 33/42 149B 1771
1½ 40/49 149B 1772
2 50/60 149B 1773
Overall dimensions DN A B Weight
” mm mm mm kg
1/2 15/21 61 38 0,180
3/4 20/27 68 45 0,280
1 26/34 86,5 57 0,450
1¼ 33/42 105 69 0,800
1½ 40/49 117 80 0,900
2 50/60 147 99 1,200

Technical data sheet Type Y222 - Y pattern strainer
Spare parts list and Nb Description Materials EURO ANSI

materials
1 CASING Brass CuZn40Pb2
2 STRAINER Stainless steel X5CrNi18-10 AISI 304
3 SEAL Fibre
4 CAP Brass CuZn40Pb2
5 PLUG Nylon 66
6 SEAL Fibre
Working principle DN Kv
ζ
“ mm m3/H
1/2 15/21 2,7 10,33
3/4 20/27 5,1 9,50
1 26/34 11,3 4,70
1¼ 33/42 17,2 5,50
1½ 40/49 23,0 7,50
2 50/60 46,8 4,50

Strainers from DN 50

Technical data sheet
Type Y333
Y pattern strainer
Applications • Protection of pumps, valves, pressure

•
and special features reducing valves, backflow preventers,

•
against any impurity in the piping system

(dirt, rust, seal fragments, foreign bodies).
• Filtration DN :
500 microns for DN 40/50
800 microns for DN 65
1250 microns for DN 80/100/125/150/200
1600 microns for DN 250/300/350/400
• Internal/external epoxy coating.
Technical description • Connection : with PN 10 flanges

DN PFA PS - bar
PN Cat. References Vvs-nr • Permissible operating pressure PFA - water :
“ mm bar L1 L2 G1 G2
(for supply, distribution and disposal of water) : See table
1 ½ 40 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3260 • Maximum Permissible pressure PS - other
2 50 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3261 mediums : See table
2 ½ 65 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3262 •θ Mini. -10 °C
Maxi. 100 °C
3 80 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3263
• Mediums : Clear liquids
4 100 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3264 • Approvals : ACS (except DN 350 & 400)
5 125 10/16 16 16 16 X X 3.3 149B 3265 PED 97/23/CE
Important notice : 6 150 10/16 16 13 16 X X 3.3 149B 3266

The indicated pressure for the • International construction Standards :
different categories of fluids (L1/ 8 200 10 10 10 10 X X 3.3 149B 3267 CE Conformity Directive 97/23/CE
L2/G1/G2) is under no condition a 10 250 10 10 10 10 X X 1 149B 3268 Flange drilling according to EN 1092-2
guarantee of use.
Therefore, it is essential to validate 12 300 10 10 10 10 X X 1 149B 3269 Overall dimensions according to EN 558-1 series 1
the use of products under given
operating conditions. 14 350 10 10 10 10 X X 1 149B 3794
16 400 10 10 10 10 X X 1 149B 3797
Overall dimensions DN A C D Mesh Weight A

” mm mm mm mm mm kg
1½ 40 200 130 35 0,50 6,5
2 50 230 145 50 0,50 8,5
2½ 65 290 137 65 0,80 9,8
DN
3 80 310 159 75 1,25 13,5

4 100 350 187 90 1,25 18
5 125 400 249 125 1,25 27,5
6 150 480 301 170 1,25 43
C
8 200 600 403 220 1,25 83

10 250 730 472 200 1,60 112
12 300 850 508 250 1,60 160
D
14 350 980 587 315 1,6 297

16 400 1100 658 370 1,6 406
* D : Required hight to remove the strainer

Technical data sheet Type Y333 - Y pattern strainer
Spare parts list and Nb Description Materials EURO ANSI

materials 1
CASING DN 40-50 Cast iron + epoxy EN-GJL-250
ASTM A 48 35 B
DN 65-400 Ductile iron + epoxy EN-GJS-400-15
CAP DN 40-50 Cast iron + epoxy EN-GJL-250
2 ASTM A 48 35 B
DN 65-400 Ductile iron + epoxy EN-GJS-400-15
3 STRAINER Stainless steel X5CrNi18-10 AISI 304
PLUG ½ DN 40-150
4 Brass CuZn40Pb3
¾ DN200-400
5 STUD BOLT/SCREW Stainless steel X5CrNi18-10 AISI 304
6 SEAL EPDM
1 3 6 2 6 4 5
Working principle DN Kv
ζ
“ mm m3/H
1½ 40 42,70 2,20
2 50 66,70 2,20
2½ 65 89,00 3,50
3 80 127,00 4,00
4 100 200,00 3,90
5 125 364,00 2,60
6 150 494,00 3,30
8 200 937,00 2,90
10 250 1137,00 4,80
12 300 1844,00 3,80
14 350 1844,00 7,10
16 400 2172,00 8,80
400
250
65
300-350
M/WC
M/CE
PSI
DN
100
150
125
200
40
50
60
80
15 10
8
10 7
6
8
7 5
6 4
5
3
4
3 2
1.5
2
1
.8
1 .7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.15
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 1000 2000 DEBIT M3/H
FLOW GALLON/MIN
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
2500
100
8 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80
150
200
300
400
500
600
800
250
* Head loss value for non clogged strainer

* Max velocity (for clean water) : 5m/s

Butterfly lug valve

Antivibration joint

- SCHEDA TECNICA -
Giunti Antivibranti in Gomma Flangiati
Caratteristiche
da DN25 a DN300 da DN300 a DN700

Pressione di Esercizio MAX 16 Kg/cm2 8 Kg/cm2
Pressione di Scoppio 60 Kg/cm2 24 Kg/cm2
Pressione Negativa 650 mm/Hg 650 mm/Hg
Range Temperatura -20°C ÷ +100°C -20°C ÷ +100°C
Materiali
n. Componente Materiale
1 Flange girevoli INOX AISI 304
2 Rinforzo del gradino Acciaio al carbonio zincato
3 Elastomero Gomma sintetica EPDM
4 Rinforzo dell’elastomero Fibra sintetica NYLON
Dimensionale
Length
Grafico Temperatura/Pressione
Water Accessories Booklet pag. 11 of 117

Pressure independent control valve

Data sheet
Pressure independent balancing and control valve

AB‑QM DN 10‑250
The AB‑QM valve equipped with an actuator is a control valve with full authority and an automatic balancing function / flow limitation. Typical applications
are: Temperature control with permanent automatic balancing on terminal units (chillers, air‑handling units, fan coils, induction units, radiation panels and
heat exchangers).
Description The precise flow control performance of project. When sections of a project are
the AB‑QM with a Danfoss actuator provides finished they can normally not be handed
increased comfort and lower Total Cost of over to the customer with a fully functional
Ownership because of savings made on: HVAC installation. However the AB‑QM with
a Danfoss actuator will automatically control
• Efficient energy transfer and minimal the flow, even when other parts of the
pumping costs since there are no overflows installation are still unfinished. It’s not needed
at partial loads because of the exact pressure to adjust the AB‑QM after finalisation of the
independent flow limitation. project.
• Smaller pump investments and lower energy • Commissioning costs, the costs are close
consumption as the pump head needed is to zero because of a convenient setting
lower than in the traditional setup. With the procedure without the need for flow charts,
built in test plugs it is easy to troubleshoot calculations or measuring equipment. The
and find the optimal setpoint for the pump. AB‑QM valves can be set to a precise design
• Reduced movements of the actuator since the value even when the system is up and
built‑in differential pressure controller ensure running.
the pressure fluctuations do not influence the • Halved mounting costs as the AB‑QM valve
room temperature. covers two functions, Balancing & Control
• Achieving a stable temperature in a room
leading to a lower average temperature at the
same comfort level.
• Minimal flow complaints, as the valve
performs as designed.
• Minimal blockage complains, as the
membrane design makes AB‑QM less
susceptible to blockage than a cartridge type
construction.
• Trouble‑free segmentation of the building

Data sheet AB‑QM DN 10‑250
Control performance The AB‑QM has a linear control characteristic.

The AB‑QM is pressure independent which
means that the control characteristic is
independent from the available pressure and is 100 %
not influenced by a low authority.
e
The flow limitation on the AB‑QM is achieved ur
e ss
by limiting the stroke and the Danfoss actuators e pr
e
bl
For any given 100 % setting
ssu r
calibrate to the stroke of the valves. This means ila
that the AB‑QM keeps its linear characteristic va
ya
p re
a n
independent of the setting or differential
ble
at
nt
ila
pressure. st
a
va
n
co
ya
ys
an
Because of the predictable characteristic the s ta
at
actuators on the AB‑QM can be used to change ng nt
et
ti
n sta
the response from linear to logarithmic (equal s co
LI N ys
percentage). That makes the AB‑QM suitable sta
e t ti ng
for all applications, including AHUs, where the LOG s
0
equal percentage characteristic is needed to 0 10 V
get a stable control loop. The actuators can be
switched from linear to logarithmic by changing
a DIP switch setting on the actuator.
Applications
‑ variable flow systems
Air handling unit (AHU) / fan coil unit (FCU)
An AB‑QM with a Danfoss actuator is used

as a control valve for terminal units, like an
AHU (Air Handling Unit), FCU (Fan Coil Unit) or
radiation panel. The AB‑QM ensures and control
the required flow on every terminal unit and
maintains hydronic balance in the system.
Because of the integrated differential pressure

controller the control valve always has 100 %
authority and therefore offers always stable
control. At partial load there is no overflow,
contrary to conventional solutions, because the
AB‑QM will always limit the flow to exactly what
is needed. By installing the AB‑QM the whole
system is divided in completely independent
control loops.
Radiation panel
There is a full range of Danfoss actuators
available for the AB‑QM, suitable for every
control strategy. Actuators are available for
On/Off, 0‑10 Volt, 4‑20 mA or floating point.

Applications
‑ constant flow systems
In constant flow system with FCUs or in a one

pipe heating system the AB‑QM can be installed
as an automatic balancing valve in every riser.
The AB‑QM limits the flow to the set value, thus
automatically achieving hydronic balance in the
system.
There are numerous applications in which AB‑QM can be used. Every time you need an automatic
flow limiter or a control valve you can take advantage of the cost‑saving properties of the AB‑QM.
That includes systems with (floor) heating/cooling, concrete core activation or radiation panels.
Note: For more application examples please contact your local Danfoss organization.
Easy implementation • No Kv or authority calculations needed. Flow • Easy commissioning. No specialized staff or
is the only parameter to be considered when measuring equipment needed.
designing. • Easy trouble shooting.
• The AB‑QM always fits the application • Fast start‑up because AB‑QM valves don’t
because the maximum setting of the AB‑QM need to be flushed or de‑aired before use.
corresponds with international standards for • Trouble‑free segmentation of the building
flow velocity in pipes. project. The AB‑QM will automatically control
• The AB‑QM can be used for all HVAC the flow, even when parts of the installation
applications since it can have a linear or are still unfinished. It’s not needed to adjust
logarithmic characteristic when combined the AB‑QM after finalisation of the building
with thermal electric or gear actuators. project.
• Compact design, essential when only limited
space is available. For example in fan‑coil
units.

Ordering AB‑QM threaded version (with test plugs and without test plugs)
Q nom. Ext. thread Ext. thread
Picture DN Code No. AB‑QM Code No.
(l/h) (ISO 228/1) (ISO 228/1)
10 LF 150 003Z1261 003Z1251
G ½A G ½A
10 275 003Z1211 003Z1201
15 LF 275 003Z1262 003Z1252
15 450 G ¾A 003Z1212 G ¾A 003Z1202
15 HF 1,135 003Z1222
20 900 003Z1213 003Z1203
G 1A G 1A
20 HF 1,700 003Z1223
25 1,700 003Z1214 003Z1204
G 1 ¼A G 1 ¼A
25HF 2,700 003Z1224
32 3,200 003Z1215 003Z1205
G 1 ½A G 1 ½A
32 HF 4,000 003Z1225
40 7,500 G 2A 003Z0770 AB‑QM (DN 10‑32) can not be upgraded to AB‑QM
50 12,500 G 2 ½A 003Z0771 with test plugs!
AB‑QM industry pack (with test plugs and without test plugs)
Q nom. Ext. thread Ext. thread
Picture DN Code No. AB‑QM Code No.
(l/h) (ISO 228/1) (ISO 228/1)
10 LF 150 003Z1761 003Z1751
G ½A G ½A
10 275 003Z1711 003Z1701
15 LF 275 003Z1762 003Z1752
G ¾A G ¾A
15 450 003Z1712 003Z1702
20 900 G 1A 003Z1713 G 1A 003Z1703
AB‑QM flanged version

Q nom. Flange
Picture DN Code No.
(l/h) connection
50 12,500 003Z0772
65 20,000 003Z0773
65 HF 25,000 003Z0793
80 28,000 003Z0774
80 HF 40,000 003Z0794
100 38,000 003Z0775
100 HF 59,000 003Z0795
125 90,000 PN 16 003Z0705
125 HF 110,000 003Z0715
150 145,000 003Z0706
150 HF 190,000 003Z0716
200 200,000 003Z0707
200 HF 270,000 003Z0717
250 300,000 003Z0708
250 HF 370,000 003Z0718
Set‑pack (one MSV‑S and one AB‑QM without test plugs)

Q nom. Ext. thread
Picture DN Code No.
(l/h) (ISO 228/1)
15 LF 275 003Z1238
G¾A
15 450 003Z1242
20 900 G1A 003Z1243
25 1,700 G1¼A 003Z1244
32 3,200 G1½A 003Z1245

Ordering (continuous) Comments

Type Code No.
Accessories & spare parts To pipe To valve
Union connection R 3/8 DN 10 003Z0231
(CW617N) R 1/2 DN 15 003Z0232
(1 pcs.)
R 3/4 DN 20 003Z0233
R1 DN 25 003Z0234
R 1 1/4 DN 32 003Z0235
R 11/2 DN 40 003Z0279
R2 DN 50 003Z0278
Tailpiece welding DN 15 003Z0226
(W. Nr. 1.0308) DN 20 003Z0227
(1 pcs.)
DN 25 003Z0228
Weld.
DN 32 003Z0229
DN 40 003Z0270
DN 50 003Z0276
Tailpiece welding ‑ INOX DN 15 003Z1271
(W. Nr. 1.4404) DN 20 003Z1272
(1 pcs.)
DN 25 003Z1273
Weld.
DN 32 003Z1274
DN 40 003Z1275
DN 50 003Z1276
Tailpieces for soldering 12×1 mm DN 10 065Z7016
(CW614N)
(2 nuts, 2 gaskets, 2 soldering plugs 15×1 mm DN 15 065Z7017
Shut‑off & protection piece (max. closing pressure 16 bar) 003Z1230
DN 10‑32
Shut‑off ‑ plastic (max. closing pressure 1 bar) 003Z0240
DN 40‑100 003Z0695
Handle AB‑QM
DN 125‑150 003Z0696
(necessary accessory if installing valve without actuator)
DN 200‑250 003Z0697
Adapter for AB‑QM DN 10, G ½ internal thread for AB‑QM, G 3/8 internal thread (1 pcs.) 003Z3954
Adapter for AB‑QM DN 15, G ¾ internal thread for AB‑QM, G ¾A external thread (1 pcs.) 003Z3955
Adapter for AB‑QM DN 20, G 1 internal thread for AB‑QM, G 1A external thread (1 pcs.) 003Z3956
Adapter for AB‑QM DN 25, G 5/4 internal thread for AB‑QM, G 5/4A external thread (1 pcs.) 003Z3957
Adapter AMV(E) 25/35 (AB‑QM DN 40‑100, 2nd. generation) 003Z0694
Adapter AME 435 for AB‑QM DN 40‑100 (1st. generation) 065Z0313
Locking ring AB‑QM DN10‑32 (5 pcs.) 003Z1236
Stroke limiter ‑ TWA (5 pcs. in a bag) 003Z1237
Adapter AME 13 SU for AB‑QM (1st. generation) 003Z3959
Adapter AME 13 SU for AB‑QM (2nd. generation) 003Z3960
Adapter for ABNM A5 082F1072
Spacer AMI 140 003Z0257
Stem heater for AB‑QM DN 40‑100 / AME 15 QM 065B2171
Stem heater for AB‑QM DN 40‑100 / AME 435 QM 065Z0315
Stem heater for AB‑QM DN 125, 150 / AME 55 QM 065Z7022
Type Code No.

AB‑QM heating insul. cap DN 10 003Z4730
Type Comments Code No.

Refrig. insulation ABQM DN 15_ABNM/TWA‑Z DN 15 003Z4787
Type Code No.

Set of needle plug (1 pcs.) 003Z0100
Set of ext. plug (1 pcs.) 003Z0106
Set of measuring needle (1 pcs.) 003Z0107
Elbow test plug extension (1 pcs.) 003Z3944
Straight test plug extension (1 pcs.) 003Z3945
Straight plug extension set (1 pcs.) 003Z3946

Ordering (continuous) For Valve Sizes DN 10 ‑ 32

Input Signal Safety Function
Output
Type Note Power On/ Code No.
Floating Modulating Signal Up Down
Off
TWA‑Z NO 1) • • 082F1260
TWA‑Z NC 1) • • 082F1262
24 VAC/
TWA‑Z NO 1) • • 082F1264
DC
TWA‑Z NC 1) • • 082F1266
TWA‑Z NC 1) • • 082F1268
TWA‑Z NC 1)
24 VAC/ • • 082F1272
TWA‑Z NC 1) DC • • 082F1270
TWA‑Z NC 1) • • 082F1274
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NO • • 082F1380
cable 1)
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NC • • 082F1382
cable1)
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NC • • 082F1384
cable 1)
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NC • • 082F1388
cable 1)
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NC 24 VAC/ • • 082F1386
cable 1)
DC
Halogen free
TWA‑Z NC • • 082F1390
cable 1)
ABN A5 NC 5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1150
ABN A5 NO 5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1151
ABN A5 NC 5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1152
ABN A5 NO 5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1153
ABN A5 NC end
5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1154
swithc
ABNM A5 NC LOG 5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1160
ABNM A5 NO LIN 5 mm stroke5) 24 VAC • • 082F1161
ABNM A5 NC LOG 6.5 mm stroke 5) 24 VAC • • 082F1162
ABNM A5 NO
6.5 mm stroke 5) 24 VAC • • 082F1163
LOG
ABNM A5 NC LIN 6.5 mm stroke 5) 24 VAC • • 082F1164
ABNM A5 NO LIN 6.5 mm stroke 5) 24 VDC • • 082F1165
ABNM A5 DC NC
6.5 mm stroke 5) 24 VDC • • 082F1166
LOG
ABNM A5 DC NO 24 VAC/
6.5 mm stroke 5) • • 082F1167
LOG DC
10,4±0,3
NovoCon® S BACnet & Modbus 24 VAC/

• • 6) Selectable Selectable 003Z8502
Digital/Hybrid communication 5) DC
NovoCon® S CO6, BACnet & Modbus
24 VAC • • 6) Selectable Selectable 003Z8503
Energy, I/O communication 5)
AMI 140 4) 230 VAC • 082H8048
AMI 140 4) 24 VAC • 082H8049
Closing point (measure) AMV 110 NL 230 VAC • 082H8056
for DN 10‑32 AMV 110 NL 24 VAC • 082H8058
AME 110 NL 24 VAC • 082H8057
1) Up to 70% of maximum flow for ½” and
¾” valves, 65% of maximum flow for 1” AME 110 NLX 24 VAC • • 082H8060
and 1¼” valves AMV 13 SU 3), 4) 24 VAC • • • 082H3043
2) Requires 082F1072 adapter
3) Requires 003Z3960 adapter
AMV 13 SD 4) 24 VAC • • • 082G3004
4) Requires spacer 003Z0257 AME 13 SU 3), 4) 24 VAC • • • 082H3044
5) Cable needs to be ordered as separate
AME 13 SD 4) 24 VAC • • • 082G3006
code nr.
6) Feedback signal over field bus
For Valve Sizes DN 40 ‑ 100

Input Signal Output Signal Safety Function
Type Power Code No.
On/Off Floating Modulating (0‑10VDC) Up Down
AME 435 QM** 24 VAC/DC • • •* •* 082H0171
AMV 435 24 VAC/DC • • 082H0162
AMV 435 230 VAC • • 082H0163
AME 25 SU* 24 VAC • • • • 082H3041
* Adapter required for 2nd gen valve.
Part # 003Z0694 AME 25 SD* 24 VAC • • • • 082H3038
** Available battery backup assembly for
AMV 25 SU* 230 VAC • • 082H3036
safety function, AM‑PBU25, 082H7090,
one per four AME435 QM actuators AMV 25 SD* 230 VAC • • 082H3040

Ordering (continuous) For Valve Sizes DN 125‑150

Type Power Code No.
On/Off Floating Modulating (0‑10VDC) Up Down
AME55QM 24VAC • • • •* •* 082H3078
AME 655 24VAC/DC • • • • • 082G3442
AME 655 230VAC/DC • • • • • 082G3443
AME 658 SU 24VAC/DC • • • • 082G3450
AME 658 SU 230VAC/DC • • • • 082G3451
*Available battery backup assembly for AME 658 SD 24VAC/DC • • • • 082G3448
one per two AME 55 QM actuators AME 658 SD 230VAC/DC • • • • 082G3449
For Valve Sizes DN 200‑250

Type Power Code No.
*Available battery backup assembly for On/Off Floating Modulating (0‑10VDC) Up Down
one per AME 85 QM actuator AME85QM 24VAC • • • •* •* 082G1453
Closing pressure for AB‑QM on all above actuators is 16 bar.
More information regarding the actuators can be found in the individual data sheets.
Technical data
AB‑QM (threaded version)
Nominal diameter DN 10 LF 10 15 LF 15 15 HF 20 20 HF 25 25 HF 32 32 HF 40 50
Qnom (100 %)1) 150 275 275 450 1,135 900 1,700 1,700 2,700 3,200 4,000 7,500 12,500
Flow range l/h
Q high3) 180 330 330 540 1,2504) 1,080 1,8704) 1,8704) 2,9704) 3,5204) 4,4004) 7,500 12,500
Setting range 1), 2) % 20‑120 20‑110 20‑120 20‑1104) 40‑100
Diff. pressure ∆p min 16 (18) 35 (40) 16 (18) 35 (40) 20 (25) 35 (40) 25 (30) 35 (40) 30
3), 5)
kPa
∆p max 600
Pressure stage PN 16
Control range 1:1000
Control valve’s characteristic Linear (could be converted by actuator to equal percentage)
Leakage rate with recommended actuators No visible leakage max. 0.05 % of Qnom
For shut off function Acc. to ISO 5208 class A ‑ no visible leakage
Water and water mixture for closed heating and cooling systems according to plant type I for DIN EN 14868. When used in
Flow medium
plant Type II for DIN EN 14868 appropriate protective measures are taken. The requirements of VDI 2035, part 1 + 2 are observed.
Medium temperature −10 ... +120
°C
Storage and transport temp. –40 … 70
Stroke mm 2.25 4 2.25 4 4.5 10
ext. thread (ISO 228/1) G½A G¾A G1A G 1¼ A G 1½ A G2A G 1½ A
Connection
actuator M30 × 1.5 Danfoss standard
Materials in the water
Grey iron
Valve bodies DZR Brass (CuZn36Pb2As ‑ CW 602N)
EN‑GJL‑250 (GG25)
Membranes and O‑rings EPDM
Springs W.Nr. 1.4568, W.Nr. 1.4310
CuZn40Pb3 ‑ CW 614N,
Cone (Pc) W.Nr. 1.4305
W.Nr. 1.4305
Seat (Pc) EPDM W.Nr. 1.4305
Cone (Cv) CuZn40Pb3 ‑ CW 614N
Seat (Cv) DZR Brass (CuZn36Pb2As ‑ CW 602N) W.Nr. 1.4305
Screw Stainless Steel (A2)
Flat gasket NBR
Sealing agent
Dimethacrylate Ester
(only for valves with test plugs)
Materials out of the water
Plastic parts PA POM
Insert parts and outer screws CuZn39Pb3 ‑ CW 614N; W.Nr. 1.4310; W.Nr. 1.4401 ‑
1) Factory setting of the valve is done at nominal setting range.
2) Regardless of the setting, the valve can modulate below 1 % of set flow.
3) When set above 100 %, minimum starting pressure needed is higher, see figures in the ().
4) Actuator with compatible stroke must be selected.
5) At min differential pressure valve reaches at least 90% of nominal flow. Declaration of performance is available upon request.
According suitability and usage especially in not oxygen tight systems please mind the instructions given by the coolant producer.
Pc ‑ pressure controller part

Cv ‑ Control valve part

Technical data (continuous) AB‑QM (flanged version)

Nominal diameter DN 50 65 65 HF 80 80 HF 100 100 HF
Qnom (100 %) 1) 12,500 20,000 25,000 28,000 40,000 38,000 59,000
Flow range l/h
Q high 12,500 20,000 25,000 28,000 40,000 38,000 59,000
Setting range 1), 2) % 40‑100
Diff. pressure ∆p min 30 60 30 60 30 60
3) ,5) kPa
∆p max 600
Control range Acc. to standard IEC 534 control range is high as Cv characteristic is linear. (1:1000)
Leakage rate with recommended
max. 0.05 % of Qnom
actuators
For shut off function Acc. to ISO 5208 class A ‑ no visible leakage
Water and water mixture for closed heating and cooling systems according to plant type
Flow medium I for DIN EN 14868. When used in plant Type II for DIN EN 14868 appropriate protective
measures are taken. The requirements of VDI 2035, part 1 + 2 are observed.
°C
Stroke mm 10 15
flange PN 16
Connection
actuator Danfoss standard
Materials in the water
Valve bodies Grey iron EN‑GJL‑250 (GG25)
Membranes/ Bellow EPDM
O‑rings EPDM
Springs W.Nr. 1.4568, W.Nr. 1.4310
Cone (Pc) CuZn40Pb3 ‑ CW 614N, W.Nr. 1.4305
Seat (Pc) W.Nr. 1.4305
Cone (Cv) CuZn40Pb3 ‑ CW 614N
Seat (Cv) W.Nr. 1.4305
Screw Stainless Steel (A2)
Flat gasket NBR
Nominal diameter DN 125 125 HF 150 150 HF 200 200 HF 250 250 HF
Qnom (100 %) 1) 90,000 110,000 145,000 190,000 200,000 270,000 300,000 370,000
Flow range l/h
Q high 3) 100,000 120,000 160,000 209,000 220,000 300,000 330,000 407,000
Setting range 2) % 40‑110
Diff. pressure ∆p min 40 (60) 60 (80) 40 (60) 60 (80) 45 (65) 60 (80) 45 (65) 60 (80)
3), 4), 5)
kPa
∆p max 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Control range 1:1000
Leakage rate with recommended
max.0.01 % of Qnom
actuators
Water and water mixture for closed heating and cooling systems according to plant type
Flow medium I for DIN EN 14868. When used in plant Type II for DIN EN 14868 appropriate protective
measures are taken. The requirements of VDI 2035, part 1 + 2 are observed.
°C
Stroke mm 30
1) Factory setting of the valve is done at flange PN 16
nominal setting range. Connection
actuator Danfoss standard
2) Regardless of the setting, the valve
can modulate below 1 % of set flow. Materials in the water
3) When set above 100 %, minimum Valve bodies Grey iron EN‑GJL‑250 (GG 25)
starting pressure needed is higher,
see figures in the (). Membranes/ Bellow W.Nr.1.4571 EPDM
4)
In case AB‑QM is used above 400 kPa O‑rings EPDM
differential pressure contact Danfoss
design center to assure proper Springs W.Nr.1.4401 W.Nr.1.4310
design. Cone (Pc) W.Nr.1.4404NC W.Nr.1.4021
5) At min differential pressure valve
Seat (Pc) W.Nr.1.4027
reaches at least 90% of nominal
flow. Declaration of performance is Cone (Cv) W.Nr.1.4404NC W.Nr.1.4021
available upon request. Seat (Cv) W.Nr.1.4027
Pc ‑ pressure controller part Screw W.Nr.1.1181
Cv ‑ Control valve part
Flat gasket Graphite gasket Non asbestos

Design
1. Spindle
2. Stuffing box
3. Pointer
4. Control valve’s cone
5. Membrane
6. Main spring
7. Hollow cone (pressure
controller)
8. Vulcanized seat (pressure
controller)
Δp = (P1‑P3)
ΔpCv = (P2‑P3)
AB‑QM DN 10‑32
Function: 1. Differential pressure controller DPC 2. Control valve Cv

The AB‑QM valve consists of The differential pressure controller maintains a The control valve has a linear characteristic. It
two parts: constant differential pressure across the control features a stroke limitation function that allows
1. Differential pressure valve. The pressure difference ΔpCv (P2‑P3) on adjustment of the Kv value. The percentage
controller the membrane is balanced with the force of the marked on the scale equals the percentage of
2. Control valve spring. Whenever the differential pressure across 100 % flow marked on the pointer. Changing
the control valve changes (due to a change in the stroke limitation is done by lifting the
available pressure, or movement of the control blocking mechanism and turning the top of the
valve) the hollow cone is displaced to a new valve to the desired position, showed on the
position which brings a new equilibrium and scale as a percentage. A blocking mechanism
therefore keeps the differential pressure at a automatically prevents unwanted changing of
constant level. the setting.
1. Shut off screw

2. Main spring
3. Membrane
4. DP cone
5. Seat
6. Valve body
7. Control valves cone
8. Locking screw
9. Scale
10. Stuffing box
11. Spindle
P1 P3
AB‑QM DN 50‑100
AB‑QM DN 40, 50

Design (continuous)
1. Valve body
2. Valve seat
3. DPC cone P3
P1
4. CV cone
5. Controller casting P1 P3
6. Rolling diaphragm
7. Adjusting screw
8. Bellow for pressure relief on
DPC cone
AB‑QM DN 150
AB‑QM DN 125
1. Valve body
2. Valve seat
3. DPC cone
4. CV cone
5. Controller casting
6. Rolling diaphragm
7. Adjusting screw
8. Bellow for pressure relief on P1 P3
DPC cone
AB‑QM DN 200, 250

Sizing
Thread version Flange version

Sizing (continuous) Example 1: Variable flow system
Given: Selected:
Cool requirement per unit : 1000 W AB‑QM DN 10 mm with Qnom = 275 l/h presetting
Flow temperature in the system: 6 °C on 143/275 = 0.52 = 52 % of nominal opening.
Return temperature in the system: 12 °C Actuators: AMV 110NL ‑ 24 V
Remarks:
Required ‑ control and balancing valves: required minimum differential pressure across
AB‑QM and actuators type for BMS system. the AB‑QM DN 10: 16 kPa.
Solution:
Flow in the system: Q (l/h)
Q = 0.86×1000/(12−6 ) = 143 l/h
Example 2: Constant flow system
Given: Selected:
Cool requirement per unit : 4000 W AB‑QM DN 20 mm with Qnom = 900 l/h
Flow temperature in the system : 6 °C presetting on 573/900 = 0.64 = 64 % of
Return temperature in the system : 12 °C maximum opening.
Required ‑ automatic flow limiter: Remarks:

AB‑QM and presetting. required minimum differential pressure across
the AB‑QM DN 20: 16 kPa.
Solution:
Flow in the system : Q (l/h)
Q = 0.86 × 4000 / ( 12 − 6 ) = 573 l/h
Example 3: Sizing AB‑QM according pipe

dimension
Given: Dimension and condition acceptable, velocity

Flow in system 1.4 m3/h (1400 l/h = 0.38 l/s), pipe below 1.0 m/s.
dimension DN 25 mm
Presenting on the valve AB‑QM DN 25 mm
Required ‑ automatic flow limiter: 1400/1700 = 0.82 = 82 % of nominal opening.
AB‑QM and presetting. Remarks:
required minimum differential pressure across
Solution: the AB‑QM DN 25: 20 kPa.
In this case we can selected AB‑QM DN 25 mm
with Qnom = 1700 l/h
In this case it will be recommended to check

the maximum velocity in the pipe. For this we
calculate velocity in the pipe for condition:
DN 25 mm – Di 27.2 mm

Pump optimising /
Trouble shooting
Blue
Red
Blue
Red
Δpcv
P2-P3
Blue
Δpcv
DN 10‑250 DN 10‑250
* Δpmin = (P1‑P3)min
** Δpcv.min = Δpcvmin (DN 10‑32 p2‑p3, DN 40‑250 p1‑p2)
The AB‑QM (DN 10‑100) features test plugs that allow measuring of the pressure difference Δpcv across
the control valve. If the pressure difference exceeds the minimal required pressure is operational
and the flow limitation is achieved. The measuring function can be used to verify if enough pressure
difference is available and thus verify the flow or measure the flow directly.
For detail information how to measure flow on DN 40‑250 please refer to Flow checker document.
It can also be used to optimize the pump head. The pump head can be decreased until no more
than the minimal required pressure is available on the most critical valve (in terms of hydronic). This
optimal point is to be found when proportionality between pump head and measured differential
pressure cease to exist.
Verifying the pressure can be done by using for example Danfoss PFM device (for more details please
refer to AB‑QM Tech Note).

Presetting The calculated flow can be adjusted easily The presetting scale indicates values from 100 %
without using special tools. flow to 0 %. Clock wise turning would decrease
the flow value while counter clock wise would
To change the presetting (factory setting is increase it.
100 %) follow the four steps below:
If the valve is a DN 15 then the nominal flow
① Remove the blue protective cap or the = 450 l/h =100 % presetting. To set a flow of
mounted actuator 270 l/h you have to set: 270/450 = 60 %.
② Raise the grey pointer
③ Turn (clock wise to decrease) to the new Danfoss recomends a presetting/flow from 20 %
presetting to 100 %. Factory presetting is 100 %.
④ Press grey pointer back into lock position.
After click presetting is locked.
DN 10‑32
>100 % 100 % ≠ 10 %
h h h+ 2 mm, DN 10‑20
h+ 4 mm, DN 25‑32
Scale +90 %
① ② ③ ④

Presetting (continuous)
DN 40‑100
Max 25Nm
Note: 1 turn = 10 %
DN 125‑250
+
–
Setting 60 %
+
–
Note:
1 turn = 5 %
Service DN 10‑32 DN 40‑100

For the service shut off function, it is For the service shut‑off function, the valve can
recommended to install the valve in the supply be installed in either supply or return pipe.
water pipe.
Valves are equipped with manual shut‑off for
Valves are equipped with plastic protection cap. isolating function up to 16 bar.
When closing against higher differential pressure
please use accessory ‑ shut‑off & protection DN 125‑250
piece (003Z1230) or set the value to 0 %. For the service shut‑off function, the valve can
be installed in either supply or return pipe.
For shut‑off set the valve to 0%.
Installing AB‑QM valve is mono‑directional meaning that

the valve operates when arrow on the valve body
is aligned with flow direction. When this rule is
disobeyed the valve acts like variable orifice that
cause water hammer at sudden closing when
available pressure has increased or valve have
been set to lower value.
In case when system condition allows backflows

it is strongly recommended to use backflow
preventer in order to avoid possible water
hammer that can damage the valve as well as
other elements in the system.

Tender text The pressure independent balancing and control valve which means that the control characteristic is
independent from the available pressure. The precise flow control performance of the AB‑QM with
a Danfoss actuator provides increased comfort and superior Total Cost of Ownership. The AB‑QM
ensures and control the required flow on every terminal unit and maintains Hydronic balance in the
system.
AB‑QM has following features:
• Flow limitation function
• Modulating below 1% of set flow, regardless of the setting,
• Authority of 1 at all settings
• Able to close against 16 bar of differential pressure.
• Linear control characteristic
• Scale in percentage of flow
• Control ratio 1:1000
• Test plugs for pump optimization and flow verification for DN 10‑250. Available in the range from
DN 10 – 250 from one supplier.
• Characteristic changed from linear to equal percentage characteristic at all sizes by adjusting
actuator settings.
• Lockable setting
• Leakage rate of no visible leakage for DN 10 ‑ DN 20 in combination with recommended actuator
• Leakage of 0.05 % of the Qnom for DN 25 ‑ DN 100 in combination with recommended actuator
• Leakage of 0.01 % of the Qnom for DN 125 ‑ DN 250 in combination with recommended actuator

Dimensions
H1
b
H2
L1
L2
L2 L3
AB‑QM DN 10‑32
H5
H6
H3
H4
L4 L5 L6 L7
TWA‑Z + AB‑QM ABNM + AB‑QM AMV (E) 110 NL + AB‑QM NovoCon™ + AB‑QM
AMI 140 + AB‑QM
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 b Valve weight
Type
mm ISO 228/1 (kg)
DN 10 53 36 79 92 104 109 119 69 20 100 104 138 140 G½ 0.38
DN 15 65 45 79 98 110 116 126 72 25 102 108 141 143 G¾ 0.48
DN 20 82 56 79 107 120 125 134 74 33 105 112 143 145 G1 0.65
DN 25 104 71 79 124 142 142 149 82 42 117 124 155 153 G1¼ 1.45
DN 32 130 90 79 142 154 160 167 93 50 128 136 166 164 G1½ 2.21
AB‑QM DN 10‑50
Tailpieces for
Union connection Tailpiece welding
DN soldering
A* [mm] A* [mm]
A* [mm]
10 79 70
15 92.5 102 87
20 112.5 124
25 139 146
32 168.5 172
40 155 157
50 187 182
* Length is decreased with installation due to deformation of the gasket.

Dimensions (continuous)
L1
H3
H1
b
H2
AB‑QM DN 40, 50 AB‑QM + AME 435 QM
L1 H1 H2 H3 b Weight
Type
mm ISO 228/1 kg
DN 40 110 170 174 280 G2 6.9
DN 50 130 170 174 280 G2½ 7.8
H3
H1
a
H2
L1 AB‑QM + AME 435 QM
AB‑QM DN 50‑100
L1 H1 H2 H3 a Weight
Type
mm (EN 1092‑2) (kg)
DN 50 230 170 174 280 165 14.2
DN 65 290 220 172 330 185 38.0
DN 80 310 225 177 335 200 45.0
DN 100 350 240 187 350 220 57.0

H1
H1
a
a
H2
H2
L1 L1
AB‑QM DN 125 H3
AB‑QM DN 150
H3
AB‑QM DN 125 + AME 55 QM AB‑QM DN 150 + AME 55 QM
Type
mm (EN 1092‑2) (kg)
DN 125 400 272 518 507 250 85.3
DN 150 480 308 465 518 285 138

H3
H1
a
H2
L1
AB‑QM DN 200, 250 AB‑QM DN 200, 250 + AME 85 QM
Type
mm (EN 1092‑2) (kg)
DN 200 600 434 483 618 340 219
DN 250 730 430 533 708 405 342

Pressure control valve self actuated

Self-operated Pressure Regulators
Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
ANSI version
Application
Pressure regulators for set points from 0.75 to 400 psi (0.05
to 28 bar) · Valves in NPS ½ to 4 (DN 15 to 100) · Pressure
rating Class 125 to 300 (PN 16 to 40) · Suitable for water, The valve closes when the downstream pressure
gases, and vapors up to 660 °F (350 °C) rises
Special features
• Low-maintenance proportional regulators requiring no
auxiliary energy
• Frictionless plug stem seal with stainless steel bellows
• Control line kit available for tapping the pressure directly
at the valve body
• Wide set point range and convenient set point adjustment
using a nut
• Exchangeable set point springs and actuator
• Spring-loaded, single-seated valve with upstream and
downstream pressure balancing 1) by a stainless steel bel-
lows
• Soft-seated plug for high shut-off requirements
• Standard low-noise plug · Special version with flow divid-
er St I or St III (NPS 2½ to 4/DN 65 to 100) for further
noise level reduction (see Data Sheet u T 8081)
Fig. 1: Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
• All wetted parts free of non-ferrous metal
Versions Special versions

– Control line kit for tapping the pressure directly at the
Pressure reducing valve to regulate the downstream pressure
valve body (accessories)
p2 to the adjusted set point. The valve closes when the down-
stream pressure rises. – With internal parts made of FKM, e.g. for use with miner-
al oils
Type 41-23 · Standard version
– EPDM diaphragm with PTFE protective facing
Type 2412 Valve · Valve in NPS ½ to 4 (DN 15 to 100) · Plug
with metal seal · Body made of either cast iron A126B, cast – Actuator for remote set point adjustment (autoclave con-
steel A216 WCC or cast stainless steel A351 CF8M trol)
Type 2413 Actuator with EPDM rolling diaphragm – Bellows actuator for valves NPS ½ to 4 (DN 15 to 100)
Set point ranges 30 to 85 psi, 75 to 145 psi, 145 to
Version with additional features 320 psi, 300 to 400 psi (2 to 6 bar, 5 to 10 bar, 10 to
Pressure reducing valve with increased safety · Actuator with 22 bar, 20 to 28 bar)
leakage line connection and seal or two diaphragms and dia- – Valve with flow divider ST 1 or ST 3 (NPS 2½ to 4/DN 65
phragm rupture indicator · Valve with backup packing to 100) for particularly low-noise operation with gases
Steam pressure reducing valve with compensation chamber and vapors
for steam up to 660 °F (350 °C) – Version entirely of stainless steel
Pressure reducing valve for low flow rates · Valve with mi- – Stainless Cr steel seat and plug with PTFE soft seal (max.
cro-flow trim (CV = 0.0012 to 0.05/KVS = 0.001 to 0.04) or 440 °F/max. 220 °C) · With EPDM soft seal (max.
special CV/KVS coefficients (restricted cross-sectional area of 300 °F/max. 150 °C)
flow)
– Version for industrial gases
– Free of oil and grease for high-purity applications
1)
With CV ≤3/KVS ≤2.5: without balancing bellows
Associated Information Sheet u T 2500 Edition June 2017
Associated Data Sheet for accessories u T 2595 Data Sheet T 2513 EN
– Stellite®-faced seat and plug for low-wear operation The downstream pressure p2 to be controlled is tapped down-
– Wetted plastic parts conforming to FDA regulations (max. stream of the valve and transmitted over the control line (14) to
140 °F/max. 60 °C) the operating diaphragm (12) where it is converted into a po-
sitioning force. This force is used to move the valve plug (3)
Principle of operation (Fig. 2) according to the force of the set point spring (7).
The medium flows through the valve (1) as indicated by the The spring force is adjustable at the set point adjuster (6).
arrow. The position of the plug (3) determines the flow rate
When the force resulting from the downstream pressure p2 ris-
across the area released between plug and valve seat (2). The
es above the adjusted pressure set point, the valve closes pro-
plug stem (5) with the plug (3) is connected to the actuator
portionally to the change in pressure.
stem (11) of the actuator (10).
The fully balanced valve has a balancing bellows (4). The
To control the pressure, the operating diaphragm (12) is ten-
downstream pressure p2 acts on the inside of the bellows,
sioned by the set point springs (7) and the set point adjuster
whereas the upstream pressure p1 acts on the outside of the
(6) so that the valve is opened by the force of the set point
bellows. As a result, the forces produced by the upstream and
springs when it is relieved of pressure (p1= p2).
downstream pressures acting on the plug are balanced out.
p1 p2
21
1 20
16
2 13
13.1
3 Actuator with two diaphragms and diaphragm rupture indicator
15 25
4
5
6 13
13.1
7
8
Actuator with leakage line connection
Pillars are turned
into the plane of 14 300 to 400 psi 145 to 320 psi 30 to 85 psi (2 to 6 bar)
projection (20 to 28 bar) (10 to 22 bar) 75 to 145 psi (5 to 10 bar)
35 35
10
31
34
13 13
13
13.1 13.1
11 13.1
34
12
32 31
Functional diagram of Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve 30 30
Various versions of Type 2413 Actuator

1 Valve body (Type 2412) 10 Type 2413 Actuator 20 Diaphragm
2 Seat (exchangeable) 11 Actuator stem 21 Diaphragm rupture indicator
3 Plug (with metal seal) 12 Operating diaphragm with 25 Leakage line connection G ¼ – Adapter ¼ NPT (accessories)
diaphragm plate
4 Balancing bellows 13 Control line connection G ¼ with 30 Bellows actuator
¼ NPT adapter (accessories)
5 Plug stem 13.1 Screw joint with restriction 31 Bellows with lower section
6 Set point adjuster 14 Control line 32 Additional springs
7 Set point springs 15 Compensation chamber 34 Bellows stem
8 Bellows seal 16 Filler plug 35 Bracket
Fig. 2: Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
T 2513 EN
2
2 2
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Valve for small flow rates

CV ≤3 (KVS ≤2.5): without balancing bellows
Plug with soft seal Plug with metal seal, with flow divider ST 1 2 Seat
3.1 Plug with metal seal
3.2 Plug with soft seal
3.3 Flow divider
Fig. 3: Additional features of seat and plug for Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
Table 1: Technical data · All pressures (gauge)

Valve Type 2412
Class 125, 150 or 300
Nominal pressure
PN 16, 25 or 40
NPS ½ to 2 2½ and 3 4
Valve size
DN 15 to 50 65 and 80 100
Max. permissible psi 360 290 230

differential pressure bar 25 20 16
Temperature ranges See pressure-temperature diagram in u T 2500
Valve Metal seal: max. 660 °F (350 °C) · PTFE soft seal: max. 430 °F (220 °C) · EPDM, FKM soft seal:
plug max. 300 °F (150 °C) · NBR soft seal: max. 175 °F (80 °C)
Leakage class according to ANSI/ Metal seal: Leakage class I (≤0.05 % of CV/KVS coefficient)
FCI 70-2 Soft seal: Leakage class IV (≤0.01 % of CV/KVS coefficient)
Compliance ·
Diaphragm actuator Type 2413
0.75 to 3.5 psi · 1.5 to 8.5 psi · 3 to 17 psi · 10 to 35 psi 1)
30 to 75 psi · 65 to 145 psi · 115 to 230 psi
Set point ranges
0.05 to 0.25 bar · 0.1 to 0.6 bar · 0.2 to 1.2 bar
0.8 to 2.5 bar 1) · 2 to 5 bar · 4.5 to 10 bar · 8 to 16 bar
Gases 660 °F (350 °C), however, max. 175 °F (80 °C) at the actuator · Liquids 300 °F (150 °C), with
Max. permissible temperature
compensation chamber max. 660 °F (350 °C) · Steam with compensation chamber max. 660 °F (350 °C)
Bellows actuator Type 2413
Actuator area 5.1 sq. in (33 cm²) 9.6 sq. in (62 cm²)
145 to 320 psi (10 to 22 bar) 30 to 85 psi (2 to 6 bar)
Set point ranges
300 to 400 psi (20 to 28 bar) 75 to 145 psi (5 to 10 bar)
1) Version with actuator with two diaphragms: 15 to 35 psi/1 to 2.5 bar
Table 2: Max. perm. pressure at actuator

Set point ranges · Actuator with rolling diaphragm Set point ranges · Bellows actuator
0.75 to 1.5 to 3 to 10 to 30 to 65 to 115 to 30 to 75 to 145 to 300 to
3.5 psi 8.5 psi 17 psi 35 psi 75 psi 145 psi 230 psi 85 psi 145 psi 320 psi 400 psi
(0.05 to (0.1 to (0.2 to (0.8 to (2 to (4.5 to (8 to (2 to (5 to (10 to (20 to
0.25 bar) 0.6 bar) 1.2 bar) 2.5 bar) 5 bar) 10 bar) 16 bar) 6 bar) 10 bar) 22 bar) 28 bar)
Max. perm. pressure above the set point adjusted at the actuator
9 psi 9 psi 19 psi 36 psi 73 psi 145 psi 145 psi 94 psi 94 psi 116 psi 29 psi
(0.6 bar) (0.6 bar) (1.3 bar) (2.5 bar) (5 bar) (10 bar) (10 bar) (6.5 bar) (6.5 bar) (8 bar) (2 bar)
T 2513 EN
Table 3: Materials · Material numbers according to ASTM and DIN EN
Valve Type 2412
Pressure rating Class 125 (PN 16) Class 150 (PN 25) Class 150 (PN 25)
Class 300 (PN 40) Class 300 (PN 40)
Max. permissible temperature 570 °F (300 °C) 660 °F (350 °C) 660 °F (350 °C)
Body Cast iron A126B Cast steel A216 WCC Cast stainless steel A351 CF8M
Seat CrNi steel CrNiMo steel
Plug CrNi steel CrNiMo steel
Seal for soft-seated plug PTFE with 15 % glass fiber · EPDM · NBR · FKM
Guide bushing PTFE/graphite
Balancing bellows and bellows seal Stainless steel 1.4571
Actuator Type 2413
Diaphragm cases Sheet steel DD11 (StW22) 1)
Diaphragm EPDM with fabric insert 2) · FKM for mineral oils · NBR · EPDM with PTFE protective facing
1) In corrosion-resistant version (CrNi steel)
2) Standard version; see Special versions for other diaphragms
Installation – Control line kit (optionally with or

Normally, the valve is installed with the without compensation chamber) for
actuator suspended downwards. Install direct attachment to the valve and ac-
pipelines horizontally with a slight down- tuator (pressure tapped directly at the
ward slope on both sides of the valve for valve body, for set points
drainage of the condensate. ≥12 psi/0.8 bar).
For further details on installation refer to – Compensation chamber for conden-
Mounting and Operating Instructions sation and to protect the operating di-
u EB 2512. aphragm against extreme tempera-
The direction of flow must match the ar- tures. A compensation chamber is re-
Type 41-23 · Standard quired for liquids above 300 °F
row on the valve body. version
(150 °C) as well as for steam.
– The control line must be adapted to
For detailed information on accessories Type 41-23 · With
match the onsite conditions and is not delivered with the
control line and
valve. On customer request, a control line kit for pressure refer to Data Sheet u T 2595 compensation
tapping directly at the valve body (see Accessories) is chamber
available. Ordering text
Accessories Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
Included in the scope of delivery: Additional features ...
– Screw joint with restriction for 3/8” control line. Valve size NPS (DN) ...
Class (PN) …, body material ...
To be ordered separately:
CV coefficient (KVS coefficient) ...
– Adapter G ¼ to ¼ NPT, various screw fittings.
Set point range ... psi (bar)
Optionally, special version ..., accessories ... (u T 2595)
Dimensions (see Table 4)
H2
Type 41-23 Universal
Pressure Reducing Valve H1
H
Actuator with two diaphragms: H
H + 2” (H + 50 mm)
Type 2413 Bellows Actuator
ØD
Fig. 4: Dimensions
T 2513 EN
Table 4: Dimensions and weights
Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve
Valve size NPS (DN) ½ (15) ¾ (20) 1 (25) 1½ (40) 2 (50) 2½ (65) 3 (80) 4 (100)
Inch – – 7.25 8.75 10.0 10.87 11.75 13.87
Class 125
mm – – 184 222 254 276 298 352
Inch 7.25 7.25 7.25 8.75 10.0 10.87 11.73 13.88
Length L Class 150
mm 184 184 184 222 254 276 298 352
Inch 7.50 7.63 7.75 9.25 10.50 11.50 12.50 14.50
Class 300
mm 190 194 197 235 267 292 318 368
Inch 13.19 15.35 20.08 20.67
Height H1
mm 335 390 510 525
Inch 1.7 2.83 3.93 4.72
Height H2
mm 44 72 98 118
Set point ranges Dimension Dimensions
psi bar
Height H 17.52” (445 mm) 19.69” (500 mm) 24.41” (620 mm) 25.0” (635)
0.75 to 0.05
Actuator ØD = 15.0” (380 mm), A = 100 in² (640 cm²)
3.5 to 0.25
Valve spring force 1750 N
Height H 17.52” (445 mm) 19.69” (500 mm) 24.41” (620 mm) 25.0” (635)
1.5 0.1
to 8.5 to 0.6
Height H 16.93” (430 mm) 18.90” (480 mm) 23.62” (600 mm) 24.4” (620)
3 0.2
to 17 to 1.2
Height H 16.93” (430 mm) 19.09” (485 mm) 23.82” (605 mm) 24.4” (620)
10 to 0.8 to
35 2) 2.5 2)
Height H 16.10” (410 mm) 18.31” (465 mm) 23.03” (585 mm) 23.62” (600)
30 2
to 75 to 5
Height H 16.10” (410 mm) 18.31” (465 mm) 23.03” (585 mm) 23.62” (600)
65 4.5 to Actuator ØD = 6.69” (170 mm), A = 6 in² (40 cm²)
to 145 10
Height H 16.10” (410 mm) 18.31” (465 mm) 23.03” (585 mm) 23.62” (600)
115 8
to 230 to 16 Actuator ØD = 6.69” (170 mm), A = 6 in² (40 cm²)
0.75 to 0.05 lb 49.6 52 69.4 77.2 112.4 127.8 147.7
8.5 to 0.6 kg 22.5 23.5 31.5 35 51 58 67
3 0.2 to Weight 1), lb 37.5 39.7 56.2 64 99.2 114.6 134.5
to 35 2.5 approx. kg 16 18 25.5 29 45 52 61
30 2 lb 26.5 28.7 46.3 53 88.2 103.6 123.5
to 230 to 16 kg 12 13 21 24 40 47 56
Bellows actuator
Height H 21.65” (550 mm) 23.82” (605 mm) 28.54” (725 mm) 29.13” (740)
30 2
Actuator A = 9.6 in² (62 cm²)
to 85 to 6
Height H 21.65” (550 mm) 23.82” (605 mm) 28.54” (725 mm) 29.13” (740)
75 5
to 145 to 10
Height H 21.06” (535 mm) 23.23” (590 mm) 27.95” (710 mm) 28.54” (725)
145 10
to 320 to 22
Height H 21.06” (535 mm) 23.23” (590 mm) 27.95” (710 mm) 28.54” (725)
300 20
to 400 to 28
A = 5.1 in² lb 36 39 40 56 64 106 123 146
(33 cm²) 1) kg 16.5 17.9 18 25.5 29 48 56 66
Weight ,
lb 46 47 49 65 73 119 143 165
A = 9.6 in² approx.
(62 cm²) kg 20.9 21.5 22 29.5 33 54 65 75
1) Based on Class 150; +10 % for Class 300

2) Version with actuator with two diaphragms: 14.5 to 35 psi/1 to 2.5 bar
T 2513 EN
Table 5: CV (KVS) coefficients and xFZ values · Terms for noise level calculation according to VDMA 24422, edition 1.89
Valve size Standard xFZ Special version xFZ With flow divider
NPS | DN CV KVS CV KVS CV 1 KVS 1 CV 3 KVS 3
0.12 · 0.5 · 1.2 0.1 · 0.4 · 1 0.7 · 0.65 · 0.6
½ | 15 3 2.5 0.55
5 4 0.5 3.5 3
0.12 · 0.5 · 1.2 0.1 · 0.4 · 1 0.7 · 0.65 · 0.6
3 2.5 0.55
¾ | 20
5 4 0.5
7.5 6.3 0.45 6 5
0.12 · 0.5 · 1.2 0.1 · 0.4 · 1 0.7 · 0.65 · 0.6
1 | 25 3 2.5 0.55
9.4 8 0.4 3 · 5 · 7.5 4 · 6.3 0.5 · 0.45 7.2 6
7.5 · 9.4 6.3 · 8 0.45 · 0.4
1½ | 40
23 20 0.4 20 16 0.4 17 15
9.4 8 0.4 7.2 6
2 | 50
37 32 0.4 20 · 23 16 · 20 0.45 · 0.4 30 25
23 · 37 20 · 32 0.4 30 25
2½ | 65
60 50 0.4 45 38 30 25
37 32 0.4 30 25
3 | 80
94 80 0.35 60 50 0.4 70 60 46 40
60 50 0.4 45 38
4 | 100
145 125 0.35 110 95 70 60
1) With CV 0.0012 to 0.05/KVS 0.001 to 0.04: valve with micro-trim (NPS ½ to 1/DN 15 to 25 only) without balancing bellows
Valve-specific correction terms ΔLF · For liquids:

ΔLG · For gases and vapors: ΔLF = –10 · (xF – xFZ) · y
Values as specified in the diagram Δp K
with xF = and y = V
p1 – pV KVS
∆LG [dB(A)]
Terms for control valve sizing according to IEC 60534,
0
Parts 2-1 and 2-2:
FL = 0.95, XT = 0.75
-4
-8 xFZ · Acoustical valve coefficient

Sitz Ø 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
DN
-12
CV 1 (KVS 1), CV 3 (KVS 3) · When a flow divider ST 1 or ST 3
is installed as a noise-reducing component · Flow characteris-
-16
tic differences between valves with and valves without flow di-
X= p viders do not occur until the valve has passed through approx.
∆p
1
-20
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 80 % of its travel range.
Fig. 5: Diagram · ΔLG for gases and vapors
Specifications subject to change without notice

2/3-way globe valve up to DN 40

4 845
2-port valves 3-port valves 3-port valves with T-bypass

VVP45.10-0.25 to VVP45.25-4 VXP45.10-0.25 to VXP45.25-6.3 VMP45.10-0.25 to VMP45.20-4
2-port valves 3-port valves

VVP45.25-6.3 to VVP45.40-25 VXP45.25-10 to VXP45.40-25
ACVATIX™
2-port and 3-port valves VVP45..

PN 16 VXP45..
VMP45..
Bronze CC499K valve body
DN 10…DN 40
kvs 0.25…25m3/h
Flat seal male threaded connections G...B to ISO 228-1 for
Sets of ALG.. screwed fittings with threaded connection (available from Siemens)
SERTO compression fittings, type SO 00021.. (available from suppliers to the
trade)
Manual adjuster
Can be equipped with SSB.. or SSC.. electromotoric actuators
Use
In ventilation and air-conditioning systems for water-side terminal unit control in closed
circuits, e.g. induction units, fan coil units, small reheaters and small re-coolers, for use
in:
2-pipe systems with one heat exchanger for heating and cooling
4-pipe systems with two separate heat exchangers for heating and cooling
In closed-circuit zone heating systems, e.g.
Individual floors in a building
Apartments
Individual rooms
CE1N4845en
2016-08-16 Building Technologies

Type summary
1)
VVP45.. VXP45.. VMP45.. DN Connection kvs kvs Sv
2-port 3-port 3-port with T-bypass A AB B AB
3 3
[m /h] [m /h]
VVP45.10-0.25 VXP45.10-0.25 VMP45.10-0.25 0.25 0.18
VVP45.10-0.4 VXP45.10-0.4 VMP45.10-0.4 0.4 0.28
VVP45.10-0.63 VXP45.10-0.63 VMP45.10-0.63 10 G ½B 0.63 0.44
VVP45.10-1 VXP45.10-1 VMP45.10-1 1.0 0.70
> 50
VVP45.10-1.6 VXP45.10-1.6 VMP45.10-1.6 1.6 1.12
VVP45.15-2.5 VXP45.15-2.5 VMP45.15-2.5 15 G ¾B 2.5 1.75
VVP45.20-4 VXP45.20-4 VMP45.20-4 20 G 1B 4.0 2.80
VVP45.25-6.3 VXP45.25-6.3 G 1¼B 6.3 4.40
25
VVP45.25-10 VXP45.25-10 G 1½B 10
VVP45.32-16 VXP45.32-16 32 G 2B 16 > 100
VVP45.40-25 VXP45.40-25 40 G 2¼B 25
1)
Valid for 3-port version only
DN = Nominal size
kvs = Nominal flow rate of cold water (5…30 °C) through the fully open valve (H 100) by a differential
pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)
Sv = Rangeability kvs / kvr
kvr = Smallest kv value, at which the flow characteristic tolerances can still be maintained, by a
differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)
Accessories Product no. Stock no. Description

ALG..2 ALG..2 Set of 2 fittings with threaded connections for 2-port valves, consisting of 2
ALG..2B S55846-Z1.. union nuts, 2 discs and 2 flat seals.
ALG..2B are brass fittings, for media temperatures up to 100 °C.
ALG..3 ALG..3 Set of 3 fittings with threaded connections for 2-port valves, consisting of 3
ALG..3B S55846-Z1.. union nuts, 3 discs and 3 flat seals.
ALG..2B are brass fittings, for media temperatures up to 100 °C.
Ordering
Example: Product number Stock no. Description Quantity

VVP45.15-2.5 VVP45.15-2.5 2-port valve 20
ALG142 ALG142 Set of 2 fittings 20
VMP45.20-4 VMP45.20-4 3-port valve with T-bypass 10
ALG152B S55846-Z100 Set of 3 fittings 20
For 3-port valves with T-bypass VMP45..order two sets of 3 screwed fittings.
Delivery Valves, actuators and accessories are packed and supplied separately.
Spare parts, rev. no. See overview, page 10.

Equipment combinations
Valves Actuators Set of fittings

SSB.. SSC..
pmax ps pmax ps Malleable cast iron Brass
[kPa] Type / Stock no. Type Stock no.
1)
VVP45.10-0.25 to 1.6 400 725 ALG132 ALG132
1)
VVP45.15-2.5 350 350 ALG142 ALG142
2)
VVP45.20-4 350 350 350 350 ALG152 ALG152B S55846-Z100
2)
VVP45.25-6.3 300 300 300 300 ALG202 ALG202B S55846-Z102
2)
VVP45.25-10 300 300 ALG252 ALG252B S55846-Z104
2)
VVP45.32-16 175 175 ALG322 ALG322B S55846-Z106
2)
VVP45.40-25 75 75 ALG402 ALG402B S55846-Z108
1)
VXP45.10-0.25 to 1.6 400 ALG133 ALG133
1)
VXP45.15-2.5 350 ALG143 ALG143
2)
VXP45.20-4 350 350 ALG153 ALG153B S55846-Z101
2)
VXP45.25-6.3 300 300 ALG203 ALG203B S55846-Z103
2)
VXP45.25-10 300 ALG253 ALG253B S55846-Z105
2)
VXP45.32-16 175 ALG323 ALG323B S55846-Z107
2)
VXP45.40-25 75 ALG403 ALG403B S55846-Z109
1)
VMP45.10-0.25 to 1.6 400 2 x ALG132 ALG132
1)
VMP45.15-2.5 350 2 x ALG142 ALG142
2)
VMP45.20-4 350 2 x ALG152 2 x ALG152B S55846-Z100
1)
Connecting thread pipe side: Internally threaded
2)
Usable up to maximum medium temperature of 100 °C
pmax = Maximum permissible differential pressure across valve’s control path, valid for the entire
actuating range of the motorized valve.
ps = Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve will close securely
against the pressure (close off pressure).
Actuator overview Type reference Operating Positioning Positioning Positioning for valves Data
voltage signal time force with kvs sheet
SSB31.. AC 230 V
3-position 150 s 3
SSB81.. AC 24 V 200 N to 6.3 m /h N4891
SSB61.. AC/DC 24 V DC 0...10 V 75 s
SSC31.. AC 230 V
3-position 150 s 3
SSC81.. AC 24 V 300 N from 4 m /h N4895
SSC61.. AC/DC 24 V DC 0...10 V 30 s

Sizing
pmax = Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve’s control path, valid for the entire
actuating range of the motorized valve
pv100 = Differential pressure across the fully open valve and the valve’s control path by a volume flow
V100
V 100 =
100 kPa = 1 bar 10 mWS
1 m 3/h = 0.278 l/s water at 20 °C
Example: 1 V 100 = 0.083 l/s

2 pv100 = 9 kPa
3 kvs-value = 1.0 m3/h

Valve flow V..45.10-0.25 to V..45.25-6.3 V..P45.25-10 to V..P45.40-25
characteristic
4845D03
4845D02
V100 V100
1 1
B
B
0,8 0,8 A
A
B
AB
A
0,6 B 0,6
A
AB
A AB
0,4 0,4
A AB B
0,2 0,2
B
0 0
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1
H0 H100 H0 H100
The kvs-values in bypass B for valve types V..45.10-0.25.to V..45.25-6.3 represent only
70 % of the k vs-value in the straight-through control path A AB (for other types
100 %). This compensates for the flow resistance of the heat exchanger or radiator, so
keeping the overall flow rate, V 100 as constant as possible.
Engineering notes
Valve construction Valve series Valve flow in control mode Valve stem
Inlet A Inlet B Outlet AB Retracted Extended
2-port valves VVP45..
4845Z12
A AB A AB
A AB variable variable opens closes
AB
3-port valves VXP45..
A AB A AB
A AB variable variable constant opens closes
A AB B
AB AB
B B
closes opens
4845Z13
B
3-port valves with T-bypass VMP45..
4845Z14
A AB A AB
A AB variable variable constant opens closes
B
A AB AB AB
B B
closes opens
B
Warning! The direction of flow MUST be as indicated by the arrow, i.e. only from
A AB and B AB.
The 3-port valve types VXP45.. and VMP45.. may only be used in mixing
applications

We recommend installation in the return pipe, as the temperatures in this pipe are lower
for applications in heating systems, which in turn, extends the stem sealing gland’s life.
Recommendation: Always use a strainer upstream of the valve to increase the valve’s functional safety.
Mounting notes
Both valve and actuator can easily be assembled at the mounting location. Neither
special tools nor adjustments are required.
The valve is supplied with Mounting Instructions 4 319 9526 0.
Orientation 90° 90°
Commissioning notes
Commission the valve only if the manual knob or actuator has been mounted
correctly.
Manual adjustment The straight-through path A AB can be opened electrically via the actuator, or
manually. With three-port valves, this throttles or closes bypass B.
Manually, path A AB can only be opened to 70 % (bypass closes to 30 %). The

valves with kvs values 10, 16 and 25 can be fully opened whereas the bypass can be
fully closed.
The valves are closed by a return spring.
Maintenance
V..P45.. valves require no maintenance. .
Warning When doing service work on the valve / actuator:

Deactivate the pump and turn off the power supply
Close the shuttoff valves
Fully reduce the pressure in the piping system and allow pipes to completely cool
down
If necessary, disconnect the electrical wires.
Before putting the valve into operation again, make certain the manual knob or the
actuator is correctly fitted.
Stem sealing gland The stem sealing gland cannot be exchanged. In the case of leakage, the entire valve
must be replaced. Contact your local office or branch.
Disposal Do not dispose of the device as household waste.
Warning
Due to the tensioned spring return, valve disassembly may result in flying parts
causing possible injury.
Only authorized staff may disassemble valves with tensioned spring return!
Disposal
Special handling of individual components may be mandated by law or
make ecological sense.
Observe all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.

Warranty
The technical data given for these applications is valid only in conjunction with the
Siemens actuators as detailed under «Equipment combinations».
All terms of the warranty will be invalidated by the use of actuators from other
manufacturers.
Technical data
Functional data PN class PN16 to EN 1333

Permissible operating pressure 1600 kPa (16 bar) to ISO 7628 / EN 1333
Valve flow characteristic
Through-port A AB to kvs 6.3 equal percentage; ngl = 2.2 to VDI / VDE 2173
Through-port A AB from kvs 10 linear
Bypass B AB linear
Leakage rate to DIN EN 1349
Through-port A AB 0…0.02 % of kvs-value
Bypass B AB 0…0.02 % of kvs-value
Permissible media low temperature hot water, chilled water, water
with anti-freeze
recommendation: water treatment to VDI 2035
Medium temperature 1...110 °C, short-term max. 120 °C
Rangeability S v > 50 resp. > 100 (refer to «Type summary»)
Nominal stroke 5.5 mm
Materials Valve body bronze CC499K
Stem stainless steel
Plug, seat, gland brass
Sealing gland EPDM-O-rings
Fitting bypass VVP45.., kvs 6.3 to 25:
union nut Malleable cast iron
disc Stainless steel
gasket Klinger SIL C-4300
Dimensions / Weight Dimensions refer to «Dimensions»
Threaded connections
Valve G...B to ISO 228-1
Screwed fittings R/Rp... to ISO 7-1, G... to ISO 228-1
Actuator connection G ¾’’
Weight refer to «Dimensions»
Standards, directives and Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU
approvals Pressure Accessories Scope: Article 1, section 1
Definitions: Article 2, section 5
Fluid group 2 without CE-marking as per article 4, section 3
(sound engineering practice) 1)
EAC Conformity Eurasia Conformity
2)
Environmental compatibility The product environmental declaration CE1E4845en contains data on environmentally
compatible product design and assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition,
packaging, environmental benefit, disposal).
1)
Valves where PS x DN < 1000, do not require special testing and cannot carry the CE label.

Dimensions
2-port valves 3-port valves 3-port valves with T-bypass

VVP45.. VXP45.. VMP45..
H
H2
H2
H2
H1
H1
H1
G
G
L3
L4
4845M02
L2
4845M01
L2
L1
L1
4845M03
L2
L1
Type reference DN G H H1 H2 L1 L2 L4 Weight
[inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]

A AB
VVP45.10-0.25…1.6 10 G ½B 44.9 54 60 30 20 0.26
VVP45.15-2.5 15 G ¾B 44.9 54 65 32,5 20 0.30

> 200
VVP45.20-4 20 G 1B 48.9 58 80 40 24 0.42
VVP45.25-6.3 G 1¼B 51 60 80 40 49 0.76

25
VVP45.25-10 G 1½B 62.5 71 105 52.5 62.5 1.40
VVP45.32-16 32 G 2B > 280 69 78 105 52.5 63.5 1.95
VVP45.40-25 40 G 2¼B 72 81 130 65 76 2.75
Type reference DN G H H1 H2 L1 L2 L3 Weight

A AB
VXP45.10-0.25…1.6 10 G ½B 44.9 54 60 30 30 0.28
B
VXP45.15-2.5 15 G ¾B 44.9 54 65 32.5 32.5 0.34
> 200
VXP45.20-4 20 G 1B 48.9 58 80 40 40 0.48
VXP45.25-6.3 25 G 1¼B 51 60 80 40 40 0.64
VXP45.25-10 25 G 1½B 62.5 81 105 52.5 52.5 1.20
VXP45.32-16 32 G 2B > 280 69 88 105 52.5 52.5 1.60
VXP45.40-25 40 G 2¼B 72 91 130 65 65 2.30
Type reference DN G H H1 H2 K L1 L2 Weight

A AB
B VMP45.10-0.25…1.6 10 G ½B 44.9 54 40 60 30 0.36
VMP45.15-2.5 15 G ¾B > 200 44.9 54 40 65 32.5 0.46
VMP45.20-4 20 G 1B 48.9 58 50 80 40 0.64

Sets of screwed fittings with flat
4847Z09
seal
ALG132 pipe side with
G
available from Siemens ALG133
R
ALG142 externally R
ALG143 threads
ALG…2: set of 2 screwed fittings T
ALG…3: set of 3 screwed fittings L
ALG152 ALG152B
4847Z10
ALG153 ALG153B
ALG202 ALG202B
ALG203 ALG203B pipe side with
Rp
G
ALG252 ALG252B
ALG253 ALG253B internally Rp
ALG322 ALG322B threads
ALG323 ALG323B T
ALG402 ALG402B L
ALG403 ALG403B
Compression fittings
(available from suppliers to the
trade)
SERTO SO 00021..
Type ALG.. for valve type DN G R Rp L T Type SERTO D

1)
SO 00021..
1)
Malleable cast iron Brass [Inch] [Inch] [Inch] [mm] [mm] www.serto.com [mm]
ALG132 VVP45.10-0.25...1.6 SO 00021-12-1/2” 12
ALG133 VXP45.10-0.25...1.6 10 G½ R 24 9 SO 00021-14-1/2” 14
2 x ALG132 VMP45.10-0.25...1.6 SO 00021-15-1/2” 15
ALG142 VVP45.15-2.5
SO 00021-17-3/4” 17
ALG143 VXP45.15-2.5 15 G¾ R½ 29,5 12
SO 00021-18-3/4” 18
2 x ALG142 VMP45.15-2.5
ALG152 ALG152B VVP45.20-4
ALG153 ALG153B VXP45.20-4 20 G1 Rp½ 23 13
2 x ALG152 2 x ALG152B VMP45.20-4
ALG202 ALG202B VVP45.25-6.3

G1¼ Rp¾ 25 15
ALG203 ALG203B VXP45.25-6.3
25
ALG252 ALG252B VVP45.25-10
G1½ Rp1 27 17
ALG253 ALG253B VXP45.25-10
ALG322 ALG322B VVP45.32-16

32 G2 Rp1¼ 32 19
ALG323 ALG323B VXP45.32-16
ALG402 ALG402B VVP45.40-25

40 G2¼ Rp1½ 32 19
ALG403 ALG403B VXP45.40-25
1)
Usable up to maximum medium temperature of 100 °C
2)
SO 00021-17.. and SO 00021-18 on request
On valve side: cylindrical thread to ISO 228-1
On pipe side: with cylindrical thread to ISO 7-1
ALG..B for media temperatures up to 100 °C

Spare parts
Type Stock No. Description Number

74 6760 273 0 74 6760 273 0 Manual knob for short stroke valves 10
Revision numbers
Type Valid from rev. no. Type Valid from rev. no. Type Valid from rev. no.
VVP45.10-0.25 /01 VXP45.10-0.25 /01 VMP45.10-0.25 /01
VVP45.10-0.4 /01 VXP45.10-0.4 /01 VMP45.10-0.4 /01
VVP45.10-0.63 /01 VXP45.10-0.63 /01 VMP45.10-0.63 /01
VVP45.10-1 /01 VXP45.10-1 /01 VMP45.10-1 /01
VVP45.10-1.6 /01 VXP45.10-1.6 /01 VMP45.10-1.6 /01
VVP45.15-2.5 /01 VXP45.15-2.5 /01 VMP45.15-2.5 /01
VVP45.20-4 /01 VXP45.20-4 /01 VMP45.20-4 /01
VVP45.25-6.3 /01 VXP45.25-6.3 /01
VVP45.25-10 /01 VXP45.25-10 /01
VVP45.32-16 /01 VXP45.32-16 /01
VVP45.40-25 /01 VXP45.40-25 /01

2/3-way globe valve up from DN 50 up to DN 150

4 405
VVF53.. VXF53..
VVF53..K
ACVATIX™
2- and 3-port valves with VVF53..

flanged connections, PN 25 VXF53..
From the large-stroke valve line
∂ High-performance valves for medium temperatures from -20…220 °C

∂ Valve body of nodular cast iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT or higher
∂ DN 15…250
∂ kvs 0.16…630 m3/h
∂ Flange type 21, flange design B
∂ VVF53..K with pressure compensation to handle high differential pressure
∂ Equipable with electro-motoric actuators SAX.., SAV.. or electro-hydraulic
actuators SKD.., SKB.., SKC..
Use
In boiler, district heating and refrigeration plants, cooling towers, heating groups, and in
air handling units as control or shutoff valves.
For use in closed or open hydraulic circuits (observe cavitation).
CE1N4405en Building Technologies

2018-02-01

Type summary
3) 2) 3)
Valves Actuators SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV SKC..
Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
PN 25 Positioning force 800 N 1000 N 2800 N 1600 N 2800 N
1)
PN 16 Data sheet N4501 N4561 N4664 N4503 N4566
DN kvs SV Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax
3
Stock no. [m /h] [kPa]
Fluids VVF53.15-0.16 S55208-V100 15 0.16
Preferred flow VVF53.15-0.2 S55208-V101 15 0.2
direction VVF53.15-0.25 S55208-V102 15 0.25
A-AB with VVF53.15-0.32 S55208-V103 15 0.32
fluids for low VVF53.15-0.4 S55208-V104 15 0.4
noise > 50
VVF53.15-0.5 S55208-V105 15 0.5
operation and
VVF53.15-0.63 S55208-V106 15 0.63
high kvs-
VVF53.15-0.8 S55208-V107 15 0.8
values with all 2500 2500
VVF53.15-1 S55208-V108 15 1
actuator types
VVF53.15-1.25 S55208-V109 15 1.25
1200 1200
VVF53.15-1.6 S55208-V110 15 1.6 2500 - -
VVF53.15-2 S55208-V111 15 2
VVF53.15-2.5 S55208-V112 15 2.5 1200
VVF53.15-3.2 S55208-V113 15 3.2 - -
VVF53.15-4 S55208-V114 15 4
VVF53.20-6.3 S55208-V116 20 6.3
VVF53.25-5 S55208-V117 25 5
VVF53.25-6.3 S55208-V118 25 6.3
1600 2100
VVF53.25-8 S55208-V119 25 8
VVF53.25-10 S55208-V120 25 10
VVF53.32-16 S55208-V122 32 16 900 750 1200 1100
> 100
VVF53.40-12.5 S55208-V123 40 12.5
VVF53.40-16 S55208-V124 40 16
550 500 750 650 2000 1250 1150
VVF53.40-20 S55208-V125 40 20
VVF53.40-25 S55208-V126 40 25
VVF53.50-31.5 S55208-V127 50 31.5
350 300 450 400 1200 1150 750 700
VVF53.50-40 S55208-V128 50 40
VVF53.65-63 S55208-V129 65 63 450 400 700 650
VVF53.80-100 S55208-V130 80 100 250 225 450 400
VVF53.100-160 S55208-V131 100 160 - - - - - - 160 125 300 250
VVF53.125-250 S55208-V132 125 250 125 90 175 160
VVF53.150-400 S55208-V133 150 400 80 60 125 100
Fluids and VVF53.50-40K S55208-V134 50 40 2500 1250 2500 1250 - -
Steam
VVF53.65-63K S55208-V135 65 63
Compensated
valves are VVF53.80-100K S55208-V136 80 100
optimized for VVF53.100-150K S55208-V158 100 150 > 100
a single flow 2500 1250
direction for VVF53.125-220K S55208-V159 125 220 - - - -
fluids and - - - -
steam. VVF53.150-315K S55208-V160 150 315
DN 50..150:
VVF53.200-450K S55208-V161 200 450 1200 800
AB-A
> 50
DN 200/250:
VVF53.250-630K S55208-V162 250 630 1000 800
A-AB
1)
DN 15…50: Flange dimensions for PN 16 and PN 25
DN 65…250: Flange dimensions only for PN 25
2)
Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 150 °C
3)
Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 130 °C; SAV.. available in select countries only
DN = Nominal size
kvs = Flow nominal value of cold water (5...30 °C) through the fully opened valve (H 100) at a differential pressure of
100 kPa (1 bar)
Sv = Rangeability
∆ps = Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve still closes securely against the
pressure
∆pmax = Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve’s throughport for the entire positioning range of
the motorized valve

5) 2) 5)
Valves Actuators SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV.. SKC..
Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
PN 25 Positioning force 800 N 1000 N 2800 N 1600 N 2800 N
1)
PN 16 Data sheet N4501 N4561 N4664 N4503 N4566
DN kvs SV Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax
3
Stock no. [m /h] [kPa]
3)
Steam VVF53.15-0.16 S55208-V100 15 0.16
Exclusive VVF53.15-0.2 S55208-V101 15 0.2
flow VVF53.15-0.25 S55208-V102 15 0.25
direction VVF53.15-0.32 S55208-V103 15 0.32
AB-A for VVF53.15-0.4 S55208-V104 15 0.4
steam. VVF53.15-0.5 S55208-V105 15 0.5 > 50
Also
VVF53.15-0.63 S55208-V106 15 0.63
useful for
VVF53.15-0.8 S55208-V107 15 0.8
maximum
VVF53.15-1 S55208-V108 15 1
close-off
pressure VVF53.15-1.25 S55208-V109 15 1.25
ΧpS and VVF53.15-1.6 S55208-V110 15 1.6 1200
maximum VVF53.15-2 S55208-V111 15 2
differential VVF53.15-2.5 S55208-V112 15 2.5
pressure VVF53.15-3.2 S55208-V113 15 3.2 2500 2500 1200 - -
4)
in VVF53.15-4 S55208-V114 15 3.6
4)
operation VVF53.20-6.3 S55208-V116 20 5
(Χpmax) - - - -
VVF53.25-5 S55208-V117 25 5
with fluids. VVF53.25-6.3 S55208-V118 25 6.3
Use with VVF53.25-8 S55208-V119 25 8
electro- 4)
VVF53.25-10 S55208-V120 25 8
hydraulic 4)
VVF53.32-16 S55208-V122 32 15
actuators
VVF53.40-12.5 S55208-V123 40 12.5 > 100
only
VVF53.40-16 S55208-V124 40 16
1000
VVF53.40-20 S55208-V125 40 20
4)
VVF53.40-25 S55208-V126 40 23
VVF53.50-31.5 S55208-V127 50 31.5
600
VVF53.50-40 S55208-V128 50 40
VVF53.65-63 S55208-V129 65 63 1000
VVF53.80-100 S55208-V130 80 100 750
4)
VVF53.100-160 S55208-V131 100 150 - - - - 2500 500
4)
VVF53.125-250 S55208-V132 125 220 300
4)
VVF53.150-400 S55208-V133 150 360 200
Δpmax
DN kvs SV [kPa]
3
Stock no. [m /h]
Fluids VXF53.15-1.6 S55208-V140 15 1.6
VXF53.15-2.5 S55208-V141 15 2.5
VXF53.15-4 S55208-V142 15 4
1200 1200
VXF53.20-6.3 S55208-V144 20 6.3 - -
VXF53.25-6.3 S55208-V145 25 6.3 200 1200
200 200 - -
VXF53.25-10 S55208-V146 25 10
VXF53.32-16 S55208-V148 32 16 750 1100
VXF53.40-16 S55208-V149 40 16 > 100
500 650 1150
VXF53.40-25 S55208-V150 40 25 200
VXF53.50-40 S55208-V152 50 40 300 100 400 1150 700
VXF53.65-63 S55208-V153 65 63 400 100 650 200
VXF53.80-100 S55208-V154 80 100 225 400 200
VXF53.100-160 S55208-V155 100 160 - - - - - - 125 250 150
50
VXF53.125-250 S55208-V156 125 250 90 160 100
VXF53.150-400 S55208-V157 150 400 60 100 70
1)
DN 15…50: Flange dimensions for PN 16 and PN 25
DN 65…150: Flange dimensions only for PN 25
2)
Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 150 °C
3)
Operate with opposite flow direction with steam
4)
Reduced kvs value
5)
Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 130 °C; SAV.. available in select countries only

Note When using a stem heating element with a medium temperature of below –5 °C,
the stem sealing gland must be replaced. In this case, the sealing gland must be
ordered separately.
DN Stock number
DN 15…50 4 284 8806 0
DN 65…150 4 679 5629 0
Spare parts, Rev.-No. See page 18
Accessories
Product
Stock number Description Note
number
Stem heating
ASZ6.6 S55845-Z108 Required for medium temperatures < 0 °C
element
When using valves of the V..F53.. lines DN 15…50 with a

stem heating element and a medium temperature
Stem sealing below -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced.
- 4 284 8806 0
gland With the gland 428488060 the valve can be used with
water, water with antifreeze and brines between -20 °C
and 150 °C.
When using valves of the V..F53.. lines DN 65…150 with

a stem heating element and a medium temperature
Stem sealing below -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced.
- 4 679 5629 0
gland With the gland 467956290 the valve can be used with
water, water with antifreeze and brines between -20 °C
and 150 °C.
Adapter type Stock number Bolts included Description VXF41..

ALF41B15 S55845-Z110 4x M12x90mm Adapter for replacing 3-port valves VXF41.. by DN 15 DN 15
VXF53..
ALF41B25 S55845-Z111 4x M12x90mm ∂ Due to different dimensions of the bypass DN 25
ALF41B40 S55845-Z112 4x M16x90mm flange DN 40

∂ Every valve to be replaced requires an
ALF41B50 S55845-Z113 4x M16x90mm adapter DN 50
∂ Adapter is supplied with the required
number and size of bolts and nuts as well
as two suitable flat sealings
Replace 3-port valves VXF41.., DN 65…150
by 3-port valvesVXF43.. (data sheet N4404).

Product Positioning Operating Positioning Spring Positioning Manual Auxiliary

Description Stroke LED
number force voltage signal return time time adjuster functions
SAX31.00 S55150-A105 120 s 1) 2)
AC 230 V 3-position , ,
SAX31.03 S55150-A106
Push and
0…10 V - -
SAX61.03 30 s fix
S55150-A100 3) 4)
SAX61.03U S55150-A100-A100 20 mm 800 N
4…20 mA ,
0…1000 Ω
AC/DC 24 V
SAX81.00 S55150-A102 120 s
Push and 1) 2)
SAX81.03 S55150-A103 3-position - -
fix
, ,
30 s
SAX81.03U S55150-A103-A100
Opening: 30 s
SKD32.21 SKD32.21 8s
Closing: 10 s
1) 2)
SKD32.50 SKD32.50
AC 230 V 3-position
-
- , ,
120 s
SKD32.51 SKD32.51 8s
SKD60 SKD60 -
0…10 V Turn, 3)
SKD62 SKD62 20 mm 1000 N Opening: 30 s Position is
4…20 mA Ο
SKD62U SKD62U 15 s Closing: 15 s
0…1000 Ω maintained
5)
SKD62UA SKD62UA
AC 24 V
SKD82.50 SKD82.50
-
SKD82.50U SKD82.50U 1) 2)
3-position 120 s - , ,
SKD82.51 SKD82.51
8s
SKD82.51U SKD82.51U
SKB32.50 SKB32.50 - 1) 2)
AC 230 V 3-position 120 s - , ,
SKB32.51 SKB32.51 10 s
SKB60 SKB60 -
0…10 V Opening: 3)
SKB62 SKB62
4…20 mA 120 s Ο Turn,
SKB62U SKB62U 10 s
20 mm 2800 N 0…1000 Ω Closing:10 s Position is
5)
SKB62UA SKB62UA maintained
AC 24 V
SKB82.50 SKB82.50
-
SKB82.50U SKB82.50U 1) 2)
SKB82.51 SKB82.51
10 s
SKB82.51U SKB82.51U
8) 1) 2) 6)
SAV31.00 S55150-A112 AC 230 V 3-position - , ,
8) DC 0...10 V
SAV61.00 S55150-A110 1) 3) 6) 7)
8) DC 4...24 mA Ο Push and , , ,
SAV61.00U S55150-A110-A100 40 mm 1600 N - 120 s
AC/DC 24 V 0...1000 Ω fix
8)
SAV81.00 S55150-A111 1) 2) 6)
SAV81.00U
8)
S55150-A111-A100
3-position - , ,
SKC32.60 SKC32.60 - 1) 2)
AC 230 V 3-position 120 s - , ,
SKC32.61 SKC32.61 18 s
SKC60 SKC60 -
0…10 V Opening: 3)
SKC62 SKC62
4…20 mA 120 s Ο Turn,
SKC62U SKC62U 20 s
40 mm 2800 N 0…1000 Ω Closing: 20 s Position is
5)
SKC62UA SKC62UA maintained
AC 24 V
SKC82.60 SKC82.60
-
SKC82.60U SKC82.60U 1) 2)
SKC82.61 SKC82.61
18 s
SKC82.61U SKC82.61U
1)
Auxiliary switch (optional)
2)
Potentiometer (optional)
3)
Position feedback, forced control, selection of valve characteristic
4)
Optional: Sequence control, selection of acting direction
5)
Plus sequence control, stroke limitation, and selection of acting direction
6)
Stem heating element (optional)
7)
Function module (optional)
8)
SAV.. available in select countries only

Ordering
Example Product number Stock number Description

VXF53.25-6.3 S55208-V145 3-port valve with flange, PN 25
SAX31.03 S55150-A106 Electro-hydraulic actuator
Delivery Valves, actuators and accessories are packed and delivered as separate items.
Note Counter-flanges, bolts and gaskets must be provided on site.
Product documentation
∂ Mounting M4030 DN 15…150

Instructions 74 319 0749 0
A6V10774961 DN 200, DN 250
A5W90000815
∂ Basic documentation P4030 Contains background information
and technical basic knowledge of
valves

Technical and mechanical design
The illustrations below show the basic design of the valves. Constructional
features, such as the shape of plugs, may differ.
2-port valves Fluids Steam ( Fluids possible )
Closing against the pressure Closing with the pressure
For use with all actuators Use with electro-hydraulic actuators only
2-port valves The VVF53..K valves use a pressure-compensated plug. This enables the same
pressure compensated type of actuators to be used for the control of volumetric flow at higher differential
pressures.
DN 65…150 Fluids and Steam DN 200, DN 250 Fluids and Steam
Closing with the pressure Closing against the pressure
A AB
Use with electro-hydraulic actuators only Use with electro-hydraulic actuators only
Note 2-port valves do not become 3-port valves by removing the blank flange!
3-port valves Fluids
Mixing valve (preferred use) Diverting valve

Sizing
Flow chart
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,05
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,8
1,5
10
15
20
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
3000 800
2000 600
500
1500 400
1000 300
250
800 200
600 150
500
400 k VS 100
300 80
630 450 60
200 50
150 400 315
40
0 220 30
100 25 25
80 150 20
160
60 15
50
40 0
10 10
63
30 8
20 6
36 5
40
5 4
31. 25
10 3
16
2,5
8 20
2
6 1,5
5 12.
5 10
4 1
8 6.3
3 0,8
2 5 4 0,6
0,5
0,4
3.2 2.5
1 0,3
1.6
0,25
0,8 2
0,2
0,6
0,5 1.2
5 1 0,15
0,4
3 0,1
0,3 0.8 0.6
0,08
0,2 0.5 0.4 0,06
0,05
2 5 0,04
0. 3 0.2
0,1 0,03
6 0,025
0,08 0.2 0.1
0,02
0,06
0,05 0,015
0,04
0,01
0,03 0,008
0,02 0,006
1
10
100
1000
2
3
4
6
20
30
40
50
60
80
200
300
400
500
600
800
1500
2000
3000
5
Δpmax values apply for the mixing function. Δp max values for the diverting function see table “Type
summary”, page 2
Δpmax values for kvs value 16, DN 32, see table "Type summary", page 2

Valve characteristics
2-port valves
Flow rate kv / kvs

0…30 %: Linear
30…100 %: Equal percentage
ngl = 3 to VDI / VDE 2173
For high kvs values the valve characteristic is
optimized for maximum volumetric flow kV100.
Stroke H / H100
For product lines:

VVF53.125-200
VVF53.125-250
Flow rate kv / kvs
VVF53.125-220K
VVF53.150-315
VVF53.150-400 0…100 %: Linear
VVF53.150-315K
VVF53.200-450K
VVF53.250-630K
Stroke H / H100
3-port valves Throughport A-AB

0...30 %: Linear
30...100 %: Equal percentage
Flow rate kv / kvs
ngl = 3 to VDI / VDE 2173

For high kvs values the valve characteristic is
optimized for maximum volumetric flow kV100.
Bypass B-AB
0...100 %: Linear
Stroke H / H100 Port AB = constant volumetric flow
Port A = variable volumetric flow
Port B = Bypass (variable volumetric
flow)
Mixing: Volumetric flow from port A and port B to port AB

Diverting: Volumetric flow from port AB to port A and port B
For product lines: Throughport A-AB

VXF53.125-250 0...100 %: Linear
VXF53.150-400
Flow rate kv / kvs
Bypass B-AB
0...100 %: Linear
Stroke H / H100

Operating pressure and
medium temperature 25
24
Fluids 23
Operating pressure [bar]

with V..F53.. 22
21
20
19
18
1
0
-20 -10 0 20 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
Medium temperature [°C]
Curve for saturated steam; steam forms below this line
Operating pressure according to EN 1092, valid for 2-port valves with

blank flange
Operating pressure and operating temperatures according to ISO 7005,

EN 1092 and EN 12284
Notes All relevant local directives must be observed
Saturated steam
Superheated steam
Abs. operating pressure [bar]
with VVF53..
Medium temperature [°C]

Water -
Wet steam To be avoided

Saturated steam
Permissible operating range
Superheated steam
A Subcritical pressure ratio
B Supercritical pressure ratio

Medium Medium Valve Note
Temperature
VVF53..K
compatibility and
VVF53..
VXF53..
range
temperature ranges Tmin Tmax
[°C] [°C]
Cold water 1 25 ■ ■ ■ -
Low-temperature hot water 1 130 ■ ■ ■ -
■ ■ ■
1)
High-temperature hot water 130 150 -
150 180 ■ ■ ■ -
180 220 ■ ■ ■
Water with antifreeze -5 150 ■ ■ ■ V..F53: With a medium temperature of
■ ■
3)
-10 150 - below -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must
be replaced by
■ ■ DN 15…50:
3)
-20 150 - 428488060
DN 65…150: 467956290
■ ■ ■ -
2)
Cooling water 1 25
Brines -5 150 ■ ■ ■ V..F53: With a medium temperature of
■ ■ below -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must
3)
-10 150 -
be replaced by
■ ■ DN 15…50:
3)
-20 150 - 428488060
DN 65…150: 467956290
Saturated steam 100 150 ■ ■ - -
100 220 ■ ■ - -
Superheated steam 120 150 ■ ■ - -
120 220 ■ ■ - -
Heat transfer oils 20 220 ■ ■ ■ On the basis of mineral oil
Super-clean water
1 150 - - -
(demineralized and deionized)
1)
Differentiation due to saturated steam curve
2)
Open circuits
3)
VVF53..K can’t be used with media below -5 °C due to the compensation sealing material
Fields of use Fields of use Valve

VVF53.. VXF53..
Generation Boiler plants ■ ■
District heating plants ■ -
Refrigeration plants ■ ■
■ ■
1)
Cooling towers
Distribution Heating groups ■ ■
Air handling units ■ ■
1)
Open circuits
Engineering notes
Mounting location Preferably mount the valves at the return, as the temperature is lower there and
the strain on the stem sealing gland is lower.
Dirt trap Mount a dirt filter or dirt trap before the valve to ensure proper functioning, and a
long service life of the valve.
Remove dirt, welding beads, etc. from the valves and pipes.
Cavitation Cavitation can be avoided by limiting the pressure differential across the valve
depending on the medium temperature and the prepressure.

Mounting notes
Mounting position Indoors Outdoors

1)
1)
Only in combination with weather shield ASK39.1 and actuators SAX..
Mounting positions apply to both 2- and 3-port valves.
Commissioning notes
The valve may be put into operation only if actuator and valve are correctly
assembled.
Note Ensure that actuator stem and valve stem are rigidly connected in all positions.
Function check Valve Throughport A⇓AB or AB⇓A Bypass B⇓AB
Valve stem extends Closes Opens

Valve stem retracts Opens Closes
Maintenance notes
The valves are maintenance-free.
When servicing valves or actuators:

∂ Deactivate the pump and turn off the power supply
∂ Close the shutoff valves
∂ Fully reduce the pressure in the piping system and allow pipes to completely
cool down
If necessary, disconnect the electrical wires.
Disposal Do not dispose of the device as unsorted municipal waste.

∂ Special handling of individual components may be mandated by law or
make ecological sense.
∂ Observe all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
Warranty
Application-related technical data are guaranteed only when the valves are used in
connection with the Siemens actuators listed under "Equipment combinations",
page 3.
When used with actuators of other manufacture, any warranty by Siemens
becomes void.

Technical Data
Functional data PN class PN 25

Connection Flange
Operating pressure See Section "Operating pressure and medium
temperature" page 10
1)
Valve characteristics See section "Valve characteristics", page 9
Leakage rate Throughport DN 15…150: 0…0.01 % of kvs value (Class IV)
DN 200, DN 250: 0…0.02 % of kvs value
Bypass Bypass 0.5…2 % of kvs value with SKD.., SKB.., SKC..
0…0.05 % of kvs value with SAX.., SAV..
Permissible media See table "Medium compatibility and temperature
ranges", page 11
2)
Medium temperature -20…220 °C
VVF53..K: -5…220 ° C
Rangeability DN 15‚ kvs ≤ 1.25 m³/h: >50
DN 15...150: >100
DN 200, DN 250: >50
Nominal stroke Up to DN 50: 20 mm
From DN 65: 40 mm
Materials Valve body DN 15…150: EN-GJS-400-18-LT
DN 200, DN 250: ASTM A216WCB(GP240GH)
Blank flange VVF.. DN 15…150: P265GH
DN 200, DN 250: CK25
Valve stem, seat, plug Stainless steel
Stem sealing gland Stainless steel
DN 15…150: FEPM (silicone-free)
DN 200, DN 250: PTFE (not silicone-free)
Compensation sealing Stainless steel
DN 50…150: FEPM (silicone-free)
DN 200, DN 250: PTFE+carbon (not silicone-free)
Adapter ALF41B.. Steel S235JRG2
Norms and Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU
directives Pressure Accessories Scope: Article 1, section 1
Definition: Article 2, section 5
Fluid group 2:
≤ DN 40 without CE-marking,
as per article 4, section 3
3)
(sound engineering practice)
DN 50…100 Category I, Module A, with CE-marking,
DN 125…150 Category II, Module A2, with CE-marking,
notified body number 0036
DN 200, DN 250 Category II, Module A2, with CE-marking,
notified body number 0035
EU Conformity (CE)
DN 50…150 A5W00006523 4)
4)
DN 200, DN 250 A5W90001026
PN class ISO 7268
Operating pressure ISO 7005, DIN EN 12284
Flanges ISO 7005

Length of flanged valves DIN EN 558-1, line 1
Valve characteristic VDI 2173
Leakage rate Throughport, Bypass according to
EN 60534-4 / EN 1349
Water treatment VDI 2035
Environmental
conditions
Storage: IEC 60721-3-1 Class 1K3
Temperature -15…55 °C
Rel. humidity 5…95 % r.h.
Transport: IEC 60721-3-2 Class 2K3, 2M2
Rel. humidity < 95 % r.H.
Operation: IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K5, 3Z11
Rel. humidity 5…95 % r.h.
Environmental The product environmental declaration CE1E4405en01 4), CE1E4405en02 4),
compatibility CE1E4404en02 4) and A5W90001031 4) contains data on environmentally compatible
product design and assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition,
Dimensions / Weight Dimensions See „Dimensions“, page 15 + 16
Weight See „Dimensions“, page 15 + 16
1)
For certain valve lines and high kvs values, the valve characteristic is optimized for maximum
volumetric flow k V100
2)
With SAX.. and SAV..: Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 130 °C
With SKD..: Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 150 °C
For medium temperatures < -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced, please see page 4.
3)
Valves where PS x DN < 1000, do not require special testing and cannot carry the CE label.
4)
The documents can be downloaded from http://www.siemens.com/bt/download

Dimensions
VVF53..
A AB
4030M16
Product DN B ØD Ø D1 Ø D2 L1 L2 X Y ØK H1 H2 H
number SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV.. SKC..
VVF53.. 15 4.2 14 95 46 14 (4x) 130 87.5 79 76 65 63 159.5 505 563 638 - -
20 5.3 16 105 56 14 (4x) 150 99.5 86.6 83 75 63 144.4 505 563 638 - -
25 6.1 15 115 65 14 (4x) 160 104.5 94.4 90.1 85 63 159.5 505 563 638 - -
32 8.7 17 140 76 19 (4x) 180 119 115.6 110.7 100 60 156.5 502 560 635 - -
40 10.1 16 150 84 19 (4x) 200 129 123.2 117.8 110 60 156.5 502 560 635 525 -
50 13.6 16 165 99 19 (4x) 230 146 135.2 128.4 125 100 196.5 542 600 675 565 -
65 22 17 185 118 19 (8x) 290 178 - - 145 115 231.5 - - - 580 690
80 27.4 17 200 132 19 (8x) 310 190 - - 160 115 231.5 - - - 580 690
100 38.2 17 235 156 23 (8x) 350 212.5 - - 190 146 262.5 - - - 611 721
125 53.1 17 270 184 28 (8x) 400 242 - - 220 159 275.5 - - - 624 734
150 73.4 17 297 211 28 (8x) 480 284 - - 250 186.5 303 - - - 652 762
VVF53..K 50 13.6 16 165 99 19 (4x) 230 146 135.2 128.4 125 100 196.5 - 600 675 - -
65 22 17 185 118 19 (8x) 290 178 - - 145 115 231.5 - - - - 690
80 27.6 17 200 132 19 (8x) 310 190 - - 160 115 231.5 - - - - 690
100 38.6 17 235 156 23 (8x) 350 212.5 - - 190 146 262.5 - - - - 721
125 53.8 17 270 184 28 (8x) 400 242 - - 220 159 275.5 - - - - 734
150 75 17 297 211 28 (8x) 480 284 - - 250 186.5 303 - - - - 762
200 133 30 360 274 26 (12X) 600 265 - - 310 243 359.5 - - - - 818
250 200 32 425 330 30 (12X) 730 290 - - 370 275 391.5 - - - - 850

VXF53..
A AB
1)
Product DN B ØD Ø D1 Ø D2 Ø D3 L1 L2 X Y ØK H1 H2 H
number SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV.. SKC..
VXF53.. 15 3.2 14 95 46 14 (4x) 25 130 65 79 76 65 63 159.5 505 563 638 - -
20 4.0 16 105 56 14 (4x) 35 150 75 86.6 83 75 63 159.5 505 563 638 - -
25 4.6 15 115 65 14 (4x) 38 160 80 94.4 90.1 85 63 159.5 505 563 638 - -
32 6.1 17 140 76 19 (4x) 46 180 90 115.6 110.7 100 60 156.5 502 560 635 - -
40 7.2 16 150 84 19 (4x) 57 200 100 123.2 117.8 110 60 156.5 502 560 635 525 -
50 9.7 16 165 99 19 (4x) 69 230 115 135.2 128.4 125 100 196.5 542 600 675 565 -
65 16.3 17 185 118 19 (8x) 86 290 145 - - 145 115 231.5 - - - 580 690
80 20.6 17 200 132 19 (8x) 100 310 155 - - 160 115 231.5 - - - 580 690
100 28.1 17 235 156 23 (8x) 123 350 175 - - 190 146 262.5 - - - 611 721
125 38.5 17 270 184 28 (8x) 149 400 200 - - 220 159 275.5 - - - 624 734
150 54.9 17 297 211 28 (8x) 174 480 240 - - 250 186.5 303 - - - 652 762
1)
Interior opening of the bypass port

Spare parts
Stem sealing gland Product

DN Stock number Comments
number
DN 15…50
VVF53.. Standard version with FEPM-O-ring for
and
VXF53.. 74 284 0061 0 medium temperatures between -5 °C and
DN 65…150 Series
VVF53..K 220 °C.
A, B and C
VVF53.. Standard version with FEPM-O-ring for
DN 65…150
VXF53.. S55846-Z114 medium temperatures between -5 °C and
As from series D
VVF53..K 220 °C.
Standard version with PTFE sleeve for

VVF53.. K DN 200, DN 250 4 679 5630 0 medium temperatures between -5 °C and
220 °C
When operating with
medium temperatures
below -5 °C. With the gland
VVF53.. 428488060 the valve can
DN 15…50 4 284 8806 0
VXF53.. be used with water, water
with antifreeze and brines
between -20 °C and
150 °C.
When operating with
medium temperatures
below -5 °C . With the
VVF53.., gland 467956290 the valve
DN 65…150 4 679 5629 0
VXF53.. can be used with water,
water with antifreeze and
brines between -20 °C and
150 °C.

Revision numbers
Product Valid from Valid from Product Valid from

Product number
number rev. no. rev. no. number rev. no.
VVF53.15-0.16 ..A VVF53.50-40K ..D VXF53.15-1.6 ..A
VVF53.15-0.2 ..A VVF53.65-63K ..D VXF53.15-2.5 ..A
VVF53.15-0.25 ..A VVF53.80-100K ..D VXF53.15-4 ..A
VVF53.15-0.32 ..A VVF53.100-150K ..D VXF53.20-6.3 ..A
VVF53.15-0.4 ..A VVF53.125-220K ..D VXF53.25-6.3 ..A
VVF53.15-0.5 ..A VVF53.150-315K ..D VXF53.25-10 ..A
VVF53.15-0.63 ..A VVF53.200-450K ..A VXF53.32-16 ..A
VVF53.15-0.8 ..A VVF53.250-630K ..A VXF53.40-16 ..A
VVF53.15-1 ..A VXF53.40-25 ..A
VVF53.15-1.25 ..A VXF53.50-40 ..B
VVF53.15-1.6 ..A VXF53.65-63 ..D
VVF53.15-2 ..A VXF53.80-100 ..D
VVF53.15-2.5 ..A VXF53.100-160 ..D
VVF53.15-3.2 ..A VXF53.125-250 ..D
VVF53.15-4 ..A VXF53.150-400 ..D
VVF53.20-6.3 ..A
VVF53.25-5 ..A
VVF53.25-6.3 ..A
VVF53.25-8 ..A
VVF53.25-10 ..A
VVF53.32-16 ..A
VVF53.40-12.5 ..A
VVF53.40-16 ..A
VVF53.40-20 ..A
VVF53.40-25 ..A
VVF53.50-31.5 ..B
VVF53.50-40 ..B
VVF53.65-63 ..D
VVF53.80-100 ..D
VVF53.100-160 ..D
VVF53.125-250 ..D
VVF53.150-400 ..D

2/3-way globe valve from DN 200

Control valves with electric actuators up to 350°C PN 16-40 2.3.1.
Flanged connection with electric actuators
PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
Cast iron MC163/24 x MC163/230
Spheroidal graphite MC253/24 x MC253/230
Cast steel MC403/24 x MC403/230
Stainless steel MC503/24 x MC503/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Features
x Suitable in building and process engineering for various mediums 0...+200°C

x Suitable with stuffing box extension or stem seal with stainless steel bellow to –10...+350°C and for valves
made of stainless steel to –30...+350°C
x Suitable with stem heater for water with antifreeze compounds down to –10°C and for valves made of
stainless steel to –30
x Microprocessor controlled
x Automatic self-calibration on start up
Technical data valve
Series BR216 BR225 BR240S BR240E

Form Two-way
Diameter nominal DN 125 – DN 300 DN 15 – DN 250 1) DN 15 – DN 300
Pressure rating PN 16 PN 16 / PN 25 / PN 40 PN 40
Cast iron Spheroidal graphite Cast steel Stainless steel
Body
EN-JL1040 EN-JS1024 1.0619+N 1.4408
Plug CrNi-steel 1.4057 CrNi-steel 1.4571
Stem CrMo-steel 1.4122 CrNi-steel 1.4571
DN 50: equal % Option: linear
Characteristic DN 65: eq. % mod. Option: linear
Perforated plug: equal % Option: linear
20 (DN 15 – DN 40)
30 (DN 50 – DN 65)
Stroke [mm]
50 (DN 80 – DN 100)
MC103 – MC1503
60 (DN 125 – DN 200)
80 (DN 250 – DN 300)
60 (DN 125 – DN 150) 25 kN
Stroke [mm]
80 (DN 200) 20 kN / 25 kN
M300(Y)
90 (DN 250 – DN 300) 20 kN / 25 kN
Rangeability 50:1
Connection type Flanges acc. EN 1092-2 Typ 21 Flanges acc. EN 1092-1 Typ 21
Pressure, Temp. Acc. EN 1092 part 2 Acc. EN 1092 part 1
01/09/2013 Data subject to change without notice
1)
DN 150: PN 16 or PN 25
DN 200: PN 16
HORA Helleforthstrasse 58 – 60 phone: +49 (0) 52 07 / 89 03 - 0

1/29 Holter Regelarmaturen GmbH & Co. KG 33758 Schloss Holte-Stukenbrock mail: fc@hora.de
Geschäftsbereich Flow Control Germany www.hora.de

PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Series BR316 BR325 BR340S BR340E

Form Three-way
Diameter nominal DN 125 – DN 300 DN 15 – DN 250 1) DN 15 – DN 300
Pressure rating PN 16 PN 25 PN 40
2)
Cast iron Spheroidal graphite Cast steel Stainless steel
Body
EN-JL1040 EN-JS1024 1.0619+N 1.4408
Plug CrNi-steel 1.4057 CrNi-steel 1.4571
Stem CrMo-steel 1.4122 CrNi-steel 1.4571
DN 40: AoAB equal % Option: linear
BoAB linear
Characteristic
DN 50: AoAB eq. % mod. Option: linear
BoAB linear
20 (DN 15 – DN 40)
30 (DN 50 – DN 65)
Stroke [mm]
50 (DN 80 – DN 100)
MC103 – MC1503
60 (DN 125 – DN 200)
80 (DN 250 – DN 300)
60 (DN 125 – DN 150) 25 kN
Stroke [mm]
80 (DN 200) 20 kN / 25 kN
M300(Y)
90 (DN 250 – DN 300) 20 kN / 25 kN
Rangeability 50:1
Connection type Flanges acc. EN 1092-2 Typ 21 Flanges acc. EN 1092-1 Typ 21
Pressure, Temp. Acc. EN 1092 part 2 Acc. EN 1092 part 1
Function: BR216/225/240S/240E as two-way valve

BR316/325/340S/340E as mixing valve or
BR316/325/340S/340E as diverting valve with reduced closing pressure
Face to face dimension: Acc. EN 558-1 basic series 1
Leakage rate: EN 1349 – seat-leakage IV L1 ( 0.01% of kvs-value)
Stem sealing: O-rings made of EPDM 0...+180°C chilled and hot-water with max. 50%
antifreeze and anti-corrosive compounds:
glycol, ethylene glycol, mono ethylene,
ethanol, methyl alcohol, glycerine, antifrogen N+L
O-rings made of FKM 0...+200°C media based on mineral oil
O-rings made of Fluoraz
0...+200°C hot water, steam and oil

PTFE-lip-rings 0...+200°C hot water, steam and oil
3)
Graphite-Packing 0...+350°C hot water, steam and oil
1)
DN 150: PN 16 or PN 25
DN 200: PN 16
2)
Due to a change in material, we reserve the right to supply valves up to DN 100 in higher grade spheroidal graphite EN-JS1024
3)
only in combination with stuffing box extension or stem seal with stainless steel bellow


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Valve variant and accessories
for two-way and three-way valves:
x Housing connecting flanges: with groove acc. to EN 1092-1 type D,

with socket acc. to EN 1092-1 type F,
with spigot acc. to EN 1092-1 type E
x Body and plug seat grounded in, EN 1349 – seat-leakage IV-S1 L1 ( 0.0005% of kvs-value)
x Plug with soft sealing made of NBR, EPDM, PTFE; EN 1349 – seat-leakage VI G1 (tight sealing)
x Stem heater: 24 VAC, 50 Hz or 24 VDC
Pmax. | 200 VA
PN | 45 VA
S1 100% ED
IP 54
x Transformer for stem heater: 230/24 VAC, 50 Hz
x Stem seal with stainless steel bellow: for valves made of cast iron –10°C...+200°C
for valves made of spheroidal graphite
and cast steel –10°C...+350°C
Stuffing box made of graphite
for valves made of stainless steel –30°C...+350°C
Stuffing box made of graphite
x Stuffing box extension: 100 mm
for valves made of spheroidal graphite
and cast steel –10°C...+350°C
for valves made of stainless steel –30°C...+350°C
x Epoxy resin special varnish as a corrosion resistant in case of condensed water, max. 80°C
1)
x technical silicon free version, max. 180°C

x oil and fat free for oxygen application
only for two-way valves:
x Screwed seat: for valves made of cast iron, spheroidal graphite and cast steel made of 1.4122,
unhardened or hardened
for valves made of stainless steel made of 1.4571
x Perforated plug: for valves made of cast iron, spheroidal graphite and cast steel made of 1.4057,
unhardened or hardened
for valves made of stainless steel made of 1.4571
x Housing seat SKWAM plated or Stellit 6 plated
2)
x Balanced plug, max. operating temperature 200°C

1)
except valves made of stainless steel
2)
only for valves made of spheroidal graphite and stainless steel


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Drawing
BR216/225/240S/240E BR316/325/340S/340E
Technical data actuator MC103 – MC1503
5) 5)
Type MC103/24 MC103/230
1)
Actuating time s/mm 12 · 9 · 4* · 1.9 12 · 9 · 4* · 1.9
Actuating thrust kN 1.0 1.0
Stroke mm max. 20 max. 20
Power supply VAC 24 r10% 230 +6% -10%
2)
Power supply VDC 24 r10% -
Frequency Hz 50/60 r5% 50/60 r5%
Power consumption VA 6 12
3-point 3-point
3)
Input signal 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
0...10 VDC max. 8 mA 0...10 VDC max. 8 mA
Output signal 3)
min. 1200 Ohm min. 1200 Ohm
4)
Hysterisis V 0.15 · 0.5 0.15 · 0.5
1)
Actuating time freely adjustable, presetting is marked with *
2)
only retified alternating voltage
3)
Invertible input and output signal
4)
Freely adjustable
5)
Actuator suitable for medium temperature up to 150°C


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Type MC163/24 MC163/230

1)
Actuating time s/mm 6 · 4* 6 · 4*
Power supply 2) VDC 24 r10% -
Power consumption VA 6 12
3-point 3-point
Input signal 3) 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
3) 0...10 VDC max. 8 mA 0...10 VDC max. 8 mA
Output signal
4)
Hysterisis V 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5
Type MC253/24 MC253/230

1)
Actuating time s/mm 5 · 2.5* 5 · 2.5*
2)
Power consumption VA max. 18 max. 25
3-point 3-point
Input signal 3) 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm 0(2)...10 VDC 77 kOhm
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
Output signal
4)
Hysterisis V 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5
1)
2)
3)
4)
Freely adjustable


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Type MC403/24 MC403/230

1)
Actuating time s/mm 0.6 · 0.4* 0.6 · 0.4*
3-point 3-point
3)
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
Output signal
Hysterisis 4) V 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5
Type MC503/24 MC503/230

Actuating time 1) s/mm 5 · 2.5* 5 · 2.5*
2)
3-point 3-point
3)
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
Output signal
Hysterisis 4) V 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5
1)
2)
3)
4)
Freely adjustable


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Type MC1003/24 MC1503/24 MC1003/230 MC1503/230

1)
Actuating time s/mm 1 2 1 2
Actuating thrust kN 10 15 10 15
3-point 3-point
2)
0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm 0(4)...20 mA 0.51 kOhm
0...10 VDC max. 8 mA 0...10 VDC max. 8 mA
Output signal 2)
Hysterisis 3) V 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5 0.05 · 0.15 · 0.3 · 0.5
Enclosure protection: IP 54
Resolution: MC... electric 0.04 VDC

MC103 mechanical 0.095 mm
MC163 / MC1003 / MC1503 mechanical 0.05 mm
MC253 / MC503 mechanical 0.04 mm
MC403 mechanical 0.12 mm
Operating mode: MC103 / MC163 / MC253 / MC503 S3-50% ED c/h 1200 EN 60034-1
MC403 / MC1003 / MC1503 S3-30% ED c/h 1200 EN 60034-1
End position switch-off: load-dependent
Ambient temperature: MC103 / MC163 0...+60°C

MC253 / MC403 / MC503 / MC1003 -10...+60°C
MC1503 -10...+50°C
Weight: MC103 2.5 kg

MC163 4.0 kg
MC253/24 and MC503/24 7.4 kg
MC253/230 and MC503/230 8.6 kg
MC403 9.5 kg
MC1003 / MC1503 11.5 kg
1)
2)
3)
Freely adjustable


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Actuator variant and accessories
x Voltage: 115 VAC

x Position switch unit :
1)
2 switches (WE1/WE2), potential free, infinitely adjustable
Rated load: 8 A / 250 VAC
8 A / 30 VDC
Turn-on voltage: max. 400 VAC
max. 125 VDC
x Enclosure protection: IP 65
x Board for output signal X=0(4)...20 mA
1)
x Adapter with coupling for external products
Circuit diagram MC103 / MC163
B1/B2 Connection of a binary signal (e.g. frost safety)

1)
MC103/MC163: Position switch unit and output signal 0(4)...20 mA not in combination


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Circuit diagram MC253 / MC403 / MC503 / MC1003 / MC1503
B1/B2 Connection of a binary signal (e.g. frost safety)
Technical data actuator M300(Y)
Type M300 – 20 kN M300Y – 20 kN

1)
Actuating time at 50 Hz s/mm 1.2 2.4 1.2 2.4
Actuating thrust kN 20 20
Power supply VAC 230 r10% 230 r10%
Frequency Hz 50 or 60 r5% 50 or 60 r5%
Power consumption VA 240 170 260 190
2) 0(2)...10 VDC 10 kOhm
Input signal 3-point 1)
0(4)...20 mA 500 Ohm
0(2)...10 VDC max. 20 mA
Output signal - min. 500 Ohm
1)
0(4)...20 mA max. 500 Ohm
1)
Please state when ordering
2)
Invertible input signal


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Type M300 – 25 kN M300Y – 25 kN

1)
Actuating time at 50 Hz s/mm 1.2 2.4 1.2 2.4
Actuating thrust kN 25 25
Power supply VAC 230 r10% 230 r10%
Frequency Hz 50 or 60 r5% 50 or 60 r5%
Power consumption VA 240 170 260 190
2) 0(2)...10 VDC 10 kOhm
Input signal 3-point
0(4)...20 mA 1) 500 Ohm
0(2)...10 VDC max. 20 mA
Output signal - min. 500 Ohm
1)
0(4)...20 mA max. 500 Ohm
Enclosure protection: IP 65
Limit switches (motor): max. rated load: resistive load: 10 A

inductive load: 5A
Operating mode: S4-30% ED c/h 600 EN 60034-1
End position switch-off: Two-way valves: Extending actuator spindle: load-dependent

Retracting actuator spindle: travel (WE-S3) and load-depend.
Three-way valves: Extending and retracting actuator spindle: load-dependent
Ambient temperature: 0...+60°C
Weight: 22 kg
Actuator variant and accessories
M300 M300 M300Y M300Y

Type
20 kN 25 kN 20 kN 25 kN
Potentiometer (max. 2 pieces)
x x
0,1 / 0,2 / 0,5 / 1 / 5 / 10 kOhm 1,5 VA
Position switch unit
2 switches (WE-S4/WE-S5), max. 250 VAC
potential free, infinitely adjustable
max. rated load: resistive load 5 A x x x x
inductive load 3 A
filament lamp 1 A
Heater
-20°C ... +60°C x x x x
230 VAC, 15 VA
Electric position indication
Voltage: 24 VDC
x x
Output signal:
X=0(4)...20 mA max. 500 Ohm
1)
2)
Invertible input signal


117
PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Circuit diagram M300 - 20 kN / M300 - 25 kN

Two-way valves
Three-way valves


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Circuit diagram M300Y - 20 kN / M300Y - 25 kN

Two-way valves
Three-way valves


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Technical data valve with actuator
PN 16
BR216
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1250
200S 315S 500S 800 1000
kvs-value m³/h 160 250 400 630 800
125S/L 200S/L 315S/L 500L 630L
400L
Stroke mm 60 80
MC403/ 40
24 t 1) s
25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 200 130
MC503/ 300
24 t 1) s
150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 290 190
MC1003/ t s 60 80
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 500 350 200 100
230
MC1503/ t s 120 160
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370 220 150
230
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

ǻps: Closing pressure
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1600
200S 315S 500S 800 1250
kvs-value m³/h
160 250 400 630L 1000
125S/L 200S/L 315S/L 500L 800L
Stroke mm 60 80 90
155 205 225

M300/ t 2) s
M300Y 80 105 120
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540 340 240
155 205 225

M300/ t 2) s
M300Y 80 105 120

25 kN
ǻps kPa 1600 1250 690 440 300
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
2)
L)
Available with perforated plug
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 16
BR316
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1250
200 315 500 800 1000
kvs-value m³/h 160S 250S 400S 630 800
125S 200S 315S 500 630
400
Stroke mm 60 80
MC403/ 40
24 t 1) s
25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 200 130
MC503/ 300
24 t 1) s
150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 290 190
MC1003/ t s 60 80
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 500 350 200 100
230
MC1503/ t s 120 160
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370 220 150
230
PN 16
BR316
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1600
200 315 500 800 1250
kvs-value m³/h
160S 250S 400S 630 1000
125S 200S 315S 500 800
Stroke mm 60 80 90
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540 340 240
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
25 kN
ǻps kPa 1600 1250 690 440 300
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 16 / PN 25 / PN 40
BR225
2) 2) 2) 3) 4)
DN 15 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200
4L 2.5 6.3L 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630
1.6 5S/L 8S/L 12.5S 20S 31.5S 50S 80S 125S 200S 315S 500S
1.25 4L 6.3L 10L 16L 25L 40L 63L 100L 160 250 400
kvs-value m³/h 1.0 2.5S/L 5S/L 8S/L 12.5S/L 20S/L 31.5S/L 50S/L 80S/L 125S/L 200S/L 315S/L
0.63
0.4
0.25
0.16
Stroke mm 20 30 50 60
240
MC103/ 180
24 t 1) s
80*
MC103/
230 40
ǻps kPa 1250 3500 1250 1050 600 350
MC163/ 120 180

24 t 1) s
80* 120*
MC163/
230 ǻps kPa 2400 4000 2400 2050 1250 750 450 300
MC253/ 100 150 250

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125*
MC253/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 3500 2200 1400 850 540 350 200
MC403/ 15 20 30 40
24 t 1) s
10* 15* 20* 25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 3700 2400 1500 950 650 400 200 130
MC503/ 100 150 250 300

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125* 150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3150 1950 1250 850 500 290 190
MC1003/ t s 30 50 60
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 2150 1500 950 500 350 200
230
MC1503/ t s 120
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370
230
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

The closing pressure is limited by the nominal pressure.
1)
2)
PN 16 or PN25-40
3)
PN 16 or PN25
4)
PN 16
L)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 16 / PN 25 / PN 40
BR225
2) 3) 4)
DN 125 150 200
250 400 630
200S 315S 500S
kvs-value m³/h
160 250 400
125S/L 200S/L 315S/L
Stroke mm 60 80
155 205
M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540
155 205
M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105
25 kN
ǻps kPa 1800 1250 690
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
2)
PN 16 or PN25-40
3)
PN 16 or PN25
4)
PN 16
L)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 16 / PN 25 / PN 40
BR325
2) 2) 2) 3) 4)
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200
4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630
2.5 5 8 12.5 20 31.5 50 80 125 200 315 500
kvs-value m³/h
4S 6.3S 10S 16S 25S 40S 63S 100S 160S 250S 400S
2.5S 5S 8S 12.5S 20S 31.5S 50S 80S 125S 200S 315S
Stroke mm 20 30 50 60
240
MC103/ 180
24 t 1) s
80*
MC103/
230 40
ǻps kPa 1250 1250 1050 600 350
MC163/ 120 180

24 t 1) s
80* 120*
MC163/
230 ǻps kPa 2400 2400 2050 1250 750 450 300
MC253/ 100 150 250

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125*
MC253/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 3500 2200 1400 850 540 350 200
MC403/ 15 20 30 40
24 t 1) s
10* 15* 20* 25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 3700 2400 1500 950 650 400 200 130
MC503/ 100 150 250 300

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125* 150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 3150 1950 1250 850 500 290 190
MC1003/ t s 30 50 60
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 2150 1500 950 500 350 200
230
MC1503/ t s 120
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370
230
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
2)
PN 16 or PN25-40
3)
PN 16 or PN25
4)
PN 16
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 16 / PN 25 / PN 40
BR325
2) 3) 4)
DN 125 150 200
250 400 630
200 315 500
kvs-value m³/h
160S 250S 400S
125S 200S 315S
Stroke mm 60 80
155 205
M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540
155 205
M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105
25 kN
ǻps kPa 1800 1250 690
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
2)
PN 16 or PN25-40
3)
PN 16 or PN25
4)
PN 16
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 40
BR240S / BR240E
DN 15 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

4L 2.5 6.3L 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1250
1.6 5S/L 8S/L 12.5S 20S 31.5S 50S 80S 125S 200S 315S 500S 800 1000
1.25 4L 6.3L 10L 16L 25L 40L 63L 100L 160 250 400 630 800
kvs-value m³/h 1.0 2.5S/L 5S/L 8S/L 12.5S/L 20S/L 31.5S/L 50S/L 80S/L 125S/L 200S/L 315S/L 500L 630L
0.63 400L
0.4
0.25
0.16
Stroke mm 20 30 50 60 80
240
MC103/ 180
24 t 1) s
80*
MC103/
230 40
ǻps kPa 1250 3500 1250 1050 600 350
MC163/ 120 180

24 t 1) s
80* 120*
MC163/
230 ǻps kPa 2400 4000 2400 2050 1250 750 450 300
MC253/ 100 150 250

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125*
MC253/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 3500 2200 1400 850 540 350 200
MC403/ 15 20 30 40
24 t 1) s
10* 15* 20* 25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 3700 2400 1500 950 650 400 200 130
MC503/ 100 150 250 300

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125* 150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3150 1950 1250 850 500 290 190
MC1003/ t s 30 50 60 80
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 2150 1500 950 500 350 200 100
230
MC1503/ t s 120 160
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370 220 150
230
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
L)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 40
BR240S / BR240E
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1600
200S 315S 500S 800 1250
kvs-value m³/h
160 250 400 630L 1000
125S/L 200S/L 315S/L 500L 800L
Stroke mm 60 80 90
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540 340 240
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
25 kN
ǻps kPa 1800 1250 690 440 300
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
L)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 40
R340S / BR340E
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1250
2.5 5 8 12.5 20 31.5 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1000
kvs-value m³/h 4S 6.3S 10S 16S 25S 40S 63S 100S 160S 250S 400S 630 800
2.5S 5S 8S 12.5S 20S 31.5S 50S 80S 125S 200S 315S 500 630
400
Stroke mm 20 30 50 60 80
240
MC103/ 180
24 t 1) s
80*
MC103/
230 40
ǻps kPa 1250 1250 1050 600 350
MC163/ 120 180

24 t 1) s
80* 120*
MC163/
230 ǻps kPa 2400 2400 2050 1250 750 450 300
MC253/ 100 150 250

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125*
MC253/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 3500 2200 1400 850 540 350 200
MC403/ 15 20 30 40
24 t 1) s
10* 15* 20* 25*
MC403/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 3700 2400 1500 950 650 400 200 130
MC503/ 100 150 250 300

24 t 1) s
50* 75* 125* 150*
MC503/
230 ǻps kPa 4000 4000 4000 4000 3150 1950 1250 850 500 290 190
MC1003/ t s 30 50 60 80
24
MC1003/ ǻps kPa 2150 1500 950 500 350 200 100
230
MC1503/ t s 120 160
24
MC1503/ ǻps kPa 950 700 370 220 150
230
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 40
BR340S / BR340E
DN 125 150 200 250 300

250 400 630 1000 1600
200 315 500 800 1250
kvs-value m³/h
160S 250S 400S 630 1000
125S 200S 315S 500 800
Stroke mm 60 80 90
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
20 kN
ǻps kPa 1400 980 540 340 240
155 205 225

M300/ t 1) s
M300Y 80 105 120
25 kN
ǻps kPa 1800 1250 690 440 300
100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS

1)
S)
Special-kvs-value


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Drawing
BR2... MC103 BR3... MC103

BR2... MC163 BR3... MC163


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
BR2... MC253 BR3... MC253

MC403 MC403
MC503 MC503
MC1003 MC1003
MC1503 MC1503


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
BR2... M300(Y) BR3... M300(Y)

Installation instruction:
Valve trim could be damaged by dirt in the pipe system. Therefore we recommend the installation of strainers.


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Dimension
BR216/BR316 and BR225/BR325
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 2001) 2501) 3001)
L mm 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850
B mm 130 130 130 150 150 160 170 215 215 260 280 400 450 550
D mm 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460
k mm 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410
PN 16 8x 12x
z mm 4x 14 4x 18 8x 18 12x 26
22 22
b mm 16 16 18 18 18 20 20 20 22 24 24 30 32 32
D mm 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300
k mm 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250

PN 25 8x
z mm 4x 14 4x 18 8x 18 8x 26
22
b mm 16 16 18 18 18 20 20 20 22 24 24
MC103 BR2... mm 500 500 500 515 515

24 VAC
BR3... mm 460 460 465 475 475
MC103 BR2... mm 525 525 525 540 540

230 VAC
BR3... mm 485 485 490 500 500
MC163 BR2... mm 552 537 537 567 567 577 587

24 VAC
BR3... mm 512 512 517 527 527 537 552
MC163 BR2... mm 577 577 577 592 592 602 612

230 VAC
BR3... mm 537 537 542 552 552 562 577
BR2... mm 725 725 725 740 740 750 760 860 905
MC253
BR3... mm 685 685 690 700 700 710 725 840 870
H
BR2... mm 775 775 775 790 790 800 810 905 950 975 1000
MC403
BR3... mm 735 735 740 750 750 760 775 885 915 920 940
BR2... mm 725 725 725 740 740 750 760 860 905 930 955
MC503
BR3... mm 685 685 690 700 700 710 725 840 870 875 895
BR2... mm 935 950 995 1020 1045 1150 1210

MC1003
BR3... mm 900 930 960 965 985 1100 1155
BR2... mm 1020 1045 1150 1210 1270

MC1503
BR3... mm 965 985 1100 1155 1210
BR2... mm 900 925 990 1045 1105

M300(Y)
BR3... mm 885 905 980 1030 1085
1)
PN 16


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
BR240S / BR340S and BR240E / BR340E
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
L mm 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850
B mm 130 130 130 150 150 160 170 215 215 260 280 400 450 550
D mm 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460
k mm 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410
PN 16 8x 12x
z mm 4x 14 4x 18 8x 18 12x 26
22 22
b mm 16 18 18 18 18 20 18 20 20 22 22 24 26 28
D mm 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 360 425 485
k mm 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 310 370 430
PN 25 8x 12x 12x 16x
z mm 4x 14 4x 18 8x 18 8x 26
22 26 30 30
b mm 16 18 18 18 18 20 22 24 24 26 28 30 32 34
D mm 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450 515
k mm 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 450
PN 40 8x 12x 12x 16x
z mm 4x 14 4x 18 8x 18 8x 26
22 30 33 33
b mm 16 18 18 18 18 20 22 24 24 26 28 34 38 42
MC103 BR2... mm 500 500 500 515 515

24 VAC BR3... mm 460 460 465 475 475
MC103 BR2... mm 525 525 525 540 540

230 VAC BR3... mm 485 485 490 500 500
MC163 BR2... mm 552 537 537 567 567 577 587

24 VAC BR3... mm 512 512 517 527 527 537 552
MC163 BR2... mm 577 577 577 592 592 602 612

230 VAC BR3... mm 537 537 542 552 552 562 577
BR2... mm 725 725 725 740 740 750 760 860 905
MC253
BR3... mm 685 685 690 700 700 710 725 840 870
H
BR2... mm 775 775 775 790 800 800 810 905 950 975 1000
MC403
BR3... mm 735 735 740 750 750 760 775 885 915 920 940
BR2... mm 725 725 725 740 740 750 760 860 905 930 955
MC503
BR3... mm 685 685 690 700 700 710 725 840 870 875 895
BR2... mm 935 950 995 1020 1045 1150 1210

MC1003
BR3... mm 900 930 960 965 985 1100 1155
BR2... mm 1020 1045 1150 1210 1270

MC1503
BR3... mm 965 985 1100 1155 1210
BR2... mm 900 925 990 1045 1105

M300(Y)
BR3... mm 885 905 980 1030 1085


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
Weight
PN 16 / PN 25
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

BR2... kg 6.5 8.5 9.5 10.5 13.5
MC103
BR3... kg 7.5 8.5 10.5 12.5 14.5
BR2... kg 8 10 11 12 15 17 21
MC163
BR3... kg 9 10 12 14 16 20 24
MC253 BR2... kg 11.4 13.4 14.4 15.4 18.4 20.4 24.4 37.4 49.4
24 VAC
BR3... kg 12.4 14.4 15.4 17.4 19.4 23.4 27.4 41.4 52.4
MC253 BR2... kg 12.6 14.6 15.6 16.6 19.6 21.6 25.6 38.6 50.6
230 VAC
BR3... kg 13.6 15.6 16.6 18.6 20.6 24.6 28.6 42.6 53.6
BR2... kg 13.5 15.5 16.5 17.5 20.5 22.5 26.5 39.5 51.5 70.5 102.5
MC403
BR3... kg 14.5 16.5 17.5 19.5 21.5 25.5 29.5 43.5 54.5 82.5 113.5
m
MC503 BR2... kg 11.4 13.4 14.4 15.4 18.4 20.4 24.4 37.4 49.4 68.4 100.4
24 VAC
BR3... kg 12.4 14.4 15.4 17.4 19.4 23.4 27.4 41.4 52.4 80.4 111.4
MC503 BR2... kg 12.6 14.6 15.6 16.6 19.6 21.6 25.6 38.6 50.6 69.6 101.6
230 VAC
BR3... kg 13.6 15.6 16.6 18.6 20.6 24.6 28.6 42.6 53.6 81.6 112.6
BR2... kg 28.5 41.5 53.5 72.5 104.5 241.5 301.5

MC1003
BR3... kg 31.5 45.5 56.5 84.5 115.5 281.5 346.5
BR2... kg 72.5 104.5 241.5 301.5 391.5

MC1503
BR3... kg 84.5 115.5 281.5 346.5 451.5
BR2... kg 83 115 252 312 402

M300(Y)
BR3... kg 95 126 292 357 462


PN 16 – 40 MC103/24 x MC103/230
MC1003/24 x MC1003/230
MC1503/24 x MC1503/230
M300-20kN x M300Y-20kN
M300-25kN x M300Y-25kN BR216 BR316
BR225 BR325
BR240S BR340S
BR240E BR340E
PN 40
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

BR2... kg 9.5 10.5 12.5 15.5 16.5
MC103
BR3... kg 10.5 11.5 13.5 18.5 19.5
BR2... kg 11 12 14 17 18 23 31
MC163
BR3... kg 12 13 15 20 21 26 37
MC253 BR2... kg 14.4 15.4 17.4 20.4 21.4 26.4 37.4 45.4 60.4
24 VAC
BR3... kg 15.4 16.4 18.4 23.4 24.4 29.4 40.4 52.4 65.4
MC253 BR2... kg 15.6 16.6 18.6 21.6 22.6 27.6 35.6 46.6 61.6
230 VAC
BR3... kg 16.6 17.6 19.6 24.6 25.6 30.6 41.6 53.6 66.6
BR2... kg 16.5 17.5 19.5 22.5 23.5 28.5 39.5 47.5 62.5 76.5 111.5
MC403
BR3... kg 17.5 18.5 20.5 25.5 26.5 31.5 42.5 54.5 67.5 88.5 130.5
m
MC503 BR2... kg 14.4 15.4 17.4 20.4 21.4 26.4 37.4 45.4 60.4 74.4 109.4
24 VAC
BR3... kg 15.4 16.4 18.4 23.4 24.4 29.4 40.4 52.4 65.4 86.4 128.4
MC503 BR2... kg 15.6 16.6 18.6 21.6 22.6 27.6 35.6 46.6 61.6 75.6 110.6
230 VAC
BR3... kg 16.6 17.6 19.6 24.6 25.6 30.6 41.6 53.6 66.6 87.6 129.6
BR2... kg 41.5 49.5 64.5 78.5 113.5 271.5 366.5

MC1003
BR3... kg 44.5 56.5 69.5 90.5 132.5 311.5 426.5
BR2... kg 78.5 113.5 271.5 366.5 471.5

MC1503
BR3... kg 90.5 132.5 311.5 426.5 551.5
BR2... kg 89 124 282 377 482

M300(Y)
BR3... kg 101 143 322 437 562


SSB61 actuator

4 891
SSB.. without auxiliary switch SSB..1 with auxiliary switch
ACVATIX™
Electromotoric actuators SSB31..

for small valve types VVP45.., VXP45.., VMP45.. SSB81..
(DN ≤ 25, kVS ≤ 6,3 m3/h)
SSB61..
• SSB31.. operating voltage AC 230 V 3-position control signal

• SSB81.. operating voltage AC 24 V 3-position control signal
• SSB61.. operating voltage AC / DC 24 V DC 0…10 V control signal
• Nominal force 200 N
• Automatic identification of valve stroke
• Direct mounting with union nut, no tools required
• Basic types complete with plug-in connecting cable, length 1.5 m
• Optional cable types
• Cable length 2.5 m and 4.5 m
• Halogen-free cables
• Manual override and position indication
• Parallel connection of multiple actuators possible
• Auxiliary switch integrated in SSB31.1 and SSB81.1 actuators
Use
For operation of Siemens valves V..P45.. for water-side control of hot and cooling water
in heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.

Type summary
Standard versions Type reference Operating Run time at Control Connecting Auxiliary
voltage 50 Hz signal cable switch
SSB31 1.5 m
SSB31/00 1) AC 230 V no cable
SSB31.1 1.5 m Yes
150 s 3-position
SSB81 1.5 m
SSB81/00 1) AC 24 V no cable
SSB81.1 1.5 m Yes
SSB61 1.5 m
AC / DC 24 V 75 s DC 0…10 V
SSB61/00 1) no cable
1)
Available cable lengths or terminal block connectors refer to «Accessories», page 3
SSB81.., SSB61.. are UL and cUL approved.
Accessories Type reference Description Operating voltage Control signal

ASY3L25 Connecting cable 2.5 m
AC 230 V 3-position
AC / DC 24 V DC 0…10 V
ASY6L45HF Connecting cable 4.5 m, halogen-free,
VDE 0207-24
AC 24 V 3-position
ASY8L45HF Connecting cable 4.5 m, halogen-free,
VDE 0207-24
ASY98 Retaining screw for terminal block connector. Included in ASY99 and ASY100.
ASY99 Terminal block connector for 3-position actuators SSB81.. /00
ASY100 Terminal block connector for DC 0…10 V modulating actuators SSB61..
Ordering
Example: Type Stock no. Description Quantity

SSB81/00 SSB81/00 Electromotoric actuator 2
ASY99 ASY99 Terminal block 2
Delivery Actuators, valves and accessories are packed separately. Items are supplied
individually packed.
Rev.-No. Overview tables, see page 9.
Type reference Valve type kvs PN class Data sheet

[m3/h]
VVP45.. 2-port valves 0.25…6.3 N4845
VVP45..S 2-port valves, for CONEX
0.63…2.5 N4854
compression fittings
VXP45.. 3-port valves 0.25…6.3 PN 16
N4845
VMP45.. 3-port valves with T-bypass 0.25…4.0
VMP45..S 3-port valves with T-bypass, for 0.63…2.5
N4854
CONEX compression fittings
kvs = nominal flow rate of cold water (5...30 °C) through the fully open valve (H100)
at a differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)

Function / mechanical design
When the actuator is driven by DC 0…10 V control voltage or by a 3-position signal, it

produces a stroke which is transmitted to the valve stem.
The description of operation in this document applies to the valve versions which are
fully closed when de-energized (NC valves).
3-position control • Voltage at Y1: Stem extends Valve opens

signal • Voltage at Y2: Stem retracts Valve closes
SSB31../SSB81.. • No voltage at Y1 and Y2: Actuator maintains its current position
DC 0...10 V control • The valve opens / closes in proportion to the control signal at Y.
signal • At DC 0 V, the valve V..P45.. is fully closed (A → AB).
SSB61.. • When power supply is removed, the actuator maintains its current position.
Features and benefits • Plastic housing

• Locking-proof, maintenance-free gear train
• Manual override with hexagonal socket wrench 3 mm
• Reduced power consumption in the holding positions
• Load-dependent switch-off in the event of overload and in
stroke end positions
• Parallel operation of 6 SSB31.., 24 SSB81.. and 10 SSB61..
possible, provided the controllers’ output is sufficient
• Terminal block connectors for customer made cables
available
(only for use with AC 24 V and AC / DC 24 V actuators)
4891Z19
• Connecting cables with AC 24 V and AC 230 V connectors
cannot be mixed up
• Halogen-free cables available
Accessories
Retaining screw 4864Z02

Type ASY98 to secure the cable connector. Included in ASY99 and
ASY98 ASY100.
The cable connector

snaps into position,
but can be additionally
secured with the
retaining screw.
Terminal block For special cable lengths of the AC / DC 24 V actuators.

4864Z04
connectors • Type ASY99 for 3-position actuators SSB81/00

ASY99 • Type ASY100 for DC 0…10 V modulating actuators SSB61/00
ASY100 The terminal block connectors are supplied complete with Mounting
Instructions (74 319 0385 0).

Notes
Engineering The actuators must be electrically connected in accordance with local regulations (refer
to «Connection diagrams»), page 8.
Caution Regulations and requirements to ensure the safety of people and property must
be observed at all times!
The permissible temperatures (refer to «Technical data», page 6) must be observed.

The connecting cable of the actuator may come into contact with the hot valve body,
provided the temperature of the valve body does not exceed 80 °C.
SSB 31.1.. and SSB81.1.. actuators have an auxiliary switch ready integrated.
Subsequent fitting to other types of actuators is not possible.
Mounting The Mounting Instructions 4 319 0497 0 are enclosed in the product packaging.
Assembly is made with the union nut; no tools or adjustments are required. The
actuator must be fitted in position 0 (also refer to «Manual override», page 5) without
operating voltage.
In the case of actuators without connecting cable (SSB../00), the separately ordered
terminal block connector and connecting cable must be fitted.
Orientation
Installation 4.5...5 mm Crimp ferrule on stripped wire of connecting cable.
4891Z33
6 mm
26 mm
Commissioning When commissioning, check wiring and the functioning of the actuator and auxiliary
switch, if fitted.
• Actuator stem extends (from position 0 to 1): Valve opens
• Actuator stem retracts (from position 1 to 0): Valve closes
Self-calibration
4891Z21
Caution During commissioning and

whenever the operating voltage is 100 %
switched on, the SSB61.. runs a
self-calibration routine. (Valve
stroke 0 → Max. stroke → Setpoint). t
Never intervene manually in this 0%
75 s Y
process. Power
ON
Note: Correct The second or third attempt at calibration occurs automatically after an 8-minute
calibration is only delay.
possible After three failed calibration attempts the actuator stem remains in the extended
• with valve position and the V..P45.. valves are opened.
• stroke > 1.5 mm For valves with strokes < 1.5 mm, the actuator/valve combination locks after
three failed calibration attempts.

Manual override A 3 mm hexagonal socket wrench can be used to move the actuator to any position
between 0 and 1. If a control signal from the controller is present, then this takes priority
in determining the position.
Note To retain the manually set position, unplug the connecting cable or switch off power
and the control signal.
3 mm
m
3m
0 1 0 1
4891Z13 4891Z14
Position indicator in Position indicator in

position 0: position 1:
Valve closed Valve open
Maintenance The actuators are maintenance-free.

When carrying out service work on the plant, following must be noted:
• Turn power off (e.g. remove the plug)
! • If necessary, disconnect electrical connections from the terminals
• The actuator must be commissioned only with a correctly mounted valve in place!
Repair SSB.. actuators cannot be repaired; the complete unit must be replaced.
Disposal
The device is considered an electronics device for disposal in terms of

European Directive 2012/19/EU and may not be disposed of as
domestic garbage.
● Dispose of the device through channels provided for this
purpose.
● Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and
regulations.
Warranty
The technical data given for these applications is valid only when the actuators are
used with the Siemens valves listed under «Equipment combinations», page 2.
The use of the SSB.. actuators in conjunction with third-party valves
invalidates any warranty offered by Siemens Switzerland Ltd / HVAC
Products.

Technical data
SSB31.. SSB81.. SSB61..

Power supply Operating voltage AC 230 V AC 24 V AC 24 V or DC 24 V
Voltage tolerance ± 15 % ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 25 %
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Max. power consumption 6 VA 0.8 VA 2.5 VA
Fuse for incoming cable 2 A, quickblow
Control Control signal 3-position DC 0...10 V
Input impedance for DC 0...10 V > 100 kOhm
1)
Parallel operation (number of actuators) max. 6 max. 24 max. 10
Functional data Run time for 5.5 mm stroke at 50 Hz 150 s 75 s
Positioning speed 27.3 s/mm 13.6 s/mm
Nominal stroke 5.5 mm
Nominal force 200 N
Perm. temperature of
medium in the connected valve 1...110°C
Electrical connections Connecting cable of basic types 1.5 m 3-core to EN 60320 / IEC 60227
ASY 99, ASY100 cable diameter < 5 mm
2
wire cross section 0.5…0.75 mm
2
ASY3L.. wire cross section 0,75 mm
2
ASY6L.., ASY8L.. wire cross section 0,5 mm
Norms and directives Electromagnetic compatibility For residential, commercial and light- industrial
(Application) environments
Product standard EN60730-x
2) 2) 2)
EU Conformity (CE) A5W90000895 A5W90000897 A5W90000896
RCM Conformity A5W90000910_A 2) A5W90000922_A 2) A5W90000921_A 2)
EAC Conformity Eurasia Conformity
Protection class to EN 60730 II III
Contamination level EN 60730, Class 2
Housing protection
Upright to horizontal IP40 to EN 60529
UL approbation UL 873
cUL approbation C22.2 No. 24-93
Environmental compatibility The product environmental declaration CE1E4891en01 2)
contains data on environmentally compatible product
design and assessments (RoHS compliance,
materials composition, packaging, environmental
benefit, disposal).
Dimensions / weight Dimensions refer to «Dimensions», page 9
Coupling thread to valve union nut G¾ inch
Weight with / without auxiliary switch 0.4 kg / 0.35 kg
Housing colors Base and cover RAL 7035 light gray
Auxiliary switch Mounted in SSB31.1 and SSB81.1 1 change-over switch
Switching point adjustable 0...100%
Factory setting 50 %
3)
Switching capacity max. AC 250 V, 1 A (0.5 A)
2
Connecting cable (recommended) H03VV-F, 2x0.5…0.75 mm
1)
Provided the controllers’ output is sufficient
2)
The documents can be downloaded from http://siemens.com/bt/download
3)
SSB81, in installations according to UL standards, AV 24 V, 1 A (0.5 A)

General ambient Operation Transport Storage
conditions EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-2 EN 60721-3-1
Environmental conditions Class 3K3 Class 2K3 Class 1K3
Temperature 1...50 °C -25...70 °C -5...50 °C
Humidity 5...85 % r.h. < 95 % r.h. 5...95 % r.h.
Connecting cable
ASY3L.. with SSB31..
7 White Y2 Control signal CLOSE (AC 230 V)

6 Black Y1 Control signal OPEN (AC 230 V)
4 Blue N Neutral
L = 2,5 m, or 4,5 m
7 Orange Y2 Control signal CLOSE (AC 24 V)

6 Violet Y1 Control signal OPEN (AC 24 V)
1 Red G System potential AC 24 V
L = 2,5 m, or 4,5 m
8 Grey Y Control signal DC 0...10 V

2 Black G0 System neutral (- DC 24 V)
1 Red G System potential AC 24 V (+ DC 24 V)
L = 2,5 m, or 4,5 m
Connection terminals
4864Z15
ASY99 Y2 Control signal CLOSE

for SSB81.. Y1 Control signal OPEN
G System potential AC 24 V
4891Z32
4864Z16
ASY100 G0 System neutral

for SSB61.. Y Control signal DC 0...10 V
G System potential AC/DC 24 V
4891Z31
Terminals for auxiliary Factory setting:

switches
0...50 % Q11 → Q12
SSB31.1, SSB81.1
50...100 % Q11 → Q14
The switching point can be adjusted by turning the switching cam with a screwdriver
(see Mounting Instructions).
Recommended connecting cable: H03VV-F, 2x0.5…0.75 mm2.

Connection diagrams
SSB31.. N Controller
4864A01
L
2AF
Y Actuator
(L) L System potential AC 230 V
Q1 Q2 N System neutral
(N) (Y1) (Y2) N Y1, Y2 Control signal OPEN, CLOSE
Q1, Q2 Controller contacts
AC 230 V
Y1 Y2
N Y
4864A02
SSB81.. SP N Controller
2AF
Y Actuator
(G)
SP, G System potential AC 24 V
Q1 Q2
SN, G0 System neutral
(G0) (Y1) (Y2) N Y1, Y2 Control signal OPEN, CLOSE
AC 24 V

Y1 Y2
G Y
SN
SSB61.. 2AF
N Controller
Y Actuator
SP, G System potential AC 24 V
AC 24 V (DC 24 V)
SN, G0 System neutral

Y Control signal DC 0…10 V
(Y)
SN (-)

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm
Actuator without
auxiliary switch
SSB31..
SSB81..
SSB61.. 81.4 72.5
48
G¾ 9
4891M01
83
Actuator with
auxiliary switch
SSB31.1..
SSB81.1..
98.5 89.5
48
G¾ 9
4891M02
83
Revision numbers
Type reference Valid from Rev.-No. Type reference Valid from Rev.-No.
SSB31 J SSB61 J
SSB31/00 J SSB61/00 J
SSB31.1 J
SSB81 J
SSB81/00 J
SSB81.1 J

SQL actuator

4 505
SQL36E..
ACVATIX™
Electromotoric actuators SQL36E..

For VKF46.. butterfly valves
∂ SQL36E.. operating voltage AC 230 V, 3-position control signal

∂ Nominal angle of rotation 90°
∂ Auxiliary switch and potentiometer for extra functions
∂ Manual adjuster and position indicator
∂ SQL36E.. built-in heating element to avoid condensation
∂ SQL36E.. compatible with EN ISO 5211 flanges
∂ SQL36E.. variable positioning time with SEZ31.1 auxiliary module
Use
For operation of VKF41.., VKF46.. butterfly valves as control and shutoff valves in
heating, ventilation and air conditioning plants.

Type summary
Type Operating Positioning Positioning time for 90° Torque Flange

voltage signal at 50 Hz connection
without EN 5211
with SEZ31.1
SEZ31.1
SQL36E50F04 F04
25 s 40 Nm
SQL36E50F05 3-position F05
SQL36E65 AC 230 V 6s 30…180 s 100 Nm F07
SQL36E110 12 s 60…360 s 400 Nm F10
1)
SQL36E160 24 s 120…720 s 1200 Nm
1)
EN 5211 F12 / F16 flange connections for third-party butterfly valves are available on request.
Accessories Type Description For actuators Mounting position

SEZ31.1 Auxiliary module for
4505Z10
variable positioning time SQL36E65
(refer to SQL36E110
«Function/mechanical SQL36E160
design», page 4)
ASC36 Double auxiliary switch

4 505Z 19
1 x SEZ31.1 and
1 x ASC36 and
SQL36E50F04
1 x ASZ36
SQL36E50F05
SQL36E65
ASZ36 0...1000 ς Potentiometer 1000 ς SQL36E110
SQL36E160
4505Z28
Ordering
Example: Type Order no. Description Quantity

SQL36E65 SQL36E65 Electromotoric actuator 1
ASZ36 ASZ36 Potentiometer 1000 Ω 1
The actuator, butterfly valve and any accessories must be ordered separately.
Delivery The actuator, butterfly valve and accessories are packed separately and delivered as
individual items.
Rev.-no. Overview see page 12.

Electromotoric actuators
Butterfly valves SQL36E50F04 SQL36E50F05 SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160 Data sheet
VKF46.40 direct mounting
VKF46.200 direct mounting N4136
VKF41.150...200 N4131
The actuator is driven by a 3-position signal from the controller and generates a rotary
motion which is transferred via a driver to the valve.
SQL36E... These electromotoric actuators require no maintenance. They have a reversible

asynchronous motor which drives the main shaft via spur gears and a self-locking worm
gear, which accommodates the rectangular shaft of the butterfly valve. The worm shaft
is fitted with a direct-acting manual adjuster.
The actuators are supplied with a 90° angle of rotation suitable for use with Siemens
butterfly valves. During automatic operation, rotation is limited by two built-in non-
adjustable end-switches.
The direction of rotation of the actuator can be reversed (refer to «Commissioning»). To
prevent the temperature inside the housing from falling below the dewpoint
temperature, the actuators are supplied with a built-in heating element (AC 230 V,
power consumption 5 W).
1 1
4505Z37
4505Z38
1 Position indication
2 2 Terminal compartment
3 Motor
2
4 Manual adjuster
3
4 3
4
Accessory for SEZ31.1 Auxiliary module

SQL36E65
4505Z10
In the presence of a 3-position signal, the auxiliary module

SQL36E110 pulses the actuator. The output shaft rotates by approximately 2°
SQL36E160 with each pulse. The pulse-to-pause ratio is continuously
adjustable and can therefore be used to achieve longer running
times for an angle of rotation of 90° (refer to «Commissioning»).

Engineering notes
Electrical installation The actuators must be electrically connected in accordance with local regulations and
with the connection diagrams.
Regulations and requirements to ensure the safety of people and property must
be observed at all times.
Mounting notes
Overview of Type Mounting Instructions

Mounting Instructions SQL36E.. M4505.1 74 319 0440 0
ASC36 M4505.3 74 319 0442 0
ASZ36 M4505.2 74 319 0441 0
SEZ31.1 M4505.4 74 319 0443 0
SQL36E... These actuators are mounted directly on type VKF46... butterfly valves. The butterfly
valves have to be closed during installation.
In case of unsteady ambient temperatures connect the built-in heating element to avoid
condensation.
The valve and actuator can be assembled straightforwardly on site. There is no need
for special tools.
Orientation SQL36E..
Any
4136Z01

Commissioning notes
When commissioning the complete motorized valve consisting of actuator, mounting

set and butterfly valve, always check the wiring and test the functions. This also applies
to any additional components fitted, e.g. auxiliary switch, potentiometer or auxiliary
module (variable positioning time).
VKF41.. or VKF46... butterfly valves can only be commissioned with a SQL36E..
actuator or with an ASK46... manual adjuster fitted.
Warning To avoid pressure shocks on the butterfly, the VKF46.. must be driven to its fully open
position (either manually or via positioning signal Y1) prior to activating the pump(s).
The flow rate is adjusted either by driving the electric actuators as required, or by
operating the manual adjuster.
When using a SEZ31.1 auxiliary module set the desired positioning time:
SQL36E65: 30...180 s
SQL36E110: 60…360 s
SQL36E160: 120…720 s
Warning The actuator is designed for a static load in the pipe system. Risks arising from loads
caused by vibrations in the system are not covered.
Operating mode In the case of the SQL36E..., the manual adjuster is always engaged and cannot be
SQL36E... mechanically disconnected.
Direction of rotation
SQL36E... The direction of rotation of these types of
actuators for opening is counterclockwise.
ZU / CLOSED
ZU / CLOSED
4505Z03
90°
Reversing the If the direction of rotation needs reversing, simply change the connections Y1/Y2.
direction of rotation
SQL36E...
Setting the The 0...90° angle of rotation for the end switches is factory-set and. They cannot be
angle of rotation adjusted.
The potential-free auxiliary switches have adjustable switching points.
Control Every actuator must be driven by a dedicated controller (refer to «Connection

diagrams»).

Maintenance
The actuators and butterfly valves require no maintenance.
Caution Before performing any service work on the valve or actuator:

∂ Switch off the pump and power supply
∂ Close the main shut-off valves in the pipework
∂ Release pressure in the pipes and allow them to cool down completely
If necessary, disconnect electrical connections from terminals.
The valve must be re-commissioned only with the manual adjuster or the actuator
correctly assembled.
Disposal
The device is considered electrical and electronic equipment for disposal

in terms of the applicable European Directive and may not be disposed of
as domestic garbage.
∂ Dispose of the device through channels provided for this purpose.
∂ Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and
regulations.
Warranty
Technical data on specific applications are valid only together with Siemens products
listed under "Equipment combinations". Siemens rejects any and all warranties in the
event that third-party products are used.

Technical data
SQL36E50.. SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160

Power supply Operating voltage AC 230 V
–5 / +10 %
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
1)
Power consumption 35 VA 160 VA 235 VA
External supply line Slow-blow fuse max. 10 A
protection or
Circuit breaker max. 13 A
Characteristic B, C, D according to EN 60898
Control Positioning signal 3-position
Parallel operation parallel operation of several actuators not possible
Operating data Positioning time for 90°
2) 2) 2)
at 50 Hz 25 s 6s 12 s 24 s
at 60 Hz 20 s 5s 10 s 20 s
Angle of rotation 90° ± 1° (factory setting)
1)
Torque 40 Nm 100 Nm 400 Nm 1200 Nm
End switch Switching capacity AC 250 V, 3 A resistive, 1.5 A inductive
Switching differential approx. 1°
End position non-adjustable
Heating element AC 230 V, 5 W
Medium temperature Permissible temperature of medium in the assembled valve: 120°C
Product standards for EN 61010-1
automatic electrical
controls
3)
EU conformity (CE) 8000059601
Housing protection IP 67 to IEC 60529
standard
Electromagnetic For use in residential, commerce, light-industrial and industrial environments
compatibility (Applications)
Environmental Product environmental declaration (contains data on RoHS compliance, materials
compatibility compo-sition, packaging, environmental benefit, disposal)
3)
CE1E4505en
Flanges and shaft EN ISO 5211 o 32mm
connection to actuator F04 / F05 F07 F10 F12 / F16
Dimensions / weight Dimensions see «Dimensions»
Cable glands 2 x M20
Weight 4.5 kg 7 kg 14 kg 25 kg
Materials Housing base, yoke die-cast aluminum
Cover die-cast aluminum
1)
These values apply at nominal voltage, at an ambient temperature of 20 °C and at the specified nominal
running time
2)
Variable positioning time with SEZ31.1 auxiliary module (see below)
3)
The documents can be downloaded from http://siemens.com/bt/download.

Accessories for SQL36E.. Weight
∂ Double auxiliary switch Switching capacity AC 250 V, 3 A resistive, 1.5 A inductive 60 g

ASC36 Switching differential approx. 1°
∂ Potentiometer ASZ36 Change in resistance 0...1000 ς corresponding to 0...90° 50 g
∂ Auxiliary module Positioning time for 90 ° SQL36E65: 30...180 s 60 g

SQL36E110: 60…360 s
SEZ31.1 at 50 Hz SQL36E160: 120…720 s
General Operation Transport Storage

ambient conditions EN 60721-3-4 EN 60721-3-2 EN 60721-3-1

Temperature –20...+70 °C –30...+65 °C –15...+55 °C
Humidity 15...100 % r. h. < 95 % r. h. 0...95 % r. h.
Internal diagrams
SQL36E50F04 PE S1 End switch CLOSED

(non-adjustable)
SQL36E50F05 Y1
AC 230V
X1 SQL36E50.F04 S2 End switch OPEN
SQL36E50.F05
Y1 (non-adjustable)
S3 Auxiliary switch
Y2
AC 230V
CLOSED (ASC36)
Y2 S4 Auxiliary switch
OPEN (ASC36)
H Heating element
S1 S2
N N P1 Potentiometer
(ASZ36)
C1
Y1 Control phase OPEN
H1
AC 230V H
Y2 Control phase
P = 5W M CLOSED
R3 R2
1~ N Neutral conductor
N.C. Normally Closed
N.O. Normally Open
COM Common conductor
X5
X2
max. 250V AC 3A (1.5A)
N.C. bl
S3
COM bk
S3
N.O. rd
ASC36
N.C. bl X6
COM bk
S4
N.O. rd S4
X3
X7 ASZ36
0%
P1
100%
1000 Ohm
4505G07_02

SQL36E65 SQL36E65 S1 End switch CLOSED (non-
SQL36E110
adjustable)
SQL36E110 SQL36E160
S2 End switch OPEN (non-
SQL36E160 adjustable)
S3 Auxiliary switch CLOSED
(ASC36)
S4 Auxiliary switch OPEN
AC 230 V (ASC36)
S7 Thermal switch (integrated)
H Heating element
ASC36
P1 Potentiometer (ASZ36)
T1 Auxiliary module (SEZ31.1)
Y2 Control phase CLOSED
SEZ31.1 N Neutral conductor
max. AC 250V 3A (1,5A)

AC 230 V
T1
ASZ36
1000 ς
AC 230 V H
P=5W
4505G01
Connection diagrams
SQL36E.. L
4505A01
(L) (L)
Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2
(N) (Y1) (Y2) (N) (Y1) (Y2)
N1 N2
AC 230 V
Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2
N Y1 N Y2
N1, N2 Controller L System potential AC 230 V

Y1, Y2 Actuator N System neutral

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
SQL36E50F04
SQL36E50F05 K J
E [mm]
X
Z
Y M
A H
D
G
B
4505M03
L I
SQL36E50F04 SQL36E50F05
DN 40…65 80…125
A 210
B 73
C 137
D 210
E 65
G Ø 80
H 42
I 126
J 149
K 110
L 259
M 124
X ♣ 11 ♣ 14
Y 42
Z 50
EN 5211 F04 F05
kg 4.5 kg
> 100 mm: Minimum clearance from wall or ceiling
> 200 mm: For mounting, connection, operation, service, etc.

SQL36E65 K J [mm]
SQL36E110 E
SQL36E160
F
Y
Z
M
X H
A
D
G
B
4505M02
L I
SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160

DN 150…200 250…400 450…600
A 208 208 208
B 78 88 112
C 157 169 170
D 235 257 282
E 65 81 110
F 65 87 126
G Ø 80 Ø 125 Ø 200
H 42 58 89
I 125 150 175
J 171 247 280
K 119 136 157
L 290 383 437
M 139 139 139
X ♣ 17 ♣ 22 ♣ 32
Y 70 102 165
Z 50 70 125
1)
EN 5211 F07 F10
kg 7 kg 14 kg 25 kg
1)

Revision numbers
Product number Valid from rev. no.

SQL36E50F04 ..A
SQL36E50F05 ..A
SQL36E65 ..A
SQL36E110 ..A
SQL36E160 ..A

SKD actuator

4 505
SQL36E..
ACVATIX™
Electromotoric actuators SQL36E..

For VKF46.. butterfly valves
∂ SQL36E.. operating voltage AC 230 V, 3-position control signal

∂ Nominal angle of rotation 90°
∂ Auxiliary switch and potentiometer for extra functions
∂ SQL36E.. built-in heating element to avoid condensation
∂ SQL36E.. compatible with EN ISO 5211 flanges
∂ SQL36E.. variable positioning time with SEZ31.1 auxiliary module
Use
For operation of VKF41.., VKF46.. butterfly valves as control and shutoff valves in
heating, ventilation and air conditioning plants.

Type summary
Type Operating Positioning Positioning time for 90° Torque Flange

voltage signal at 50 Hz connection
without EN 5211
with SEZ31.1
SEZ31.1
SQL36E50F04 F04
25 s 40 Nm
SQL36E50F05 3-position F05
SQL36E65 AC 230 V 6s 30…180 s 100 Nm F07
SQL36E110 12 s 60…360 s 400 Nm F10
1)
SQL36E160 24 s 120…720 s 1200 Nm
1)
Accessories Type Description For actuators Mounting position

SEZ31.1 Auxiliary module for
4505Z10
variable positioning time SQL36E65
(refer to SQL36E110
«Function/mechanical SQL36E160
design», page 4)
ASC36 Double auxiliary switch

4 505Z 19
1 x SEZ31.1 and
1 x ASC36 and
SQL36E50F04
1 x ASZ36
SQL36E50F05
SQL36E65
ASZ36 0...1000 ς Potentiometer 1000 ς SQL36E110
SQL36E160
4505Z28
Ordering
Example: Type Order no. Description Quantity

SQL36E65 SQL36E65 Electromotoric actuator 1
ASZ36 ASZ36 Potentiometer 1000 Ω 1
The actuator, butterfly valve and any accessories must be ordered separately.
Delivery The actuator, butterfly valve and accessories are packed separately and delivered as
individual items.
Rev.-no. Overview see page 12.

Electromotoric actuators
Butterfly valves SQL36E50F04 SQL36E50F05 SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160 Data sheet
VKF46.200 direct mounting N4136
VKF41.150...200 N4131
The actuator is driven by a 3-position signal from the controller and generates a rotary
motion which is transferred via a driver to the valve.
SQL36E... These electromotoric actuators require no maintenance. They have a reversible

asynchronous motor which drives the main shaft via spur gears and a self-locking worm
gear, which accommodates the rectangular shaft of the butterfly valve. The worm shaft
is fitted with a direct-acting manual adjuster.
The actuators are supplied with a 90° angle of rotation suitable for use with Siemens
butterfly valves. During automatic operation, rotation is limited by two built-in non-
adjustable end-switches.
The direction of rotation of the actuator can be reversed (refer to «Commissioning»). To
prevent the temperature inside the housing from falling below the dewpoint
temperature, the actuators are supplied with a built-in heating element (AC 230 V,
power consumption 5 W).
1 1
4505Z37
4505Z38
1 Position indication
2 2 Terminal compartment
3 Motor
2
4 Manual adjuster
3
4 3
4
Accessory for SEZ31.1 Auxiliary module

SQL36E65
4505Z10
In the presence of a 3-position signal, the auxiliary module

SQL36E110 pulses the actuator. The output shaft rotates by approximately 2°
SQL36E160 with each pulse. The pulse-to-pause ratio is continuously
adjustable and can therefore be used to achieve longer running
times for an angle of rotation of 90° (refer to «Commissioning»).

Engineering notes
Electrical installation The actuators must be electrically connected in accordance with local regulations and
with the connection diagrams.
Regulations and requirements to ensure the safety of people and property must
be observed at all times.
Mounting notes
Overview of Type Mounting Instructions

Mounting Instructions SQL36E.. M4505.1 74 319 0440 0
ASC36 M4505.3 74 319 0442 0
ASZ36 M4505.2 74 319 0441 0
SEZ31.1 M4505.4 74 319 0443 0
SQL36E... These actuators are mounted directly on type VKF46... butterfly valves. The butterfly
valves have to be closed during installation.
In case of unsteady ambient temperatures connect the built-in heating element to avoid
condensation.
The valve and actuator can be assembled straightforwardly on site. There is no need
for special tools.
Orientation SQL36E..
Any
4136Z01

Commissioning notes
When commissioning the complete motorized valve consisting of actuator, mounting

set and butterfly valve, always check the wiring and test the functions. This also applies
to any additional components fitted, e.g. auxiliary switch, potentiometer or auxiliary
module (variable positioning time).
VKF41.. or VKF46... butterfly valves can only be commissioned with a SQL36E..
actuator or with an ASK46... manual adjuster fitted.
Warning To avoid pressure shocks on the butterfly, the VKF46.. must be driven to its fully open
position (either manually or via positioning signal Y1) prior to activating the pump(s).
The flow rate is adjusted either by driving the electric actuators as required, or by
operating the manual adjuster.
When using a SEZ31.1 auxiliary module set the desired positioning time:
SQL36E65: 30...180 s
SQL36E110: 60…360 s
SQL36E160: 120…720 s
Warning The actuator is designed for a static load in the pipe system. Risks arising from loads
caused by vibrations in the system are not covered.
Operating mode In the case of the SQL36E..., the manual adjuster is always engaged and cannot be
SQL36E... mechanically disconnected.
Direction of rotation
SQL36E... The direction of rotation of these types of
actuators for opening is counterclockwise.
ZU / CLOSED
ZU / CLOSED
4505Z03
90°
Reversing the If the direction of rotation needs reversing, simply change the connections Y1/Y2.
direction of rotation
SQL36E...
Setting the The 0...90° angle of rotation for the end switches is factory-set and. They cannot be
angle of rotation adjusted.
The potential-free auxiliary switches have adjustable switching points.
Control Every actuator must be driven by a dedicated controller (refer to «Connection

diagrams»).

Maintenance
The actuators and butterfly valves require no maintenance.
Caution Before performing any service work on the valve or actuator:

∂ Switch off the pump and power supply
∂ Close the main shut-off valves in the pipework
If necessary, disconnect electrical connections from terminals.
The valve must be re-commissioned only with the manual adjuster or the actuator
correctly assembled.
Disposal
The device is considered electrical and electronic equipment for disposal

in terms of the applicable European Directive and may not be disposed of
as domestic garbage.
∂ Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and
regulations.
Warranty
listed under "Equipment combinations". Siemens rejects any and all warranties in the
event that third-party products are used.

Technical data
SQL36E50.. SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160

Power supply Operating voltage AC 230 V
–5 / +10 %
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
1)
Power consumption 35 VA 160 VA 235 VA
External supply line Slow-blow fuse max. 10 A
protection or
Circuit breaker max. 13 A
Characteristic B, C, D according to EN 60898
Control Positioning signal 3-position
Parallel operation parallel operation of several actuators not possible
Operating data Positioning time for 90°
2) 2) 2)
at 50 Hz 25 s 6s 12 s 24 s
at 60 Hz 20 s 5s 10 s 20 s
Angle of rotation 90° ± 1° (factory setting)
1)
Torque 40 Nm 100 Nm 400 Nm 1200 Nm
End switch Switching capacity AC 250 V, 3 A resistive, 1.5 A inductive
Switching differential approx. 1°
End position non-adjustable
Heating element AC 230 V, 5 W
Medium temperature Permissible temperature of medium in the assembled valve: 120°C
Product standards for EN 61010-1
automatic electrical
controls
3)
EU conformity (CE) 8000059601
Housing protection IP 67 to IEC 60529
standard
Electromagnetic For use in residential, commerce, light-industrial and industrial environments
compatibility (Applications)
Environmental Product environmental declaration (contains data on RoHS compliance, materials
compatibility compo-sition, packaging, environmental benefit, disposal)
3)
CE1E4505en
Flanges and shaft EN ISO 5211 o 32mm
connection to actuator F04 / F05 F07 F10 F12 / F16
Dimensions / weight Dimensions see «Dimensions»
Cable glands 2 x M20
Weight 4.5 kg 7 kg 14 kg 25 kg
Materials Housing base, yoke die-cast aluminum
Cover die-cast aluminum
1)
These values apply at nominal voltage, at an ambient temperature of 20 °C and at the specified nominal
running time
2)
Variable positioning time with SEZ31.1 auxiliary module (see below)
3)

Accessories for SQL36E.. Weight
∂ Double auxiliary switch Switching capacity AC 250 V, 3 A resistive, 1.5 A inductive 60 g

ASC36 Switching differential approx. 1°
∂ Potentiometer ASZ36 Change in resistance 0...1000 ς corresponding to 0...90° 50 g
∂ Auxiliary module Positioning time for 90 ° SQL36E65: 30...180 s 60 g

SQL36E110: 60…360 s
SEZ31.1 at 50 Hz SQL36E160: 120…720 s
General Operation Transport Storage

ambient conditions EN 60721-3-4 EN 60721-3-2 EN 60721-3-1

Temperature –20...+70 °C –30...+65 °C –15...+55 °C
Humidity 15...100 % r. h. < 95 % r. h. 0...95 % r. h.
Internal diagrams
SQL36E50F04 PE S1 End switch CLOSED

(non-adjustable)
SQL36E50F05 Y1
AC 230V
X1 SQL36E50.F04 S2 End switch OPEN
SQL36E50.F05
Y1 (non-adjustable)
S3 Auxiliary switch
Y2
AC 230V
CLOSED (ASC36)
Y2 S4 Auxiliary switch
OPEN (ASC36)
H Heating element
S1 S2
N N P1 Potentiometer
(ASZ36)
C1
H1
AC 230V H
Y2 Control phase
P = 5W M CLOSED
R3 R2
1~ N Neutral conductor
N.C. Normally Closed
N.O. Normally Open
COM Common conductor
X5
X2
max. 250V AC 3A (1.5A)
N.C. bl
S3
COM bk
S3
N.O. rd
ASC36
N.C. bl X6
COM bk
S4
N.O. rd S4
X3
X7 ASZ36
0%
P1
100%
1000 Ohm
4505G07_02

SQL36E65 SQL36E65 S1 End switch CLOSED (non-
SQL36E110
adjustable)
SQL36E110 SQL36E160
S2 End switch OPEN (non-
SQL36E160 adjustable)
S3 Auxiliary switch CLOSED
(ASC36)
S4 Auxiliary switch OPEN
AC 230 V (ASC36)
S7 Thermal switch (integrated)
H Heating element
ASC36
P1 Potentiometer (ASZ36)
T1 Auxiliary module (SEZ31.1)
Y2 Control phase CLOSED
SEZ31.1 N Neutral conductor
max. AC 250V 3A (1,5A)

AC 230 V
T1
ASZ36
1000 ς
AC 230 V H
P=5W
4505G01
Connection diagrams
SQL36E.. L
4505A01
(L) (L)
Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2
(N) (Y1) (Y2) (N) (Y1) (Y2)
N1 N2
AC 230 V
Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2
N Y1 N Y2
N1, N2 Controller L System potential AC 230 V

Y1, Y2 Actuator N System neutral

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
SQL36E50F04
SQL36E50F05 K J
E [mm]
X
Z
Y M
A H
D
G
B
4505M03
L I
SQL36E50F04 SQL36E50F05
DN 40…65 80…125
A 210
B 73
C 137
D 210
E 65
G Ø 80
H 42
I 126
J 149
K 110
L 259
M 124
X ♣ 11 ♣ 14
Y 42
Z 50
EN 5211 F04 F05
kg 4.5 kg

SQL36E65 K J [mm]
SQL36E110 E
SQL36E160
F
Y
Z
M
X H
A
D
G
B
4505M02
L I
SQL36E65 SQL36E110 SQL36E160

DN 150…200 250…400 450…600
A 208 208 208
B 78 88 112
C 157 169 170
D 235 257 282
E 65 81 110
F 65 87 126
G Ø 80 Ø 125 Ø 200
H 42 58 89
I 125 150 175
J 171 247 280
K 119 136 157
L 290 383 437
M 139 139 139
X ♣ 17 ♣ 22 ♣ 32
Y 70 102 165
Z 50 70 125
1)
EN 5211 F07 F10
kg 7 kg 14 kg 25 kg
1)

Revision numbers
Product number Valid from rev. no.

SQL36E50F04 ..A
SQL36E50F05 ..A
SQL36E65 ..A
SQL36E110 ..A
SQL36E160 ..A

SKC actuator

4 566
Electrohydraulic actuators SKC32..

for valves SKC82..
with a 40 mm stroke SKC62..
SKC60
∂ SKC32.. Operating voltage AC 230 V, 3-position control signal
∂ SKC82.. Operating voltage AC 24 V, 3-position control signal
∂ SKC6.. Operating voltage AC 24 V, control signal DC 0…10 V, 4…20 mA or
0...1000 Ω
∂ SKC6.. Choice of flow characteristic, position feedback, stroke calibration,
LED status indication, override control
∂ SKC62UA with functions choice of direction of operation, stroke limit control,
sequence control with adjustable start point and operating range,
operation of frost protection monitors QAF21.. and QAF61..
∂ Positioning force 2800 N
∂ Actuator versions with or without spring-return function
∂ For direct mounting on valves; no adjustments required
∂ Optional functions with auxiliary switches, potentiometer and stem heater
∂ SKC..U are UL-approved

Use
For the operation of Siemens 2-port and 3-port valves, types VVF.. and VXF.. with a 40
mm stroke as control and safety shut-off valves in heating, ventilation and air
conditioning systems.
Types
Type Operating Positioning Spring-return Positioning time Enhanced

voltage signal Function Time Opening Closing functions
SKC32.60
AC 230 V
SKC32.61 yes 18 s
SKC82.60
3-position 120 s
SKC82.60U *
SKC82.61
yes 18 s 120 s
SKC82.61U *
AC 24 V
Standard electronics SKC62 DC 0...10 V,
yes 20 s
SKC62U * 4...20 mA,
20 s
SKC60 or
Enhanced electronics SKC62UA * 0...1000 ς yes 20 s yes 1)
1)
Direction of operation, stroke limit control, sequence control, signal addition
* UL-approved versions
Accessories Type Description For actuator Mounting location

ASC1.6 Auxiliary switch SKC6.. 1 x ASC 1.6
ASC9.3 Dual auxiliary switches SKC32.. 1 x ASC9.3 and
ASZ7.3 Potentiometer 1000 Ω SKC82.. 1 x ASZ7.3
ASZ6.6 Stem heater AC 24 V SKC.. 1 x ASZ6.6
Ordering When ordering please specify the quantity, product name and type code.
Example: 1 actuator, type SKC32.60 and
1 potentiometer, type ASZ7.3 and
1 Dual auxiliary switches ASC9.3
Delivery The actuator, valve and accessories are supplied in separate packaging and not
assembled prior to delivery.
Spare parts See overview, section «Replacement parts», page 20.

3
Valve type DN PN-class kvs [m /h] data sheet
Two-port valves VV... (control valves or safety shut-off valves)):
1)
VVF21... Flange 100 6 124…160 4310
VVF22... Flange 100 6 160 4401
1)
VVF31... Flange 100…150 10 124…315 4320
VVF32... Flange 100…150 10 160…400 4402
1)
VVF40... Flange 100…150 16 124…315 4330
VVF42... Flange 100…150 16 125…400 4403
1)
VVF41... Flange 65…150 16 49…300 4340
VVF45.. Flange 65…150 16 49…300 4345
VVF43.. Flange 65…150 16 50…400 4404
VVF53.. Flange 65…150 25 63…400 4405
VVF61... Flange 65…150 40 49…300 4382
Three-port valves VX... (control valves for «mixing» and« diverting»):
1)
VXF21... Flange 100 6 124…160 4410
VXF22... Flange 100 6 160 4401
1)
VXF31... Flange 100…150 10 124…315 4420
VXF32... Flange 100…150 16 160…400 4402
1)
VXF40... Flange 100…150 16 124…315 4430
VXF42... Flange 100…150 16 125…400 4403
1)
VXF41... Flange 65…150 16 49…300 4440
VXF43.. Flange 65…150 16 63…400 4404
VXF53.. Flange 65…150 25 63…400 4405
VXF61... Flange 65…150 40 49…300 4482
For admissible differential pressures Χpmax and closing pressures Χps, refer to the relevant
valve data sheets.
1)
Valves are phased-out
Note Third-party valves with strokes between 12…40 mm can be motorized, provided
they are «closed with the de-energized» fail-safe mechanism and provided that the
necessary mechanical coupling is available. For SKC32.. and SKC82.. actuators the Y1
signal must be routed via an additional freely-adjustable end switch (ASC9.3) to limit
the stroke.
We recommend that you contact your local Siemens office for the necessary
information.
Rev. no. Overview table, see page 20.
Technology
4567Z01
1
4567Z02
Principle of
electro-hydraulic
2
actuators 3 1 Manual adjuster
4
5 2 Pressure cylinder
6 3 Suction chamber
7
8 4 Return spring
9
5 Solenoid valve
10
11 6 Hydraulic pump
12 7 Piston
8 Pressure chamber
9 Position indicator (0 to 1)
10 Coupling
11 Valve stem
12 Plug
Valve closed Valve open

Opening the valve The hydraulic pump (6) forces oil from the suction chamber (3) to the pressure chamber
(8) and thereby moving the pressure cylinder (2) downwards. The valve stem (11)
retracts and the valve opens. Simultaneously the return spring (4) is compressed.
Closing the valve Activating the solenoid valve (5) allows the oil in the pressure chamber to flow back into
the suction chamber. The compressed return spring moves the pressure cylinder
upwards. The valve stem extends and the valve closes
Manual operation mode For manual operation, swing out the crank so that the display window becomes visible.
By rotating the crank or the manual adjustment knob, the display window shows the
engagement bar and/or the scale dial with stroke indication.
Turning the manual adjuster (1) clockwise moves the pressure cylinder downwards and
opens the valve. Simultaneously the return spring is compressed.
In the manual operation mode the control signals Y and Z can further open the valve
but cannot move to the «0%» stroke position of the valve. To retain the manually set
position, switch off the power supply or disconnect the control signals Y and Z. In the
display window the red indicator dial is visible.
Note: Controller in When setting the controller for a longer time period to manual operation, we
manual operation recommend adjusting the actuator with the manual adjuster to the desired position. This
guarantees that the actuator remains in this position for that time period. Attention: Do
not forget to switch back to automatic operation after the controller is set back to
automatic control.
Automatic mode Turn the manual adjuster counterclockwise to the end stop. The pressure cylinder
moves upward to the «0%» stroke position of the valve. In the display window the red
scale disappears and the crank can be swing closed.
Minimal volumetric flow The actuator can manually be adjusted to a stroke position > 0 % allowing its use in
applications requiring constantly a minimal volumetric flow.
Spring-return facility The SKC32.61, SKC82.61.. and SKC62.. actuators, which feature a spring-return
function, incorporate a solenoid valve which opens if the control signal or power fails.
The return spring causes the actuator to move to the «0 %» stroke position and closes
the valve.
SKC32../SKC82.. The actuator is controlled by a 3-position signal either via terminals Y1 or Y2 and
3-position control signal generates the desired stroke by means of above described principle of operation.
∂ Voltage on Y1 piston extends valve opens
∂ Voltage on Y2 piston retracts valve closes
∂ No voltage on Y1 and Y2 piston / valve stem remain in the respective position
SKC62.., SKC60 The valve is either controlled via terminal Y or override control Z. The positioning signal
Y control signal Y generates the desired stroke by means of above described principle of operation.
DC 0...10 V and/or ∂ Signal Y increasing: piston extends valve opens
DC 4...20 mA, 0…1000 Ω ∂ Signal Y decreasing: piston retracts valve closes
∂ Signal Y constant: piston / valve stem remain in the respective position
∂ Override control Z see description of override control input, page 8
Frost protection monitor A frost protection thermostat can be connected to the SKC6.. actuator. The added
Frost protection signals from the QAF21.. and QAF61.. require the use of SKC62UA actuators. Notes
thermostat on special programming of the electronics are described under «Enhanced electronics»
on page 5 «Connection diagrams» for operation with frost protection thermostat or frost
protection monitor refer to page 16.

4567Z03
Standard electronics
SKC62.., SKC60
Calib.
Z
Status
1 Connection terminals
ok
2 Mode DIL switches
0...10V
4...20mA green
calib.
Status
red
error
valve
jam
3 LED status indication
Calib.
4 Slot for calibration
DIL switches Positioning signal Y Flow characteristic

SKC62.., SKC60 Position feedback U
ON ON
ON 4567Z05 DC 4…20 mA lin = linear
4567Z07
12 12
ON ON
OFF *) DC 0…10 V log = equal percentage
4567Z06
4567Z08
12 12
*) Factory setting:
All switches OFF V 100
Relationship
lin
between control
g
lo
signal Y and V0
0 10 V
volumetric flow 4 20 mA
Enhanced electronics
SKC62UA
1 Connection terminals
Calib.
2 DIL switches
Z
Status
ok
3 LED status indication
0...10V
4...20mA
4 Stroke calibration
green
calib.
error
Calib.
St atus
red valve
jam 5 Rotary switch Up
(factory setting 0)
6 Rotary switch Lo
DIL switches Direction of operation Sequence control Control signal Y Flow characteristic
SKC62UA or stroke limit control Position feedback U
Sequence control
ON reverse-acting Signal addition DC 4...20 mA lin = linear
QAF21../QAF61..
log = equal
OFF * direct-acting Stroke limit control DC 0...10 V
percentage
* Factory settings: all switches

Relationship V 100
OFF between control

lin
signal Y and
lo
volumetric flow V0
0 10 V
4 20 mA

Selection of direction of ∂ With normally-closed valves, «direct-acting» means that with a signal input of 0 V,
operation the valve closes (applies to all Siemens valves listed under
SKC62UA «equipment combinations» on page 3)
∂ With normally-open valves, «direct-acting» means that with a signal input of 0 V, the
valve is open.
Direct acting Reverse-acting
Stroke
(10 V)
0% 100 %
100 %
Re
Y
Y
ve
rs
ct
e-a
ire
c
100 % D
tin
0%
g
(10 V) 0% Y
0V 10 V
Input DC 0...10 V Input DC 10...0 V 4 mA 20 mA
DC 4...20 mA DC 20...4 mA 0ς 1000 ς
0...1000 ς 1000...0 ς
Note The mechanical spring-return function is not affected by the direction of operation
selected.

Stroke limit control Setting the stroke limit control Setting the sequence control
and sequence control The rotary switches LO and UP can be used The rotary switches LO and UP can be used
SKC62UA to apply an upper and lower limit to the stroke to determine the starting point or the operating
in increments of 3%, up to a maximum of 45% range of a sequence.
Position Lower stroke Position Upper stroke Position Starting point for Position Operating range
of LO limit of UP limit of LO sequence control of UP of sequence
control
0 0% 0 100 % 0 0V 0 10 V
1 3% 1 97 % 1 1V 1 10 V *
2 6% 2 94 % 2 2V 2 10 V **
3 9% 3 91 % 3 3V 3 3 V ***
4 12 % 4 88 % 4 4V 4 4V
5 15 % 5 85 % 5 5V 5 5V
6 18 % 6 82 % 6 6V 6 6V
7 21 % 7 79 % 7 7V 7 7V
8 24 % 8 76 % 8 8V 8 8V
9 27 % 9 73 % 9 9V 9 9V
A 30 % A 70 % A 10 V A 10 V
B 33 % B 67 % B 11 V B 11 V
C 36 % C 64 % C 12 V C 12 V
D 39 % D 61 % D 13 V D 13 V
E 42 % E 58 % E 14 V E 14 V
F 45 % F 55 % F 15 V F 15 V
* Operating range of QAF21.. (see below)

** Operating range of QAF61.. (see below)
*** The smallest adjustment is 3 V; control with 0…30 V is only possible via Y.
Stroke control with Setting the signal addition

QAF21.. / QAF61.. The operating range of the frost protection
signal addition monitor (QAF21.. or QAF61..) can be defined
Calib.
with rotary switches LO and UP.
SKC62UA only Position Sequence control Position QAF21../ QAF61..
of LO start point of UP operating range
0 1 QAF21..
Lo Up 0 2 QAF61..
Calibration In order to determine the stroke positions 0 % and 100 % in the valve, calibration is
SKC62.., SKC60 required on initial commissioning:
Prerequisites
∂ Mechanical coupling of the actuator SKC6.. with a Siemens valve
∂ Actuator must be in «Automatic operation» enabling stroke calibration to
capture the effective 0 % and 100 % values
∂ AC 24 V power supply
∂ Housing cover removed
Calibration
1. Short-circuit contacts in calibration slot 01124
green LED flashes;

(e.g. with a screwdriver)
position feedback U
2. Actuator moves to «0 %» stroke position (1)
inactive
(valve closed)
3. Actuator moves to «100 %» stroke position (2)
4567Z09
0%
(valve open) 1
Stroke
2 3
4. Measured values are stored
100% t
Normal operation
5. Actuator moves to the position (3) as green LED is lit permanently;
indicated by signals Y or Z position feedback U active, the values
correspond to the actual positions
A lit red LED indicates a calibration error.

The calibration can be repeated any number of times.

Indication of The LED status indication indicates operational status with dual-colored LED and is
operating state visible with removed cover.
SKC62.., SKC60 LED Indication Function Remarks, troubleshooting
Green Lit Normal operation Automatic operation; everything o.k.
Flashing Calibration in progress Wait until calibration is finished (LED stops

flashing, green or red LED will be lit)
Red Lit Faulty stroke calibration Check mounting

Restart stroke calibration (by short-circuiting
calibration slot)
Internal error Replace electronics
Flashing Inner valve jammed Check valve
Both Dark No power supply Check mains network, check wiring

Electronics faulty Replace electronics
As a general rule, the LED can assume only the states shown above (continuously red
or green, flashing red or green, or off).
Override control Override control input can be operated in following different modes of operation
input Z Z-mode
SKC62.., SKC60 no function fully open closed override with Signal addition
0…1000 Ω SKC62UA only
Connections
Transfer
linear or equal- linear or equal- linear or equal-

percentage percentage percentage
∂ Z-contact not ∂ Z-contact connected ∂ Z-contact connected ∂ Z-contact connected ∂ Z-contact is
connected directly to G directly to G0 to M via resistor R connected to R of
∂ Valve stroke follows ∂ Y-input has no effect ∂ Y-input has no effect ∂ Starting position at the frost protection
Y-input 50 Ω / end position monitor QAF21.. or
at 900 Ω QAF61..
∂ Y-input has no effect ∂ Valve stroke follows
signals Y and R(Z)
Note Shown operation modes are based on the factory setting «direct acting»
Y-input has no effect in Z-mode.

Accessories
SKC.. ASZ6.6
stem heater
∂ for media below 0 °C

∂ mount between valve and actuator
SKC32.., SKC82.. ASC9.3 ASZ7.3
double auxiliary switch potentiometer
4561Z05
adjustable switching points 0…1000 Ω
Note: ASZ7.3 For the combination SIMATIC S5/S7 and position feedback message, we recommend
actuators with DC 0…9.8 V feedback signals.
The signal peaks that occur in the potentiometer ASZ7.3 may result in error messages
on Siemens SIMATIC.
This is not the case when combined with Siemens HVAC controllers.
The reason is that SIMATIC has a higher resolution and faster response time.
SKC62.., SKC60 ASC1.6

auxiliary switch
switching point 0…5 % stroke
See section «Technical data» on page 13 for more information.

Engineering notes
Conduct the electrical connections in accordance with local regulations on electrical

installations as well as the internal or connection diagrams.
Caution Safety regulations and restrictions designed to ensure the safety of people and
property must be observed at all times!
The plant operator must also ensure compliance with applicable guidelines on
cable insulation when using a safety limiter. Failure to comply may cause the
safety limiter function to fail.
4567Z11
Caution For media below 0 °C the ASZ6.6 stem heater is required
to keep the valve from freezing. For safety reasons the
stem heater is designed for an operating voltage of
AC 24 V / 30 W.
For this case, do not insulate the actuator bracket and the
valve stem, as air circulation must be ensured. Do not
touch the hot parts without prior protective measures to
avoid burns.
Non-observance of the above may result in accidents and
fires!
Recommendation: Above 140 °C insulating the
valves is strictly recommended.
Observe admissible temperatures, refer to «Use» on page 2 and «Technical data» on
page 13.
If an auxiliary switch is required, its switching point should be indicated on the plant
schematic.
Every actuator must be driven by a dedicated controller (refer to

«Connection diagrams», page 16).

Mounting instructions
Mounting Instruction 74 319 0324 0 for fitting the actuator to the valve are by packed in
the actuator packaging. The instructions for accessories are enclosed with the
accessories themselves.
Accessories Installation instructions Accessories Mounting instructions
ASC1.6 G4563.3 4 319 5544 0 ASZ7.3 74 319 0247 0
ASC9.3 G4561.3 4 319 5545 0 ACT control unit M4568 74 319 0554 0
SKC.. M3240 74 319 0324 0 QAF21.. 74 319 0399 0
SKC.. 74 319 0326 0 ASZ6.6 M4501.1 74 319 0750 0
Orientation
90° 90°
Commissioning notes
When commissioning the system, check the wiring and functions, and set any auxiliary
switches and potentiometers as necessary, or check the existing settings.
Cylinder with valve Cylinder with valve

stem connector fully stem connector fully
retracted 0 extended 0
⇓ stroke = 0% 1 ⇓ stroke = 100 % 1

4566Z12
4566Z13
The manual adjuster must be rotated counterclockwise to the end stop.
This causes the Siemens valves, types VVF.. and VXF.. to close (stroke = 0 %).
Automatic operation For automatic operation, the crank (2) on the manual adjustment knob (1) must be
engaged. If not engaged, turn the crank counter-clockwise until the display window (3)
neither shows the scale (4) nor the crank engagement bar.
1
2
4564Z16
4564Z14
Engaged crank (2) on the Display window with invisible scale dial and crank
manual adjustment knob (1) engagement bar

Manual operation For manual operation, swing out the crank (2) so that the display window (3) becomes
visible. By rotating the crank or the manual adjustment knob (1), the display window
shows the engagement bar and/or the scale dial with stroke indication.
4564Z17
4564Z15
Swung-out crank, Display window with scale dial (4) and stroke
display window (3) indication
Maintenance notes
The SKC.. actuators are maintenance-free.
When servicing the actuator:

∂ Switch off pump of the hydronic loop
∂ Interrupt the power supply to the actuator
∂ Close the main shutoff valves in the system
∂ If necessary, disconnect electrical connections from the terminals
∂ The actuator must be correctly fitted to the valve before recommissioning.
Recommendation SKC6..: trigger stroke calibration.
Repair «Replacement parts», see page 20.
A damaged housing or cover represents an injury risk

∂ NEVER uninstall an actuator from the valve
∂ Uninstall the valve-actuator combination (actuating device) as a complete
device
∂ Use only properly trained technicians to uninstall the unit
∂ Send the actuating device together with an error report to your local Siemens
representative for analysis and disposal
∂ Properly mount the new actuating device (valve and actuator)
Parts could fly ultimately resulting in injuries from uninstalling an actuator with a
damaged valve housing due to the tensioned return spring.
Disposal
The device is considered an electronics device for disposal in terms of European

Directive 2012/19/EU and may not be disposed of as domestic garbage.
∂ Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
Warranty
listed under "Equipment combinations", page 3. Siemens rejects any and all warranties
in the event that third-party products are used.

Technical data
SKC32.. SKC82.. SKC6..

Power supply Operating voltage AC 230 V AC 24 V AC 24 V
Voltage tolerance ° 15 % ° 20 % ° 20 %
SELV / PELV
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Max. Power consumption at SKC32.60: SKC82.60, ..60U SKC60
50 Hz 18 VA / 14 W 15 VA / 12 W 17 VA / 13 W
SKC32.61: SKC82.61, ..61U SKC62..
24 VA / 18 W 19 VA / 14 W 21 VA / 15 W
External supply cable fuse min. 0.5 A, slow min. 1.6 A, slow
max. 6 A, slow max. 10 A, slow
Signal inputs Control signal DC 0...10 V,
3-position DC 4...20 mA,
0...1000 Ω
Terminal Y Voltage DC 0…10 V
Input impedance 100 kΩ
Current DC 4…20 mA
Input impedance 240 Ω
Signal resolution < 1%
Hysteresis 1 %
Terminal Z Resistor 0…1000 Ω
Override control Z not connected, priority terminal Y No function
Z connected directly to G max. stroke 100 %
Z connected directly to G0 min. stroke 0 %
Z connected to M via 0...1000 ς stroke proportional to R
Position Terminal U voltage DC 0...9.8 V
feedback load impedance > 10 kΩ
current DC 4...19.6 mA
load impedance < 500 Ω
Connecting Cable cross-sectional area 0.5 … 2.5 mm2 / AWG 21 … 14
cable
Functional Data Positioning time at 50 Hz 1)
opening SKC32.6.. 120 s SKC82.6.. 120 s 120 s
Closing SKC32.6.. 120 s SKC82.6.. 120 s 20 s
Spring-return time 1) SKC32.61 18 s SKC82.61 18 s SKC62.. 20 s
Positioning force 2800 N

Nominal stroke 40 mm
Max. permissible medium -25…220 °C
temperature < 0 °C: requires stem heater ASZ6.6
1)
At room temperature (23°C), low ambient temperatures or high Δp may prolong these times
Electrical Cable entry 4 x M20 (⊕ 20,5 mm)
connections ..U with knockouts for standard ½” conduit connectors (Ø 21.5 mm)
Standards, Product standard EN 60730-x
directives and
approvals
Electromagnetic compatibility For use in residential, commercial, light-industrial and industrial
(Applications) environments
EU conformity (CE) A5W00007751 1)
RCM-conformity (EMC) A5W00007895 1)
AC 230 V
EAC conformity Eurasia conformity for all SKC..
UL certification: UL, cUL
AC 230 V -
AC 24 V UL 873, http://ul.com/database
1)
Environmental The product environmental declarations CE1E4566en01 and

SKC32.. SKC82.. SKC6..
compatibility CE1E4566en02 1) contain data on RoHS compliance, materials
composition, packaging, environmental benefit and disposal.
Dimensions / Dimensions refer to «Dimensions», page 19
Weight Weight (packing excluded) SKC32.60 9.80 kg SKC82.60 9.80 kg SKC60/62 9.85 kg
SKC32.61 9.85 kg SKC82.60U 10.10 kg SKC62U/UA 10.15 kg
SKC82.61 9.85 kg
SKC82.61U 10.15 kg
Materials Actuator housing, bracket Die-cast aluminum
Housing box and
Plastic
manual adjuster
1)
Accessories SKC32.., SKC82.. SKC6..

ASC1.6 Switching capacity AC 24 V,
Auxiliary switch 10 mA...4 A resistive,
2 A inductive
ASC9.3 Switching capacity per AC 250 V, 6 A resistive, 2.5 A inductive
double auxiliary auxiliary switch
switch
ASZ7.3 Change in overall resistance
Potentiometer of potentiometer at nominal 0…1000 ς
stroke
ASZ6.6 Operating voltage AC 24 V ± 20 %
stem heater Power consumption 40 VA / 30 W
Inrush current Max. 8,5 A (max. temperature 85 °C / 185 F)
SKC62UA enhanced functions
Direction of operation Direct-acting, reverse-acting DC 0...10 V / DC 10...0 V

DC 4...20 mA / DC 20...4 mA
0...1000 ς / 1000...0 ς
Stroke limit control Range of lower limit 0...45 % adjustable
Range of upper limit 100...55 % adjustable
Sequence control Terminal Y
Starting point of sequence 0...15 V adjustable
Operating range of sequence 3...15 V adjustable
Signal addition Z connected to R of
Frost protection monitor QAF21.. 0...1000 ς, added to Y signal
Frost protection monitor QAF61.. DC 1.6 V, added to Y signal

Ambient conditions and protection data
Classification to Automatic action: Type 1AA / Type 1AC / Modulation Action
IEC/EN 60730 Pollution degree: 2
Housing protection as per IP54
IEC/EN 60529
Environmental conditions
Transportation Class 2K3
(in transport packaging) Temperature -30...65 °C
to IEC/EN 60721-3-2 Humidity 5...95 % (no condensation)
Operation Class 3K5
to IEC/EN 60721-3-3 Temperature -15...<55 °C
Humidity 5...95 % (no condensation)
Storage Class 1K3
to IEC/EN 60721-3-1 Temperature -15...55 °C
Humidity 5...95 % (no condensation)
Internal diagrams
SKC32.61 Cm1 end switch

n solenoid valve for spring-
AC 230 V, 3-Position
return
c1, c2 ASC9.3 double auxiliary
switch
a, b, c ASZ7.3 potentiometer
Y1 Positioning signal «open»
SKC32.60 Y2 Positioning signal «close»
AC 230 V, 3-Position 21 spring-return function
N neutral conductor
SKC82.61 Cm1 end switch

n solenoid valve for spring-
AC 24 V, 3-Position
return
c1, c2 ASC9.3 double auxiliary
switch
a, b, c ASZ7.3 potentiometer
Y1 Positioning signal «open»
SKC82.60 Y2 Positioning signal «close»
AC 24 V, 3-Position 21 spring-return function
G System potential
SKC60, SKC62 DC 0 ...10 V

U position indication
U oder Ausgang
SKC62U 4 ... 20 mA Z override control
voll offen
SKC62UA Eingang Y positioning signal

Zwangsteuerung
AC 24 V, DC 0…10 V, 0 ...100 %
(Signalpriorität) M measuring neutral
G0 operating voltage AC 24 V:
4…20 mA, 0…1000 Ω Y
DC 0 ...10 V
oder 0 ...100 %
Eingang
Valve Seat
Detection
4 ... 20 mA Hub system neutral (SN)
M Valve Jam G operating voltage AC 24 V:
Detection
system potential (SP)
G0 Switching without power as
MMI
a spring return function
G
Ventil

SKC6.. G0 operating voltage AC 24 V: system neutral (SN)

G operating voltage AC 24 V: system potential (SP)
Y Positioning signal DC 0...10 (30) V or DC 4...20 mA
M Measuring neutral (= G0)
U
Position indication DC 0...10 V or DC 4...20 mA
Z
Override control (functionality see page 8)
01804
Auxiliary switch 3
ASC1.6
c1
4 5
Connection diagrams
SKC32.. SKC32.61 SKC32.60

AC 230 V AC 230 V AC 230 V
3-Position max. 6 A max. 6 A
(L) (L)
F1 (Y1) (Y2) (N) (Y1) (Y2) (N)

N1 N1
0% 0%
N N
F1 safety limiter (eg L Phase Y1 Positioning signal «open»
temperature limiter) N neutral Y2 Positioning signal «close»
N1, N2 controller 21 Spring-return function
Y1, Y2 actuators

SKC82.. SKC82.61, SKC82.61U SKC82.60, SKC82.60U
AC 24 V
AC 24 V AC 24 V
3-Position SN SN
0% 0%
Y1 Y2 G0 N1 Y1 Y2 G0
F1
G G N1
SP SP
AC 24 V AC 24 V
SP SP
0% 0%
Y1 Y2 G N1 Y1 Y2 G
F1
G0
G0 N1
SN SN
F1 safety limiter (eg SP Systempotential AC 24 V Y1 Positioning signal «open»
temperature limiter) SN System neutral Y2 Positioning signal «close»
N1, N2 controller 21 Spring-return function
Y1, Y2 actuators
SKC6.. SKC60 AC 230 V
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
DC 0…10 V, 4…20 mA, SP
0…1000 Ω G M
1 3 2 F2 1 3 2 F3 R M F4
M
N1
G M U Z
SN
N

SKC62 AC 230 V
SKC62U AC 24 V
SP
SKC62UA
G M
F1
1 3 2 F2 1 3 2 F3 R M F4
M
N1
G M U Z
SN
N
Y1 actuator
N1 controller
F1 safety limiter (eg temperature limiter)
F2 frost protection thermostat
terminals: 1 – 2 frost hazard / sensor is interrupted (thermostat closes with frost)
1 – 3 normal operation
F3 temperature detector
F4 Frost protection monitor with 0…1000 Ω signal output, e.g. QAF21.. or QAF61.. (only SKB62UA) *
G (SP) System potential AC 24 V
G0 (SN) System neutral
* Only with sequence control and the appropriate selector switch settings (see page 5ff)
When using the safety limiter F1, ensure that no mistakes may occur on cable
Danger
insulation that may cancel out the temperature limiter function (applies to both 230 V as
well as 24 V types).
For SN earthing (e.g. PELV) comply under all circumstances with the note above.

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm
** SKC..U: with knockouts for standard ½” conduit connectors (Ø 21.5 mm)

► = > 100 mm , minimum clearance from ceiling or wall for mounting,
►► = > 200 mm , connection, operation, maintenance etc.

Replacement parts
Order numbers for replacement parts
Cover Hand control 1) Clamp Stem connection Control unit
Actuator type
SKC32.60 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498
SKC32.61 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498
SKC82.60 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498
SKC82.60U 410455828 426855108 410356058 417856498
SKC82.61 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498
SKC82.61U 410455828 426855108 410356058 417856498
SKC62 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498 466857488
SKC62U 410455828 426855108 410356058 417856498 466857488
SKC60 410455828 426855108 410355768 417856498 466857598
SKC62UA 410455828 426855108 410356058 417856498 466857518
1) hand control, blue with mechanical parts
Revision numbers
Type reference Valid from rev. No. Type reference Valid from rev. No.
SKC32.60 ..D SKC82.61U ..D
SKC32.61 ..D SKC62 ..G
SKC82.60 ..D SKC62U ..G
SKC82.60U ..D SKC60 ..G
SKC82.61 ..D SKC62UA ..G

S55158 actuator

SAS31.03 SAS61.53 SAS61.33
Acvatix™
Actuators SAS.., SAT.. for valves
Basic Documentation

Contents
1 About this documentation ....................................................................
1.1 Navigation ............................................................................................. .
1.2 Revision history ..................................................................................... .
1.3 Reference documents ............................................................................ .
1.4 Before you start ..................................................................................... .
1.4.1 Trademarks ........................................................................................... .
1.4.2 Copyright ............................................................................................... .
1.4.3 Quality assurance ...................................................................................
1.4.4 Document use / request to the reader .................................................... .
1.5 Scope of this documentation .................................................................. .
2 Engineering ...........................................................................................
2.1 Product description ................................................................................ .
2.2 Use ........................................................................................................ .
2.3 Type summary ....................................................................................... .
2.3.1 Stroke actuators..................................................................................... .
2.4 Ordering ................................................................................................ .
2.5 Equipment combinations ........................................................................ .
2.5.1 2-port / 3-port threaded valves with stroke actuator SAS.. ...................... .
2.5.2 2-port / 3-port threaded valves with stroke actuator SAT.. ....................... .
2.6 Accessories .........................................................................................
2.6.1 Electrical accessories .......................................................................... ..
2.6.2 Mechanical accessories .......................................................................
2.7 Product replacements ..........................................................................
2.7.1 Stroke actuators SAS../SAT.. to SQS.. ..................................................
2.7.2 Electrical accessories ..........................................................................
2.8 Spare parts ..........................................................................................
2.9 Sizing ..................................................................................................
2.9.1 Parallel operation of actuators..............................................................
2.9.2 Permissible cable length and wire cross-sectional area ........................
2.10 Warranty ..............................................................................................
3 Handling .............................................................................................
3.1 Mounting and installation .....................................................................
3.1.1 Mounting positions ...............................................................................
3.1.2 Fitting stroke actuators SAS.. to threaded valves .................................
3.1.3 Accessories .........................................................................................
3.1.4 Wiring (installation) ..............................................................................
3.2 Commissioning and operation ..............................................................
3.2.1 Function check and Calibration ............................................................
3.2.2 Maintenance ........................................................................................
3.2.3 Disposal ..............................................................................................
4 Functions and control .......................................................................
4.1 3-position control .................................................................................
4.2 Modulating control ...............................................................................
4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow characteristic selection ...............................
4.2.2 Position feedback U .............................................................................
4.2.3 Calibration ...........................................................................................
4.2.4 Signal priorities ....................................................................................

4.2.5 Detection of valve seat......................................................................... 29
4.2.6 Detection of foreign bodies .................................................................. 30
4.2.7 Forced control Z .................................................................................. 30
4.3 Technical and mechanical design ......................................................... 31
4.3.1 Transmission of power ......................................................................... 31
4.3.2 Coupling .............................................................................................. 31
4.3.3 Fail safe function ................................................................................. 32
4.3.4 Manual adjuster ................................................................................... 33
4.3.5 Indicators............................................................................................. 34
4.3.6 Electrical accessories .......................................................................... 35
4.3.7 Mechanical accessories ....................................................................... 35
5 Technical data .................................................................................... 36
6 Connection diagrams and dimensions ............................................. 38
6.1 Internal diagrams ................................................................................. 38
6.2 Connection terminals ........................................................................... 39
6.2.1 Actuators ............................................................................................. 39
6.2.2 Electrical accessories .......................................................................... 40
6.2.3 Cable labeling...................................................................................... 40
6.3 Connection diagrams ........................................................................... 41
6.4 Dimensions.......................................................................................... 42
6.4.1 Stroke actuators................................................................................... 42
Revision numbers ............................................................................................. 44
7 Glossary ............................................................................................. 45
7.1 Symbols .............................................................................................. 45
7.2 Terms .................................................................................................. 45
Index 47

1 About this documentation
1.1 Navigation
Information about a specific actuator is provided throughout the document. The

structure of chapters 2 to 4 is as follows:
Note Glossary and Index are arranged at the end of the document.
1.2 Revision history
Revision Date Changes Chapter

First edition 2015-05-19 - -
1.3 Reference documents
Type of document SAS.. SAT..

Data Sheet N4581 N4584
Mounting Instructions lasered on cover
AC 230 V T4581X1 T4584X1
CE Declaration of Conformity
AC/DC 24 V T4581X2 T4584X2
Environmental Declaration E4581 E4584
1.4 Before you start

1.4.1 Trademarks
The table below lists the third-party trademarks used in this document and their
legal owners. The use of trademarks is subject to international and domestic
provisions of the law.
Trademarks Legal owner

TM
Acvatix Siemens Switzerland Ltd
All product names listed in the table are registered (®) or not registered (™)
trademarks of the owner listed in the table. We forgo the labeling (e.g. using the
symbols ® and ™) of trademarks for the purposes of legibility based on the
reference in this section.
1.4.2 Copyright
This document may be duplicated and distributed only with the express permission
of Siemens, and may be passed on only to authorized persons or companies with
the required technical knowledge.

1.4.3 Quality assurance
These documents were prepared with great care.

· The contents of all documents are checked at regular intervals
· All necessary corrections are included in subsequent versions
· Anpassungen bzw. Documents are automatically amended as a consequence of
modifications and corrections to the products described
Please make sure that you are aware of the latest document revision date.
If you find lack of clarity while using this document, or if you have any criticisms or
suggestions, please contact the product manager in your nearest branch office.
The addresses of the Siemens regional companies are available at
www.siemens.com/acvatix.
1.4.4 Document use / request to the reader
Before using our products, it is important that you read the documents supplied
with or ordered at the same time as the products (equipment, applications, tools
etc.) carefully and in full.
We assume that persons using our products and documents are authorized and
trained appropriately and have the technical knowledge required to use our
products as intended.
More information on the products and applications is available:
· On the intranet (Siemens employees only) at
https://workspace.sbt.siemens.com/content/00001123/default.aspx.
· From the Siemens branch office near you www.siemens.com/acvatix or from
your system supplier.
· From the support team at headquarters fieldsupport-zug.ch.sbt@siemens.com if
there is no local point of contact.
Siemens assumes no liability to the extent allowed under the law for any losses
resulting from a failure to comply with the aforementioned points or for the improper
compliance of the same.
1.5 Scope of this documentation
This document shall serve as a source of knowledge. In addition to basic

information, it provides general technical information about the actuators used in
HVAC plants. It is also targeted at engineering staff, HVAC electrical planners,
system integrators and service engineers and provides all information required for
planning work, correct installation, commissioning and service.

2 Engineering
2.1 Product description
The line of small actuators is comprised of stroke actuators SAS.. and SAT..
Mechanical design
User interface
1
Electrical connections
Power transmission and

preparation
2
Print
Motor
Yoke (for assembly of

3 actuator and seat, slipper
valve)
SAS.., SAT..
Components
SAS.. / SAT.. SAS..5.. / SAT..5.. SAS..33..
A1 Manual adjuster (with slide switch)

A2 Dummy cover (without manual adjuster)
A3 Manual adjuster (without slide switch)
B Cable glands (M16 / M20)
C Position indication
D Status indication (SA..61.., 0…10 V)
E Housing cover
F Housing
G Valve stem coupling
H Housing of spring return
2.2 Use
SAS.. / SAT.. For use in connection with Siemens 2-port or 3-port valves, as control or shutoff
valves for HVAC plants.

2.3 Type summary
2.3.1 Stroke actuators
All types: · Stroke 5.5 mm

· Positioning force SAS.. 400 N
SAT.. 300 N
Fail safe
Product Operating Positioning Power Positioning function / Manual Position
Stock no. Remark
no. voltage signal consumption time Spring return adjuster feedback
time
5)
SAS31.00 S55158-A106 2.8 / 2.4 VA 120 s
5)
no / ‒ yes
SAS31.03 S55158-A107 3.5 / 2.9 VA 30 s 1) 3)
AC 230 V 3-position 5) 6)
-
SAS31.50 S55158-A108 3.5 / 2.9 VA 120 s yes / <28 s
5) 6)
no
SAS31.53 S55158-A109 5.5 / 3.8 VA 30 s yes / <14 s
5) 1)
SAS61.03 S55158-A100 5.3 / 4.5 VA
5)
no / ‒ 2)
SAS61.03U S55158-A100-A100 5.3 / 4.5 VA
DC 0…10 V yes
5) 1)
SAS61.33 S55158-A101 AC/DC 24 V DC 4…20 mA 5.9 / 4.8 VA 30 s DC 0…10 V
0…1000 Ω 5) 6) 2)
SAS61.33U S55158-A101-A100 5.9 / 4.8 VA yes / <14 s
5) 1)
SAS61.53 S55158-A102 5.8 / 5.0 VA no
5) 1) 4)
SAS81.00 S55158-A103 2.2 / 2.0 VA
5)
120 s 2)
SAS81.00U S55158-A103-A100 2.2 / 2.0 VA
5)
no / ‒ 1)
SAS81.03 S55158-A104 2.5 / 2.1 VA
AC/DC 24 V 3-position 5)
yes - 2)
SAS81.03U S55158-A104-A100 2.5 / 2.1 VA
5)
30 s 1)
SAS81.33 S55158-A105 3.4 / 2.4 VA 6)
5)
yes / <14 s 2)
SAS81.33U S55158-A105-A100 3.4 / 2.4 VA
5)
SAT31.008 S55158-A119 5.0 / 2.5 VA 8s no / ‒ yes 3)
AC 230 V 3-position 5) 6)
-
SAT31.51 S55158-A120 5.5 / 3.2 VA 15 s yes / <8 s no
1)
no / ‒
5)
SAT61.008 S55158-A117 DC 0…10 V 7.1 / 4.6 VA 8s yes
4)
S55158-A118
AC/DC 24 V DC 4…20 mA 5) 6)
DC 0…10 V
SAT61.51 0…1000 Ω 6.4 / 4.8 VA 15 s yes / <8 s no
1)
Cable gland: M16 and M20 (ISO50262)
2)
Cable gland: ½“ (UL514C)
3)
Approbation: CE
4)
Approbation: CE and UL (only 24 V)
5)
Second value: Power consumption in neutral position
6)
Spring return time increased slightly at low temperatures
2.4 Ordering
Example Product no. Stock no. Description Quantity

SAS31.00 S55158-A106 Actuator 1
+ auxiliary components (connections, auxiliary switches…)
Delivery Actuators, valves and accessories are supplied in individual packs.

2.5 Equipment combinations
2.5.1 2-port / 3-port threaded valves with stroke actuator SAS..
Typical applications: Actuators SAS..

· Heating plants Stroke 5.5 mm
· District heating plants Positioning force 400 N
· Ventilation and air conditioning plants Data sheet N4581
PN 16 VVG44.. PN 16 VXG44.. SAS..

Medium 1…120 °C Medium 1…120 °C DN G kvs ∆ps ∆pmax
3
Data sheet N4364 Data sheet N4464 [Inch] [m /h] [kPa] [kPa]
1) 1)
VVG44.15-.. VXG44.15-.. 15 G1B 0.25 / 0.4 / 0.63 1600 400
1) 1)
VVG44.15-.. VXG44.15-.. 15 G1B 1 / 1.6 725 400
1) 1)
VVG44.15-.. VXG44.15-.. 15 G1B 2.5 / 4 400 400
VVG44.20-6.3 VXG44.20-6.3 20 G 1 1/4 B 6.3 750 400
VVG44.25-10 VXG44.25-10 25 G 1 1/2 B 10 400 400
VVG44.32-16 VXG44.32-16 32 G2B 16 250 250
VVG44.40-25 VXG44.40-25 40 G 2 1/4 B 25 125 125
PN 25 VVG55.. SAS..
Medium 1…130 °C DN G kvs ∆ps ∆pmax
3
Data sheet N4379 [Inch] [m /h] [kPa] [kPa]
1)
VVG55.15-.. 15 G 3/4 B 0.25 / 0.4 / 0.63 2500 1200
1)
VVG55.15-.. 15 G 3/4 B 1 / 1.6 / 2.5 2000 1200
VVG55.20-4 20 G1B 4 1000 1000
VVG55.25-6.3 25 G 1 1/4 B 6.3 800 800
1)
.. = insert kvs value
2.5.2 2-port / 3-port threaded valves with stroke actuator SAT..
Typical applications: Actuators SAT..

· Heating plants Stroke 5.5 mm
· Ventilation plants Positioning force 300 N
Data sheet N4584
PN 25 VVG549.. SAT..
∆ps ∆pmax
1)
Medium 2...130 °C DN G kvs
3
Data sheet Q4380 [Inch] [m /h] [kPa] [kPa]
VVG549.15-0.25 0.25
VVG549.15-0.4 0.4 2500
VVG549.15-0.63 0.63
15 G 3/4 B
VVG549.15-1 1
1200
VVG549.15-1.6 1.6 1500
VVG549.15-2.5 2.5
2)
VVG549.20-4K 20 G1B 4
2)
1600
VVG549.25-6.3K 25 G 1 1/4 B 6.3
1)
Briefly 150 °C, with ALG..B fittings up to 100 °C
2)
Pressure compensated

2.6 Accessories
2.6.1 Electrical accessories
Product no. Accessory Description

SAS.. / SAT.. ASC10.51 Auxiliary switch
2.6.2 Mechanical accessories
Product no. Accessory Description

SAS.. / SAT.. ASK39.2 Weather shield
2.7 Product replacements
Replacement of SQS../SSC.. actuators by SAS.. and SAT.. actuators.
Note · When replacing actuators consider positioning force and torque.

· Adjust in the controller the parameter "Running time" (corresponds to positioning
time + idle stroke) and "Positioning time" if changed, to ensure stable control.
· The replacement of accessory items needs to be taken into consideration also.
In that case, compatibility is not necessarily ensured.
2.7.1 Stroke actuators SAS../SAT.. to SQS..
SQS.. SAS.. / SAT..

Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. VVG44..
time force time force VXG44.. VVG55.. VVG549..
Product no. OEM [s] [N] Product no. [s] [N] DN15…40 DN15…25 DN15…25
SQS35.00 SQS359.00/189 P P -
SQS35.000C 150 SAS31.00 120 P P -
SQS35.00SL P P -
SQS35.03 SQS359.03 400 400 P P -
35 SAS31.03 30
SQS359.03/189 P P -
SQS35.50 - 150 SAS31.50 120 P P -
SQS35.53 - 35 SAS31.53 30 P P
- SQS359.05 15 250 SAT31.008 8 - - P
300
- SQS359.54 20 400 SAT31.51 15 - - P
SQS65 - 150 SAS61.03 P P -
SQS65.2 - - P P -
SQS65.5 - 400 SAS61.53 30 400 P P -
35
SQS65.5U - SAS61.33U P P -
SQS65U - SAS61.03U P P -
SQS85.00 - 150 SAS81.00 120 P P -
SQS85.03 - 400 SAS81.03 400 P P -
35 30
SQS85.53U - SAS81.33U P P -

Notes · If auxiliary switches are used, their switching points should be indicated on the
plant schematic.
· Do not insulate the yoke and housing of the actuator and the valve stem, as air
circulation must be ensured.
· Non-observance of the above may result in accidents and fires!
· Do not touch the hot parts without prior protective measures to avoid
burns!
Stroke actuators SQS.. SAS..

ASC9.6 Auxiliary switch ASC9.6 ASC10.51
2.8 Spare parts
The following spare parts are available:
SAS.. Stock number Description

SAT.. 8000069479 Housing cover with screws and
light conductor as an
assembly, without laser
marking

2.9 Sizing
2.9.1 Parallel operation of actuators
SAS31.. and SAS81.. 3-position actuators must have one specific controller each; refer to chapter
6.3 Connection diagrams (page 41).
SAS61.. Up to 10 actuators can drive in parallel on a controller output with a rating of 1 mA.
Modulating actuators have an input impedance of 100 kΩ.
2.9.2 Permissible cable length and wire cross-sectional area
Cable lengths and wire cross-sectional areas depend on the following criteria of the
actuators:
· Current draw
· Permissible voltage drop across the power supply lines
The control accuracy of the modulating actuators can be improved by using 4-wire
connections, thus ensuring that voltage drops on G0 will not distort the positioning
signal.
Note When determining the cable length and the wire cross-sectional area, adherence to
the permissible operating voltage tolerance at the actuator is of importance, in
addition to the permissible voltage drop across the operating voltage and signal
lines (see table below).
Product Max. permissible voltage

Operating voltage Terminal
no. drop
SA..31.. AC 230 V N, Y1, Y2 2% each (total of 4%)
SA..61.. G0, Y, U 1% each (at DC 0…10 V)
AC/DC 24 V
SA..81.. G, Y1, Y2 4% each (total of 8%)
The following criteria must be considered:

· With modulating control, the permissible positioning signal error must not exceed
1%, the reason being the voltage drop on the G0 wire.
· The voltage drop, caused by charging current peaks in the actuator’s DC circuit,
must not exceed 2 Vpp.
· If the G0 line is not correctly sized, load changes of the actuator due to changes
of the DC voltage drop might lead to self-oscillations.
· The operating voltage drop at AC/DC 24 V may be a maximum of 8% (4%
across the G0 wire).
Basic diagram − voltage

drop across the power
supply cables

The following diagram can be used to determine the cable lengths and wire cross-
sectional areas.
L/P-diagram for
AC/DC 24 V
Cable length L
Power P
Permissible cable length L as a function of power P and cross-sectional area of wire as a parameter
Note P is the decisive power consumption of all actuators connected in parallel. When
operating on AC 24 V, power consumption is in VA; when operating on DC 24 V,
in W.
Formulas for wire Operating voltage Permissible voltage drop / wire Formula for wire length
lengths 1313 · A
AC 230 V 2 % of AC 230 V L = 46 · [m]
P
1313 · A
4 % of AC 24 V L= [m]
P
AC 24 V
5.47 · A
1 % of DC 10 V L= [m]
I (DC)
2
A Cross-sectional area of wire in mm
L Permissible wire length in m
P Power consumption in VA (AC) or W (DC) (see actuator’s rating plate)
I(DC) DC current part (in A) on G0 wire
2.10 Warranty
The engineering data specified in chapter 2.5 Equipment combinations (page 9)

are only guaranteed in connection with the Siemens valves listed.
Note When using the actuators in connection with valves of other manufacture, correct
functioning must be ensured by the user, and Siemens will assume no
responsibility.

3 Handling
3.1 Mounting and installation
3.1.1 Mounting positions
1)
Indoor use Outdoor use
1)
Only in connection with weather shield ASK39.2, housing protection IP54 remains unchanged
3.1.2 Fitting stroke actuators SAS.. to threaded valves
First, observe chapter 3.1.1 Mounting positions.
SAS..0.. 1 2 3
SAT..0..
tighten firmly by hand
SAS..5.. 1 2 3
tighten firmly by hand

3.1.3 Accessories
Special notes on Before fitting the accessory items shown below, the following steps must be
mounting performed:
1. Actuator is mechanically connected to a Siemens valve.
2. Observe compatibility and choice of combinations. Refer to 2.6 (page 10).
3. Disconnect actuator, auxiliary switch from power.
Attention if AC 230 V connected danger of life!
4. Only required with actuators without fail safe function: Using the manual
adjuster, drive the actuator’s stem to the fully retracted position and fix the
coupling. See “Manual operation” and “Fixing the position” (page 33).
5. To fit an auxiliary switch the housing cover must be removed and the M16
knock-out broken out.
1 PZ 2 2
3 No. 3
Interior view A Plug-in space for accessory

B Connection terminal

Auxiliary switch Scope of delivery
· 1 auxiliary switch
ASC10.51 · 1 screw
Plug-in space for First, observe "Special notes on mounting" (page 15).
accessory
1 2
3 No.: 1
4 Adjust switch position (refer also to "Manual adjuster" page 33)
Without fail safe function (SA..1.0..) With fail safe function (SA..1.3.. / SA..1.5..)
5 No.: 1
When initial situation: 0 Ω When initial situation: ∞ Ω

6 Observe "Wiring (installation)" (page 18) 7 Observe "Connection terminals"
(page 39)
8 9 max. 1.2 Nm
Note Before commissioning with the control, check the exact position again; see
"Auxiliary switch", page 21.
Weather shield First, observe "Special notes on mounting” (page 15).

ASK39.2
Scope of delivery
Weather shield ASK39.2 2 UV-proof cable ties
Notes · To protect the actuator from weather effects when used outdoors, the weather
shield must always be fitted. The housing protection IP54 remains unchanged.
· If fitted several times, 2 UV-proof cable ties (700 x 7 mm) must be used when
fitted again.
· The manual adjuster cannot be used when the weather shield is mounted.
1 2

3.1.4 Wiring (installation)
Conduct the electrical connections in accordance with local regulations on

electrical installations as well as chapter 6.2 "Connection terminals" on page 39.
Preparation of wire The cable endings must be prepared before as follows:

endings
Cable entries
EU: M20 Connection
A
US: ½“ actuator
EU: M16 Connection

B
US: ½“ accessories
Cable glands Cable glands (not contained in scope of delivery)
Metric Metric Inch thread
M16 M20 ½“
Notes · Without cable gland IP protection is not guaranteed!

· Guide the cable in a loop to the cable gland, so water can drop off.
Preconditions Prior to installation, the following preconditions must be satisfied:

· Actuator is mechanically connected to a Siemens valve.
· Housing cover is removed.

Actuator 1 No: 4 2 PZ 2
3 4
Observe "Connection terminals"

5 6 (page 39)
Auxiliary switch 1 No: 3 2

ASC10.51
Observe "Connection terminals"

3 4 (page 39)

3.2 Commissioning and operation
3.2.1 Function check and Calibration
Manually Before making the function check, the following preconditions must be satisfied:
· "Environmental conditions" specified in chapter "Technical data" (page 36)
· Actuator is in "Manual operation" mode (page 33).
If available, the actuator can be operated with the help of the “Manual adjuster”
(see page 33).
Stroke Control path Bypass valve

Manual adjuster Rotary actuator
actuator valve AàAB B à AB
Turning in Actuator’s Actuator’s spindle turns
Opening Closing
clockwise direction stem extends in clockwise direction
Actuator’s spindle turns
Turning in counter- Actuator’s
in counterclockwise Closing Opening
clockwise direction stem retracts
direction
Notes · If the actuator is forced to travel beyond its end positions, overload protection
responds.
· Observe information given in chapter 4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow
characteristic selection, page 26.
Electrically Before making the function check, the following preconditions must be satisfied:
· "Environmental conditions" specified in chapter "Technical data" (page 36).
· Actuator is in “Automatic” mode (page 33).
· Actuator and, if required, accessories are correctly fitted and connected. Also
refer to chapter 6.2 Connection terminals (page 39).
· Power is applied.
SA..61.. Calibration is required with modulating actuators and SA..61.. before the function
check.
General notes on Before making the calibration, the following preconditions must be satisfied:
calibration · A description of the calibration function is given in chapter 4.2.3 Calibration
(page 27).
· Housing cover is removed (see “Special notes on mounting”, page 15).
1 Bridge contact 2 Check LED (page 34)
If required, calibration can be repeated any number of times.
Make the function check for modulating actuators after the calibration with a point
test according to the following table:

Control path Bypass valve Position
Connection terminals Stroke actuator Rotary actuator
valve AàAB B à AB feedback U
6V Actuator’s stem Actuator’s spindle turns in
Y Opening Closing 6V
13.6 mA extends (60%) clockwise direction (60 %)
Actuator’s spindle turns in
5V Actuator’s stem
Y counterclockwise Closing Opening 5V
12 mA retracts (50%)
direction (50 %)
Actuator’s stem Actuator’s spindle turns in
Z connected to G Opening Closing 10 V
extends clockwise direction
Actuator’s stem
Z connected to G0 counterclockwise Closing Opening 0V
retracts
direction
Only SAS61.33, SAS61.33U, Actuator’s stem
SAS61.53, SAT61.51 retracts (until end
- Closing Opening -
No voltage at G and G0 position is
1)
(fail safe function) reached)
1)
Closing action is always completed first, also when power returns.
SA..31.. and SA..81.. Make the function check for 3-position actuators according to the following table:
Control path Bypass valve

Connection terminals Stroke actuator Rotary actuator
valve AàAB B à AB
Voltage at Y1 Actuator’s stem extends Opening Closing
clockwise direction
Voltage at Y2 Actuator’s stem retracts Closing Opening
counterclockwise direction
Actuator’s stem maintains Actuator’s spindle maintains
No voltage at Y1 and Y2 Maintains the position
the position the position
Only SAS31.50, SAS31.53,
SAS81.33, SAS81.33U, SAT31.51 Actuator’s stem retracts (until
- Closing Opening
No voltage at G and G0 end position is reached)
1)
(fail safe function)
1)
Closing action is always completed first, also when power returns.
Note · Observe information given in chapter 4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow
characteristic selection, page 26.
Auxiliary switch Make the function check of the mounted auxiliary switch with a point test according
ASC10.51 to the following table – example switching point at 25% position:
Stroke Rotary Terminal Terminal

actuator actuator S1 – S3 S1 – S2
Actuator’s
stem retracts counter-
Voltage at Y2 Y=0V (until end clockwise - -
position is direction (until
reached) end position is
reached)
Actuator’s
Actuator’s
No voltage at Y1 spindle
Y=0V stem maintains
und Y2 maintains the
the position
position
Voltage at Y1 for
Actuator’s
desired valve
Valve Actuator’s spindle turns in
position % + 2% x
position stem extends clockwise
positioning time
% + 2% to desired direction to
Example:
Y = 2.7 V position (27%) desired
SAS31.00 = 27 % x
position (27%)
120 sec = 32.5 sec
Actuator’s
Actuator’s
Check switching point with spindle
stem maintains - -
voltmeter maintains the
the position
position

3.2.2 Maintenance
The actuators are maintenance-free.

Mounting:
· Do not touch the valve coupling if the components (valve/pipes) are hot
· If necessary, disconnect electrical connections from the terminals
The actuator must be correctly fitted to the valve before recommissioning.
3.2.3 Disposal
The products contain electrical and electronic components and must not be
disposed of together with domestic waste. This applies in particular to the printed
circuit board.
Legislation may demand special handling of certain components, respectively it
may be sensible from an ecological point of view.
Observe all local and currently valid legislation.

4 Functions and control
4.1 3-position control
Example: brushless DC motor with fail safe function
A 3-position signal drives the actuator 1 A/D conversion

via connection terminals Y1 or Y2. The Identification of seat
required position is transferred to the Control Control of direction
2
valve. functions Motor control
Manual adjustment
3 Brushless DC motor
4 Gear train
Fail safe function
Manual adjuster
Positioning Control path Bypass valve

Stroke actuator Rotary actuator
signal valve AàAB B à AB
Actuator’s spindle
Actuator’s stem
Voltage at Y1 turns in clockwise Opening Closing
extends
direction
Actuator’s stem
Voltage at Y2 turns in counter- Closing Opening
retracts
clockwise direction
Actuator’s stem
No voltage at Y1 Actuator’s spindle
maintains the Maintains the position
and Y2 maintains the position
position
No voltage at Y1 Actuator’s spindle
Actuator’s stem
and Y2; with fail turns in counter- Closing Opening
retracts
safe function clockwise direction
Note Observe information given in chapter 4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow
characteristic selection on page 26.
Internal control ensures very constant positioning times and determination of the
actuator’s position.

Positioning times stroke The specified positioning times refer to the respective nominal stroke / nominal
model angular rotation. Since the end positions of rotary actuators are inside the actuator,
the following remarks refer to stroke actuators.
The resulting effective strokes vary, depending on the type of valve, resulting in
shorter or longer actuator positioning times.
Stroke of valve-actuator combination [mm]
Positioning time [sec]

Legend diagram
A Mechanical end position in actuator
B Valves with 5.5 mm nominal stroke
X Time to override idle stroke (delay time), see glossary
Notes Deviations occur

· after several positioning signals Y1 and Y2 in the same direction since the stroke
movement starts with a delay of 50 ms.
· when positioning signals Y1 and Y2 are active for less than 50 ms since the
stroke movement cannot be made in that case.
A B C Y1 Y2 0
Positioning Positioning signals
Calculated position Actual position No power applied
time [ms] (power applied)

4.2 Modulating control
The modulating positioning signal 1 Calibration slot

drives the actuator steplessly. The 2 LED (2 colors)
positioning signal range DIL Changeover of characteristic
3
(DC 0...10 V / DC 4...20 mA / switches Positioning signal
0...1000 Ω) corresponds in a linear 4 A/D conversion
manner to the positioning range (fully 5 Power supply
closed...fully open, or 0…100 % Identification of seat
stroke).
Position control
Motor control
The actuator is controlled via terminal
Control Detection of foreign bodies
Y or forced control Z (page 30). The 6
functions Calibration
desired stroke / the desired rotation is
Forced control
transferred to the valve stem / the
valve spindle. Characteristics function
Manual adjustment
7 Brushless DC motor
8 Gear train
Fail safe function
Manual adjuster
Control path valve Bypass valve

Positioning signal Stroke actuator Rotary actuator
AàAB B à AB
Signal Y, Z increasing Actuator’s stem extends Opening Closing
clockwise direction
Signal Y, Z decreasing Actuator’s stem retracts Closing Opening
counterclockwise direction
Actuator’s stem maintains the Actuator’s spindle maintains
Signal Y, Z constant Maintains the position
position the position
No voltage at Y1 and Y2; Actuator’s spindle turns in
Actuator’s stem retracts Closing Opening
with fail safe function counterclockwise direction
Note Observe the information given in chapter 4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow
characteristic selection on page 26.

4.2.1 Positioning signal and flow characteristic selection
DIL switches Positioning signal Position

Flow characteristic
"Y" feedback "U"
log =
1)
OFF DC 0…10 V DC 0…10 V equal-
percentage
lin =
ON DC 4…20 mA DC 0…10 V
linear
1)
Factory setting: All DIL switches set to OFF
Flow characteristic
Valve & actuator & heat
Actuator Valve VVG44.. / VXG44.. Valve & actuator combined
exchanger combined
lin
Valve & actuator & heat

Actuator Valve VVG55.. / VVG549.. Valve & actuator combined
exchanger combined
log
Y, Z Positioning signal
H Stroke
V˙ Volumetric flow
Q˙ Heat transfer capacity

4.2.2 Position feedback U
The position feedback U (DC 0...10 V) is always proportional to stroke H of the
actuator’s stem.
Actuator Actuator
Positioning signal Y, Z Position feedback U
lin = linear
log = equal-
percentage
Actuator Actuator
Positioning signal Y, Z Position feedback U
Y, Z Positioning signal
H Stroke
U Position feedback
4.2.3 Calibration
To match the actuator to production-related mechanical tolerances of the individual

valves and to guarantee accurate positioning and position feedback, a calibration
should be performed when the plant is commissioned (page 20). During
commissioning, the actuator detects the valve’s end positions and files the exact
stroke in its internal memory.
Calibration takes place in the following phases:
· Actuator drives to the upper end position (1),

valve closes. Detection of upper end position.
· Actuator drives to the lower end position (2),
valve opens. Detection of lower end position.
· The detected values are stored (3). Then the
actuator follows the positioning signal.
Note Observe status indication (LED) during and after calibration (page 34).

4.2.4 Signal priorities
The actuators are controlled via different interlinked positioning signal paths
(positioning signal “Y“, forced control input “Z“, manual adjuster). The signal paths
are assigned the following priorities (1 = highest priority, 4 = lowest priority):
Actuator without Priority Description

fail safe function The manual adjuster always has priority 1, thus overriding all signals active at “Z“ or
1
“Y“, independent of whether or not power is applied.
Only SA..61..: As soon as a valid positioning signal is active at input “Z“, the position
2 is determined via positioning signal “Z“ (forced control). Z
Prerequisite: The manual adjuster is not used.
The position is determined via positioning signal “Y“ at Y, Y1 or Y2. The manual
3
adjuster is not used and on “Z“ there is no active signal. Y
Examples Manual Forced control Positioning

Stroke actuator Rotary actuator
adjuster (Z) signal (Y)
Automatic Actuator’s stem travels
Not connected 5V travels to position
mode to position (50%)
(50%)
Automatic Actuator’s spindle turns
G 3V Actuator’s stem extends
mode in clockwise direction
Automatic
G0 3V Actuator’s stem retracts in counterclockwise
mode
direction
Operated
Actuator’s stem extends manually in
(30%) and G 8V
manual (to 30%) counterclockwise
engaged
direction (to 30%)
Bold printing = positioning signal currently active
Actuator with fail safe Priority Description

function 1 The fail safe function responds in the event of a power failure.
The position is solely determined via positioning signal ”Z” (forced control),
2
provided power is applied. Z
The position is determined by positioning signal Y, provided power is applied
3
and positioning signal ”Z” is not used. Y
Upon actuation and slightly turning in counterclockwise direction, the manual
adjuster remains engaged.
Power applied:
After 5 seconds, the manual adjuster disengages itself and positioning signal
4 ”Y” or ”Z” determines the position.
No power applied:
The actuator maintains the position defined by the manual adjuster until power
returns. Upon restoration of power, an automatic ClosedPosition-
Synchronisation will be performed.
Examples Operating Manual Forced Positioning

Stroke actuator
voltage (G/G0) adjuster control (Z) signal (Y)
Automatic Actuator’s stem travels to
Applied Not connected 5V
mode position (50%)
Automatic
Applied G 3V Actuator’s stem extends
mode
Automatic
Applied G0 3V Actuator’s stem retracts
mode
Interrupted (fail Automatic Actuator’s stem retracts (until
G 6V
safe function) mode end position is reached)
Actuator’s stem retracts (until
Operated
Interrupted (fail end position is reached), then:
(30%)and G 8V
safe function) Actuator’s stem extends
engaged
manually (to 30%)
Bold printing = positioning signal currently active

4.2.5 Detection of valve seat
SAS.. The actuators feature force-dependent valve seat detection. After calibration, the
exact valve stroke is filed in the actuator’s memory.
If no force is built up in the calculated end position (e.g. in the event of temperature
effects for instance), the actuator continues to operate at a reduced positioning
speed until the nominal positioning force is restored. This ensures that the valve
always fully closes.
After a power failure, valve seat identification is not active – the actuators without
fail safe function define their stroke position on power resoration to be at 50%.
From now on, the actuator follows the positioning signal.
When the valve plug reaches its seat for the first time, the actuator readjusts its
stroke model.
Example The supposed position is 50%, Y = 2 V, the actuator travels 30% of the stored
valve stroke in the direction of "Actuator’s stem retracted".
If the actuator reaches the seat within this 30% travel, it interprets the position as
"Valve fully closed" and shifts the position of the valve’s stroke accordingly without
changing the extent of travel.
From now on, the actuator follows the changed valve stroke position.
This means: New position 0%, Y = 2 V, actuator travels 20% of the stored valve
stroke in the direction "Actuator’s stem extended".

4.2.6 Detection of foreign bodies
The actuator detects when the valve is clogged and adjusts its operational behavior
accordingly to prevent damage to itself or the valve.
If the actuator hits an obstacle within the calibrated stroke and is not able to
overcome it with its nominal positioning force, it stores the position at which the
obstacle was hit. Depending on the direction of travel, as …
"Upper limit of valve clogging", if the clogging was detected when

traveling in the direction of "Actuator’s stem extending".
Now, the status LED blinks red and the actuator only follows the positioning signal
between the positions "Actuator’s stem retracted" and "Lower limit of valve
clogging".
After detection of clogging, 3 attempts are made to overcome clogging by traveling
about 15% in the opposite direction and then trying again to overcome the position
of clogging. If the attempts made are unsuccessful, the actuator continues to follow
the positioning signal within the restricted range only and the LED continues to
blink red (see "Status indication " page 34).
4.2.7 Forced control Z
Forced control uses the following operating modes:
Z mode
Overriding
No function Fully open Fully closed positioning signal “Y“
by 0…1000 Ω
Connections
Transmission
Equal-percentage or Equal-percentage or
linear characteristic linear characteristic
Contact “Z“ is
Contact “Z“ is Contact “Z“ is connected to “M“ via
Contact “Z“ not
connected directly to connected directly to resistor “R“,
connected,
“G“, “G0“, starting point at 50 Ω,
valve follows
positiong signal ”Y” positiong signal ”Y” has end point at 900 Ω,
positioning signal ”Y”
has no impact no impact positioning signal ”Y”
has no impact

4.3 Technical and mechanical design
4.3.1 Transmission of power
Function principle Incoming positioning signals are translated to positioning commands for the motor.
A gear train transmits the motor’s positioning steps to the output stage. Here, the
translation from rotary to stroke movement takes place. Attached to the gear train
are the electrical and mechanical accessory items and the manual adjuster. With
the stroke actuators with fail safe function, the gear train also accommodates the
return spring.
In the case of the rotary actuators, the adjustment to the required torque is made in
the output stage.
Power transmission of stroke actuator:
1 Actuator stem
2 Contact point
actuator stem – valve stem
3 Valve stem
4 Valve spring
The transmission of power has no fix

connection.
If the actuator stem extends, it presses
on the valve stem and against the force
of the spring in the valve.
If the actuator stem retracts, the valve
stem follows the actuator stem due to
the force of the valve spring.
4.3.2 Coupling
SAS.., SAT..
Actuator stem and valve stem run into each

other. They are not permanently connected.

4.3.3 Fail safe function
The fail safe function works mechanically with a return spring and ensures the
protection of the plant. It guarantees the safe operation in uncontrolled operating
states.
In the event of a power failure, the actuator will return to its 0 % stroke position with
the help of the return spring, closing the valve. The Y positioning signal is not
valued.
Fail safe Spring return At positioning

Actuator Valve
function time time
1)
<8 s 15 s
Actuator’s stem Spring in valve 1)
Active Valve closes <14 s 30 s
retracts closes 1)
<28 s 120 s
1)
Spring return time increased slightly at low temperatures

4.3.4 Manual adjuster
Without fail safe function With fail safe function (SA..33..)

Automatic
When the motor drives the manual adjuster turns. Thus in automatic mode, the manual adjuster is
used for indication of travel. If the manual adjuster is held firm in this mode, there is no transmission
of power to the gear train.
Manual operation
When pushing the manual adjuster down (1), it engages and the actuator can be manually operated.
Stroke actuator: When turning the manual When turning the manual adjuster in clockwise
adjuster in clockwise / counterclockwise direction direction (2), the actuator’s stem extends.
(2), the actuator’s stem extends / retracts. CAUTION: Turning the manual adjuster in
Rotary actuator: The actuator spindle turns in counterclockwise direction is not possible.
the same direction
An overload protection prevents damage to the manual adjuster.
Fixing the position
Upon actuation and locking the slide switch, the After pushing and slightly turning the manual
manual adjuster remains engaged. adjuster in counterclockwise direction, it remains
When in this mode, do not turn the manual engaged, provided no power is applied.
adjuster (manual adjuster locked). If power is applied, refer to
"Disengaging the fixing".
Disengaging the fixing
When resetting the slide switch, the manual Coupling disengages automatically…
adjuster returns to automatic mode. · after 5 seconds if power is applied,
· when power returns; a restart is made
(actuator’s stem retracts), then, the actuator
follows the active positioning signal.
Coupling is disengaged manually by slightly

turning the manual adjuster in clockwise
direction.

4.3.5 Indicators
A Indication of travel
B Scale
Position indication
C Indicator
D LED Status indication
Operational status In Automatic mode, the manual adjuster serves for the indication of travel.
indication See "Automatic" (page 33).
Position indication When turning the manual adjuster, the indicator also moves.
The scale indicates the stroke. When reaching the stops, the valve is either fully
open or fully closed.
Status indication (LED), Housing cover fitted Housing cover removed

only with modulating
control (only SA..61..)
When the housing cover is fitted, the LED can be When the housing cover is removed, the
viewed through a light conductor. LED can be viewed through a hole.
The status indication informs about the operational state of the actuator.
LED Indication Operating state Remarks, troubleshooting

On Automatic mode Normal operation
Calibration Wait until calibration is finished
Green
Blinking (then green or red light)
In manual mode Manual adjuster in MAN position
Calibration error Start calibration again
On
Undervoltage (AC 13 V) Check operating voltage
Red
Clogged valve, detection of
Blinking Check valve / actuator
foreign bodies
Dark Dark No power or electronics faulty Check operating voltage

Auxiliary switch The auxiliary switch ASC10.51 switches on or off when a certain position is
ASC10.51 reached. The switching point can be set between 0…100%.
Adjustable switching point

Switching point for S1–S2 and S1–S3 cannot be set separately. If S1–S2 is open
then S1–S3 is closed.
Application example: When using an auxiliary switch, position feedback can trigger an automatic stop of
the circulating pump in the end position "Fully closed".
4.3.7 Mechanical accessories
Weather shield To protect the actuator from weather effects when used outdoors, the weather
ASK39.2 shield ASK39.2 must always be fitted. The housing protectionIP54 remains
unchanged.

5 Technical data
SAS.. SAT..
Power supply Operating voltage SA..31.. AC 230 V ± 15 %
SA..61.. AC 24 V ± 20 % / DC 24 V + 20 % / -15%
or AC 24 V class 2 (US)
SA..81.. AC/DC 24 V ± 20 %
or AC 24 V class 2 (US)
Frequency 45…65 Hz
External supply line protection (EU) 6 A...10 A slow or
Circuit breaker max. 13 A Characteristic B, C, D according to
EN 60898
Power source with current limitation of max. 10 A
Power consumption at 50 Hz Stem retracts / extends Stem retracts / extends
1) 1)
SAS31.00 SAT31.008 2.8 / 2.4 VA 5.0 / 2.5 VA
1) 1)
SAS31.03 SAT31.51 3.5 / 2.9 VA 5.5 / 3.2 VA
1) 1)
SAS31.50 SAT61.008 3.5 / 2.9 VA 7.1 / 4.6 VA
1) 1)
SAS31.53 SAT61.51 5.5 / 3.8 VA 6.4 / 4.8 VA
1)
SAS61.03 5.3 / 4.5 VA
1)
SAS61.03U 5.3 / 4.5 VA
1)
SAS61.33 5.9 / 4.8 VA
1)
SAS61.33U 5.9 / 4.8 VA
1)
SAS61.53 5.8 / 5.0 VA
1)
SAS81.00 2.2 / 2.0 VA
1)
SAS81.00U 2.2 / 2.0 VA
1)
SAS81.03 2.5 / 2.1 VA
1)
SAS81.03U 2.5 / 2.1 VA
1)
SAS81.33 3.4 / 2.4 VA
1)
SAS81.33U 3.4 / 2.4 VA
Function data Positioning times with the specified nominal
stroke / nominal angular rotation
SAS..0 SAT..008 120 s 8s
SAS..3/..3U SAT..51 30 s 15 s
Positioning force 400 N 300 N
Nominal stroke 5.5 mm 5.5 mm
Torque
Nominal angular rotation
Permissible medium temperature
1...130 °C 1…130 °C
(valve fitted)
briefly 150 °C
Signal inputs Y positioning signal
SAS31.. SAT31.008
3-position
SAS81.. SAT31.51
SAS61.. SAT61.008
DC 0...10 V / DC 4...20 mA / 0...1000 Ω
SAT61.51
SA..61.. (DC 0...10 V) Current draw ≤ 0.1 mA
Input impedance ≥ 100 kΩ
SA..61.. (DC 4...20 mA) Current draw DC 4...20 mA ± 1 %
Input impedance ≤ 500 Ω
Parallel operation SA..61.. ≤ 10 (depending on controler output)
Forced control Positioning signal Z SA..61.. R= 0…1000 Ω, G, G0
R = 0…1000 Ω Stroke / rotation proportional to R
Z connected to G Max. stroke 100 % Max. stroke 100 %
Z connected to G0 Min. stroke 0 % Min. stroke 0 %
Voltage Max. AC 24 V ± 20 % / Max. DC 24 V + 20 % / -15%
Current draw ≤ 0.1 mA
Position feedback U SA..61.. DC 0...10 V ± 1 %
Load impedance > 10 kΩ res.
Load Max. 1 mA
2 2)
Connecting cable Wire cross-sectional areas 0.75…1.5 mm , AWG 20…16

SAS.. SAT..
Cable entries SA.. EU: 1 entry Æ 16.4 mm (for M16)
1 entry Æ 20.5 mm (for M20)
SA..U US: 2 entries Æ 21.5 mm for ½“ tube connection
3)
Degree of protection Housing protection IP 54 as per EN 60529
Mounting position vertical
Insulation class As per EN 60730
Actuators SA..31.. AC 230 V II
Actuators SA..61.. AC / DC 24 V III
Actuators SA..81.. AC / DC 24 V III
Environmental Operation IEC 60721-3-3
conditions Climatic conditions Class 3K5
4)
Mounting location Indoors, outdoors
Temperature general -5…55 °C
Humidity (noncondensing) 5…95 % r. h.
Transport IEC 60721-3-2
Climatic conditions Class 2K3
Humidity <95 % r. h.
Storage IEC 60721-3-1
Humidity 5…95 % r. h.
Directives and Product standard EN60730-x
Standards Electromagnetic compatibility (Application) For residential, commercial and industrial environments
5)
EU Conformity (CE) CE1T4581xx
5)
RCM Conformity CE1T4581en_C1
UL, cUL AC / DC 24 V UL 873 http://ul.com/database
5)
Environmental The product environmental declaration CE1E4581 contains
compatibility data on environmentally compatible product design and
assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition,
Dimensions See Dimensions (page 42)
Weight Excl. packaging See Dimensions (page 42)
6)
Accessories Auxiliary switch
Switching capacity AC 24…230 V, 6 (2) A, floating
ASC10.51
External supply line protection See section power supply
US installation, UL & cUL AC 24 V class 2, 5 A general purpose
Data sheet N4581 N4584
1)
Second value: Power consumption in neutral position
2)
AWG = American wire gauge
Wire cross-sectional areas and fuses have to be well-matching, which is the responsibility of the
planner / installer. Observe norm of protection measures - protection against overcurrent:
IEC 60364-4-43:2008 resp. german adoption HD 60364-4-43:2010.
3)
Also with weather shield ASK39.2
4)
Outdoors always with weather shield ASK39.2, housing protection IP54 remains unchanged
5)
The documents can be downloaded from http://siemens.com/bt/download
6)
UL recognized component

6 Connection diagrams and
dimensions
6.1 Internal diagrams
SA..31.. SA..31.5.. Accessory plug-in space A

1x ASC10.51
ASC10.51
SA..61.. Accessory plug-in space A

1x ASC10.51
ASC10.51
SAS81.. SAS81.33, SAS81.33U Accessory plug-in space A

1x ASC10.51
ASC10.51
SAT31.008 Accessory plug-in space A

6.2 Connection terminals
6.2.1 Actuators
SA..31.. AC 230 V, 3-position

(without SAT31.008) System neutral (SN)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem extends / actuator’s spindle turns clockwise)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem retracts / actuator’s spindle turns counter-clockwise)
SA..31.5.. AC 230 V, 3-position

System neutral (SN)
Fail safe function
SA..61.. AC/DC 24 V, DC 0…10 V / 4…20 mA / 0…1000 Ω

Sytem neutral (SN)
System potential (SP)
Positioning signal for DC 0…10 V / 4…20 mA
Measuring neutral
Position feedback DC 0...10 V
Positioning signal forced control AC/DC ≤ 24 V, 0...1000 Ω
SA..81.. AC/DC 24 V, 3-position

SAS81.33U AC/DC 24 V, 3-position

System neutral (SN)
SAT31.008 AC 230 V, 3-position

System neutral (SN)

Auxiliary switch Adjustable switching points, AC 24…230 V

ASC10.51 System potential (SP)
Closing (actuator’s stem extends / actuator’s spindle turns clockwise)
Opening (actuator’s stem extends / actuator’s spindle turns clockwise)
6.2.3 Cable labeling

The wires are color coded and labeled.
Cable
Connection Description
Code No. Color Abbreviation
Actuators AC 230V N 4 blue BU System neutral
Y1 6 black BK Positioning signal
Y2 7 white WH Positioning signal
L - System potential
21 - Fail safe function
Actuators AC 24 V G 1 red RD System potential
resp. AC/DC 24 V G0 2 black BK System neutral
Y1 6 violet VT Positioning signal
Y2 7 orange OG Positioning signal
Y 8 grey GY Positioning signal
M - - Measuring neutral
U 9 pink PK Position feedback
Z - - Positioning signal forced control

6.3 Connection diagrams
SA..31.. SA..31.. SA..31.5..
A Actuator
L Phase
N Neutral
N1 Controller
Y1, Y2 Positioning signals
21 System potential
SA..61..
SA..61..
SAS61.33
SAS61.33U
SAS61.53
A Actuator
F1 Temperature limiter
F2 Frost protection thermostat; terminals:
1 – 2 frost hazard / sensor is interrupted (thermostat closes with frost)
1 – 3 normal operation
F3 Temperature detector
F4 Frost protection monitor with 0…1000 Ω signal output,
does NOT support QAF21.. or QAF61..
M Measuring neutral
N1 Controller
SN System neutral
SP System potential AC/DC 24 V
U Position feedback
Y Positioning signal
Z Positioning signal forced control
SA..81.. SA..81.. SAS81.33, SAS81.33U
A Actuator
F1 Temperature limiter
N1 Controller
SN System neutral
SP System potential AC/DC 24 V
Y1, Y2 Positioning signals

6.4 Dimensions
6.4.1 Stroke actuators
Dimensions in mm, weights in kg
With manual adjuster
1 SA..: M16
SA..U: ½" (Ø 21.5 mm)
2 SA..: M20
SA..U: ½" (Ø 21.5 mm)
Product no. A B C C1 C2 D E ► ►►
SAS.. / SAT.. 151 80 93 21.9 71.1 29.9 21.8 100 200 0.40
With ASK39.2 155 126 248 99 149 29.9 21.8 100 200 0.55

Without manual
adjuster
1 SA..: M16
2 SA..: M20
Product no. A B C C1 C2 D E ► ►►
1)
SAT.. / SAT.. 137.6
2)
80 106.5 21.9 84.6 29.9 21.8 100 200 0.68
151
With ASK39.2 155 126 248 99 149 29.9 21.8 100 200 0.83
1)
Black cover
2)
Blue manual adjuster

Revision numbers
Valid from Valid from Valid from
Product no. Product no. Product no.
rev. no. rev. no. rev. no.
SAS31.00 ..A SAT31.008 ..A
SAS31.03 ..A SAT31.51 ..A
SAS31.50 ..A SAT61.008 ..A
SAS31.53 ..A SAT61.51 ..A
SAS61.03 ..A
SAS61.03U ..A
SAS61.33 ..A
SAS61.33U ..A
SAS61.53 ..A
SAS81.00 ..A
SAS81.00U ..A
SAS81.03 ..A
SAS81.03U ..A
SAS81.33 ..A
SAS81.33U ..A

7 Glossary
7.1 Symbols
Caution, general danger – read the notes!
Caution, hot surface – read the notes!
Condition as supplied to costumer
Crosstip screwdriver (Pozidriv)
Slotted screwdriver
Screw wrench
Allen key
7.2 Terms
ClosedPosition- The Synchronisation of the mechanical position and the internal position control will
Synchronisation be performed (after manual operation).
DIL switches A DIL switch shows the switching choices in the form of a place value system (dual
in line) in relation to basis 2 (on and off).
DN Nominal size [mm]: Characteristic for matching parts of the piping system.
Fail safe function The fail safe function ensures that the actuator is driven to a defined end position
also in the event of a power failure. In normal situations, dampers are shut or
valves closed, thus cutting off the medium flow.
kPa Unit of pressure: 100 kPa = 1 bar = 10 mWS.
kvs Nominal flow rate: Nominal flow rate of cold water (5…30 °C) through the fully
open valve (H100) at a differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar).
LED Light emitting diode.
Idle stroke The actuator stem lifts off the valve stem slightly (0.2 mm), so that the valve closed
securely. If the valve opens again, this idle stroke has to be overcome, before the
valve really opens (valve characteristic has an effect).
PN PN class [bar]: Characteristic relating to the combination of mechanical und

dimensional properties of a component in the piping system.
Position feedback Signal used to acquire the position, fed back via an input.
Forced control Forced control serves for overriding automatic mode and is implemented in the
structure.

Δpmax / ΔpmaxV Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve's control path, valid for
the entire actuating range of the motorized valve (V = diverting mode).
Δps Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve will close
securely against the pressure (close off pressure).

Check valve (clapet)

Flow regulation valve

Double regulating and commissioning valves “Hydrocontrol VFC” cast iron, PN 16
“Hydrocontrol VFR” bronze, PN 16
“Hydrocontrol VFN” nodular cast iron, PN 25
Technical Information
Application:
Oventrop double regulating and commissioning valves
“Hydrocontrol VFC/VFR/VFN” are installed in the pipework of hot
water central heating systems and cooling systems and serve to
achieve a hydronic balance between the various circuits of the
system.
The bronze double regulating and commissioning valves
“Hydrocontrol VFR” may also be used for cold salt water (38 °C
max.) and domestic water.
The double regulating and commissioning valves may be installed
in either the supply or the return pipe.
When installing the valves, it is to be observed that the direction
of flow conforms to the arrow on the valve body and the valve is
installed with a minimum of L = 3 x 쏗 (3 x nominal pipe diameter)
of straight pipe at the valve inlet and of L = 2 x 쏗 (2 x nominal pipe
diameter) of straight pipe at the valve outlet.
Advantages:
– the location of the functioning components on one level allows
a simple assembly and easy operation
– only one valve for 5 functions:
presetting
measuring “Hydrocontrol VFC”
isolating
filling (with accessory)
draining (with accessory)
– low pressure loss (oblique pattern)
– infinitely adjustable presetting which can be read off in any
position due to the moveable display, exact measurement of
pressure loss and flow by using the pressure test points
– fill and drain ball valve with internal stop and pressure test point
with O-ring seal between valve body and test point (no
additional seals required)
– patented measuring channel led around the stem assembly to
the test points ensures the best possible accuracy between the
differential pressure measured at the pressure test point and
the actual differential pressure of the valve
Function:
The balance is achieved by a presetting with memory position.
The calculated flow rate or pressure loss for each individual pipe
can be preset centrally and be regulated precisely.
The required values of presetting can be obtained from the flow
charts. All intermediate values are infinitely adjustable.
The selected presetting can be read off two scales (basic setting
longitudinal scale and fine setting peripheral scale, see illustration “Hydrocontrol VFR”
presetting).
The presetting is reproducible by opening the valve until stop.
The flow charts are valid for the installation of the double regulating
and commissioning valve in the supply or the return pipe provided 5D
the direction of flow conforms to the arrow on the valve body.
The Oventrop double regulating and commissioning valves have
two threaded ports which are equipped with the pressure test
points for measuring the differential pressure. Pump 10D
Installation, transport and storage:
- Protect against external forces (e.g. impacts, vibrations etc.)
- External components such as handwheels, pressure test points,
actuators must not be misused for the absorption of external 5D 3D
forces, e.g. as connection point for lever tools etc.
- Suitabele means of transport and hoisting devices have be
used.
- Storage temperature -20 °C up to +60 °C 10D 2D
5D 3D
Installation advice

“Hydrocontrol VFR” bronze, PN 16, “Hydrocontrol VFN” nodular cast iron, PN 25
Double regulating and commissioning valves

DN 20 – DN 50
Measuring technic “classic” d1
Tender specification:
Oventrop double regulating and commissioning valves with secured
infinitely adjustable presetting controllable at any time with the help
of the flow limiting device.
H
Lengths according to DIN EN 558-1 basic series 1
(corresponds to ISO 5752 series 1)
All functioning components on one level, pressure test point and
DN
fill and drain ball valve interchangeable.
D
K
“Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFR”
PN 16 PN 6 ANSI 150 PN 16
Size Item no. Item no. Item no. Item no.
DN 20 1062646 1062676 1062946 L nxØd
DN 25 1062647 1062677 1062947

DN 32 1062648 1062678 1062948
DN 40 1062649 1062679 1062949 “Hydrocontrol VFC/VFR”
DN 50 1062650 1062680 1062950 1062350 PN 16
“Hydrocontrol VFC”
PN 16, -10°C to +150°C, PN 20 for cold water DN L H d1 D K n x Ød
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 16 20 150 118 70 105 175 4 x 14
(corresponds to ISO 7005-2, PN 16)
PN 6, -10°C to +150 °C 25 160 118 70 115 185 4 x 14
ANSI 150, -10°C to +150 °C 40 200 136 70 150 110 4 x 19
Hole circle of the flanged connection according to ANSI 150 50 230 145 70 165 125 4 x 19
Valve body made of cast iron (GG 25 EN-GJL-250 according to
DIN EN 1561), bonnet, stem and disc made of bronze/dezincifica- “Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFC”
tion resistant brass. Disc with PTFE seal. Maintenance-free stem
seal due to double EPDM O-ring. PN 6 ANSI 150
With type approval certificate for shipbuilding (PN 16 and ANSI 150). DN D K n x Ød D K n x Ød
“Hydrocontrol VFR” 20 90 65 4 x 11 99 70 4 x 16
PN 16, -20°C to +150°C, PN 20 for cold water
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 16 25 100 75 4 x 11 108 79 4 x 16
32 120 90 4 x 14 118 89 4 x 16
Valve body, bonnet and disc made of bronze, stainless steel stem,
disc with PTFE seal. Maintenance-free stem seal due to double 40 130 100 4 x 14 127 98 4 x 16
EPDM O-ring.
With type approval certificate for shipbuilding. 50 140 110 4 x 14 153 121 4 x 19
Dimensions
Presetting DN 20 – DN 50:
1. The value of presetting of the valve is adjusted by turning the
handwheel.
a. The display of the basic setting is shown by the Handwheel 3 mm Allen key
longitudinal scale together with the sliding indicator.
Each turn of the handwheel is represented by a line on
the longitudinal scale.
b. The display of the fine setting is shown by the
peripheral scale on the handwheel together with the
marking. The subdivisions of the peripheral scale
correspond to 1/10th of a turn of the handwheel.
2. The set value of presetting can be limited by turning the
inner adjustment stem clockwise until it seats. This can be
done by using the long end of a 3 mm Allen key.
Visibility/readability of the setting scales:
Depending on the installation position of the double regulating
and commissioning valve, an improvement of the visibility/read-
ability of the setting scales is obtained by twisting the scales. With
Sliding Marking Handwheel Screw
the valve fully closed and the two setting scales on “0”, remove
indicator
cover plug, undo screw and with a light tug pull the handwheel
from the valve stem.
Next, without altering the presetting (still indicating “0”), adjust the
position of the handwheel so that the indicator window is clearly
visible. Finally refit the handwheel to the valve stem, tighten the
screw and replace the cover plug.
Protecting the presetting:
The sealing wire (accessory) may be fitted through the hole in the
Hole for
handwheel and a lead seal may be fitted. sealing wire
Locking the handwheel:
Fine setting
The handwheel can be locked in any position (1/10th of a turn). To (peripheral scale) Cover plug
do so, the existing cover plug is replaced by the cover plug of the
Basic setting scale
locking set (accessory). (longitudinal scale)
In addition, the locked handwheel can be secured by use of the
sealing wire.


DN 65 – DN 150
Measuring technic “classic” d1
Oventrop double regulating and commissioning valves with secured,
infinitely adjustable presetting controllable at any time with the
help of the flow limiting device.
H
DN
K
D
“Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydro- “Hydro-
control VFR” control VFN”
Size PN 16 PN 6 ANSI 150 PN 16 PN 25
Item no. Item no. Item no. Item no. Item no. L nxØd
DN 165 1062651 1062681 1062951 1062351 1062451

DN 180 1062652 1062682 1062952 1062352 1062452
DN 100 1062653 1062683 1062953 1062353 1062453 “Hydrocontrol VFC/ “Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFC”
DN 125 1062654 1062684 1062954 1062354 1062454 VFR/VFN”
DN 150 1062655 1062685 1062955 1062355 1062455 PN 16 PN 6
“Hydrocontrol VFC” DN L H d1 D K n x Ød D K n x Ød
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 16 65 290 188 110 185 145 4 x 19 160 130 4 x 14
(corresponds to ISO 7005-2, PN 16) 80 310 203 110 200 160 8 x 19 190 150 4 x 19
PN 6, -10°C to +150 °C
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 6 100 350 240 160 220 180 8 x 19 210 170 4 x 19
125 400 283 160 250 210 8 x 19 240 200 8 x 19
ANSI 150, -10°C to +150 °C
Hole circle of the flanged connection according to ANSI 150 150 480 285 160 285 240 8 x 23 265 225 8 x 19
Valve body made of cast iron (GG 25 EN-GJL-250 according to
DIN EN 1561), bonnet, stem and disc made of bronze/dezincifica- “Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFR” “Hydrocontrol VFN”
tion resistant brass. Disc with PTFE seal. Maintenance-free stem
seal due to double EPDM O-ring. ANSI 150 PN 16 PN 25
“Hydrocontrol VFR” DN D K n x Ød D K n x Ød D K n x Ød
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 16 65 185 140 4 x 19 185 145 4 x 19 185 145 8 x 19
Valve body, bonnet and disc made of bronze, stainless steel stem, 80 200 152 4 x 19 200 160 8 x 19 200 160 8 x 19
disc with PTFE seal. Maintenance-free stem seal due to double 100 220 191 8 x 19 220 180 8 x 19 235 190 8 x 23
EPDM O-ring.
125 250 216 8 x 22 250 210 8 x 19 270 220 8 x 28
“Hydrocontrol VFN”
PN 25, -20°C to +150°C 150 285 241 8 x 22 285 240 8 x 23 300 250 8 x 28
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 25
(corresponds to ISO 7005-2, PN 25) Dimensions
Valve body made of nodular cast iron (GGG 50 EN-GJS-500-7
according to DIN EN 1563), bronze bonnet and disc, stem made Hole for sealing wire
of dezincification resistant brass. Disc with PTFE seal.
Maintenance-free stem seal due to double EPDM O-ring. Cover plug
Screw
handwheel.
Hole for sealing wire
a. The display of the basic setting is shown by the longitudinal
scale together with the sliding indicator.
Each turn of the handwheel is represented by a line on the
longitudinal scale. Handwheel
b. The display of the fine setting is shown by the peripheral
scale on the handwheel together with the marking.
The subdivisions of the peripheral scale correspond to 1/10th Fine setting scale
of a turn of the handwheel. (peripheral scale)
2. The set value of presetting can be limited by turning the inner
Marking
adjustment stem clockwise until it seats. This can be done by
using the long end of a 4 mm Allen key. Basic setting scale
(longitudinal scale)
Visibility/readability of the setting scales: Sliding indicator
Depending on the installation position of the double regulating
and commissioning valve, an improvement of the visibility/read-
ability of the setting scales is obtained by twisting the scales. With
the valve fully closed and the two setting scales on “0”, remove Lead seal
cover plug, undo screw and with a light tug pull the handwheel
from the valve stem.
Next, without altering the presetting (still indicating “0”), adjust the
position of the handwheel so that the indicator window is clearly
visible. Finally refit the handwheel to the valve stem, tighten the
screw and replace the cover plug.
Protecting the setting:
A sealing wire may be fitted through the hole in the handwheel
and a lead seal may be fitted.
The handwheel can be locked in any position (1/10th of a turn). Fit
the enclosed clip in the cut-out in the handwheel below the holes Clip
between the guides, making sure it locates into the sliding indicator Guide
(see sketch). The clip can now be sealed as illustrated. It is essential
that the sealing wire is fitted tightly.


DN 200 – DN 400
Measuring technic “classic”
d1
Oventrop double regulating and commissioning valves with secured,
infinitely adjustable presetting controllable at any time with the
help of the flow limiting device.
H
DN
K
D
“Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydro- “Hydro-

control VFR” control VFN” L nxØd
Size PN 16 PN 6 ANSI 150 PN 16 PN 25

Item no. Item no. Item no. Item no. Item no.
DN 200 1062656 1062686 1062956 1062356 1062456 “Hydrocontrol VFC/ “Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFC”
DN 250 1062657 1062957 1062457 VFR/VFN” PN 16 PN 6
DN 300 1062658 1062958 1062458
DN 350 1062659 1062959 DN L H d1 D K n x Ød D K n x Ød
DN 400 1062660
200 600 467 300 340 295 12 x 23 320 280 8 x 19
“Hydrocontrol VFC”
PN 16, -10°C to +150°C, PN 20 for cold water 250 730 480 300 405 355 12 x 28
PN 6, -10°C to +150°C 350 980 560 300 520 470 16 x 28
ANSI 150, -10°C to +150°C “Hydrocontrol VFC” “Hydrocontrol VFR” “Hydrocontrol VFN”
Hole circle of the flanged connection according to ANSI 150
ANSI 150 PN 16 PN 25
Valve body (DN 200-DN 300 made of cast iron GG 25, EN-GJL-
250 according to DIN EN 1561; DN 350 and DN 400 made of DN D K n x Ød D K n x Ød D K n x Ød
nodular cast iron GGG 50, EN-GJS-500-7 according to DIN EN
200 340 298 8 x 22 340 295 12 x 23 360 310 12 x 28
1563), bonnet (DN 200-DN 300 made of nodular cast iron
GGG 40, EN-GJS-400-15 according to DIN EN 1563; DN 350 and 250 405 362 12 x 25 425 370 12 x 31
DN 400 made of nodular cast iron GGG 50, EN-GJS-500-7
according to DIN EN 1563), bronze disc, stem made of 300 485 432 12 x 25 485 430 16 x 31
dezincification resistant brass. Disc with PTFE or EPDM seal. 350 535 476 12 x 28
Maintenance-free stem seal due to double EPDM O-ring.
Dimensions
“Hydrocontrol VFR”
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 16 Display
(corresponds to ISO 7005-2, PN 16) complete turns
Valve body, bonnet and disc made of bronze, stainless steel stem.
Disc with PTFE seal. Maintenance-free stem seal due to double Display
EPDM O-ring. 1/10th of a turn Cover plug
With type approval certificate for shipbuilding.
“Hydrocontrol VFN” Handwheel
PN 25, -20°C to +150°C
Round flanges according to DIN EN 1092-2, PN 25
Valve body made of nodular cast iron (GGG 50/EN-GJS-500-7
according to DIN EN 1563), bonnet made of nodular cast iron
(GGG 40/EN-GJS-400-15 according to DIN EN 1563). Bronze
disc, stem made of dezincification resistant brass. Disc with PTFE
seal. Maintenance-free stem seal due to double EPDM O-ring.
handwheel.
a. The complete turns of the handwheel are shown by the outer
display.
b. 1/10th of a turn of the handwheel is shown by the outer dis-
play.
2. Remove cover plug by introducing a screwdriver in the slot and
gently prising it off.
3. The set value of presetting can be limited by turning the inner
adjustment stem clockwise until it seats. This can be done by Lead seal
using a 10 mm screwdriver.
4. Refit the cover plug.
Protecting the setting:
A sealing wire may be fitted through the hole in the handwheel
and a lead seal may be fitted.
The handwheel can be locked in any position (1/10th of a turn) by
removing the existing cover plug and replacing it with a special
one. The sealing wire is then fitted through the hole in the hand-
wheel and a lead seal is fitted.

DN 20
Pre- Pre-
kv-values Zeta-values kv-values Zeta-values
setting setting
Presetting
Pressure loss ∆p [mbar]
Pressure loss ∆p [kPa]
Flow rate qm [l/s]
* Avoid presetting < 1, see tolerance curve page 7.
Zeta values related to the inner pipe diameter according to DIN EN 10 220 (21 mm)
DN 25
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting
Flow rate qm [l/s]
Zeta values related to the inner pipe diameter according to DIN EN 10 220 (24.8 mm)

DN 32
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
DN 40
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting
Flow rate qm [l/s]

DN 50
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
Tolerance [± %)
Presetting
- - - - - - - - Avoid presetting < 1
Flow tolerances depending on the presetting for DN 20 – DN 50

DN 65 Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
DN 80
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting
Flow rate qm [l/s]

DN 100
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
DN 125
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting
Flow rate qm [l/s]

DN 150
Pre- Pre-
setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
20
Tolerance [±%]
15
10
15
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Presetting
Flow tolerances depending on the presetting for DN 65 - DN 150

DN 200 Pre- Pre-

setting setting
Presetting

Flow rate qm [l/s]
DN 250 Pre- Pre-

setting setting
2.0 70.0 1318 7.0 682.0 14

Presetting 2.1 72.5 1229 7.1 698.0 13
2.2 75.5 1133 7.2 714.0 13
2.3 79.0 1035 7.3 729.0 12

2.4 82.0 961 7.4 745.0 12

2.5 85.0 894 7.5 760.0 11
2.6 89.5 806 7.6 778.0 11
2.7 94.0 731 7.7 795.0 10
2.8 99.0 659 7.8 811.0 10
2.9 104.5 592 7.9 826.0 10
3.0 110.0 534 8.0 840.0 9
3.1 117.0 472 8.1 850.0 9
3.2 123.5 424 8.2 860.0 9
3.3 130.5 379 8.3 870.0 8
3.4 139.0 334 8.4 880.0 8
3.5 150.0 287 8.5 890.0 8
3.6 155.0 269 8.6 899.0 8
3.7 164.0 240 8.7 907.0 8
3.8 174.0 213 8.8 916.0 8
3.9 184.0 191 8.9 925.0 8
4.0 195.0 170 9.0 933.0 7
4.1 208.0 149 9.1 942.0 7
4.2 221.0 132 9.2 952.0 7
4.3 236.0 116 9.3 961.0 7
4.4 252.0 102 9.4 970.0 7
4.5 270.0 89 9.5 980.0 7
4.6 287.0 78 9.6 989.0 7
4.7 304.0 70 9.7 998.0 6
4.8 321.0 63 9.8 1008.0 6
4.9 338.0 57 9.9 1018.0 6
5.0 356.0 51 10.0 1028.0 6
5.1 373.0 46 10.1 1038.0 6
5.2 390.0 42 10.2 1048.0 6
5.3 407.0 39 10.3 1059.0 6
5.4 423.0 36 10.4 1071.0 6
5.5 440.0 33 10.5 1080.0 6
5.6 457.0 31 10.6 1088.0 5
5.7 473.0 29 10.7 1096.0 5
5.8 490.0 27 10.8 1104.0 5
5.9 506.0 25 10.9 1112.0 5
6.0 522.0 24 11.0 1120.0 5
6.1 539.0 22 11.1 1128.0 5
6.2 555.0 21 11.2 1136.0 5
6.3 571.0 20 11.3 1144.0 5
Flow rate qm [l/s] 6.4 587.0 19 11.4 1152.0 5
6.5 607.0 18 11.5 1160.0 5
6.6 619.0 17 11.6 1168.0 5
6.7 635.0 16 11.7 1176.0 5
6.8 651.0 15 11.8 1184.0 5
Zeta values related to the inner pipe diameter according to DIN EN 10 220 (254.4 mm) 6.9 666.0 15 11.9 1192.0 4
12 0 1200 0 4

DN 300 Pre- Pre-

setting setting
2.0 200.0 325 7.0 990.0 13

2.1 210.0 295 7.1 1005.0 13
Presetting 2.2 220.0 269 7.2 1020.0 12
2.3 230.0 246 7.3 1036.0 12
2.4 240.0 226 7.4 1053.0 12

2.5 250.0 208 7.5 1070.0 11

2.6 261.0 191 7.6 1084.0 11
2.7 273.0 174 7.7 1098.0 11
2.8 285.0 160 7.8 1112.0 11
2.9 297.0 147 7.9 1126.0 10
3.0 310.0 135 8.0 1140.0 10
3.1 323.0 125 8.1 1154.0 10
3.2 336.0 115 8.2 1168.0 10
3.3 350.0 106 8.3 1182.0 9
3.4 365.0 98 8.4 1196.0 9
3.5 380.0 90 8.5 1210.0 9
3.6 401.0 81 8.6 1228.0 9
3.7 421.0 73 8.7 1245.0 8
3.8 441.0 67 8.8 1261.0 8
3.9 461.0 61 8.9 1276.0 8
4.0 480.0 56 9.0 1290.0 8
4.1 499.0 52 9.1 1303.0 8
4.2 517.0 49 9.2 1316.0 8
4.3 535.0 45 9.3 1328.0 7
4.4 553.0 43 9.4 1339.0 7
4.5 570.0 40 9.5 1350.0 7
4.6 588.0 38 9.6 1365.0 7
4.7 606.0 35 9.7 1379.0 7
4.8 624.0 33 9.8 1393.0 7
4.9 642.0 32 9.9 1407.0 7
5.0 660.0 30 10.0 1420.0 6
5.1 678.0 28 10.1 1433.0 6
5.2 696.0 27 10.2 1446.0 6
5.3 714.0 26 10.3 1457.0 6
5.4 732.0 24 10.4 1468.0 6
5.5 750.0 23 10.5 1480.0 6
5.6 771.0 22 10.6 1490.0 6
5.7 791.0 21 10.7 1500.0 6
5.8 810.0 20 10.8 1510.0 6
5.9 828.0 19 10.9 1520.0 6
6.0 845.0 18 11.0 1530.0 6
6.1 861.0 18 11.1 1539.0 5
6.2 877.0 17 11.2 1547.0 5
6.3 892.0 16 11.3 1555.0 5
6.4 906.0 16 11.4 1563.0 5
6.5 920.0 15 11.5 1570.0 5
Flow rate qm [l/s] 6.6 933.0 15 11.6 1577.0 5
6.7 947.0 14 11.7 1583.0 5
6.8 961.0 14 11.8 1589.0 5
6.9 975.0 14 11.9 1595.0 5
12.0 1600.0 5
Tolerance [±%]
Presetting
Flow tolerances depending on the presetting for DN 200 - DN 300

DN 350 Pre- Pre-

setting kv-values Zeta-values setting kv-values Zeta-values
3.0 290 275

3.1 299 259 11.1 1571 9
3.2 308 244 11.2 1582 9
Presetting 3.3 318 229 11.3 1593 9
3.4 328 215 11.4 1604 9

3.5 340 200 11.5 1615 9
3.6 350 189 11.6 1626 9

3.7 361 178 11.7 1637 9
3.8 374 165 11.8 1648 9
3.9 387 155 11.9 1659 8
4.0 400 145 12.0 1670 8
4.1 414 135 12.1 1682 8
4.2 429 126 12.2 1694 8
4.3 445 117 12.3 1706 8
4.4 462 108 12.4 1718 8
4.5 480 100 12.5 1730 8
4.6 499 93 12.6 1742 8
4.7 518 86 12.7 1754 8
4.8 537 80 12.8 1766 7
4.9 556 75 12.9 1778 7
5.0 575 70 13.0 1790 7
5.1 588 67 13.1 1802 7
5.2 615 61 13.2 1814 7
5.3 635 57 13.3 1826 7
5.4 655 54 13.4 1838 7
5.5 675 51 13.5 1850 7
5.6 696 48 13.6 1862 7
5.7 716 45 13.7 1874 7
5.8 737 43 13.8 1886 7
5.9 758 40 13.9 1898 6
6.0 800 36 14.0 1910 6
6.1 818 35 14.1 1920 6
6.2 836 33 14.2 1930 6
6.3 854 33 14.3 1940 6
6.4 872 30 14.4 1950 6
6.5 890 29 14.5 1960 6
6.6 912 28 14.6 1970 6
6.7 934 27 14.7 1980 6
6.8 956 25 14.8 1990 6
6.9 978 24 14.9 2000 6
7.0 1000 23 15.0 2010 6
7.1 1018 22 15.1 2019 6
7.2 1036 22 15.2 2028 6
7.3 1054 21 15.3 2037 6
7.4 1072 20 15.4 2046 6
7.5 1090 19 15.5 2055 5
7.6 1108 19 15.6 2064 5
7.7 1126 18 15.7 2073 5
7.8 1144 18 15.8 2082 5
7.9 1162 17 15.9 2091 5
8.0 1180 17 16.0 2100 5
8.1 1192 16 16.1 2108 5
8.2 1204 16 16.2 2116 5
Flow rate qm [l/s] 8.3 1216 16 16.3 2124 5
8.4 1228 15 16.4 2132 5
8.5 1240 15 16.5 2140 5
8.6 1252 15 16.6 2148 5
8.7 1264 14 16.7 2156 5
8.8 1276 14 16.8 2164 5
8.9 1288 14 16.9 2172 5
9.0 1300 14 17.0 2180 5
9.1 1312 13 17.1 2187 5
9.2 1324 13 17.2 2194 5
9.3 1336 13 17.3 2201 5
9.4 1348 13 17.4 2208 5
9.5 1360 13 17.5 2215 5
9.6 1372 12 17.6 2222 5
9.7 1384 12 17.7 2229 5
9.8 1396 12 17.8 2236 5
9.9 1408 12 17.9 2243 5
10.0 1420 11 18.0 2250 5
10.1 1434 11
10.2 1448 11
10.3 1462 11
10.4 1476 11
10.5 1490 10
10.6 1504 10
10.7 1518 10
10.8 1532 10
10.9 1546 10
11.0 1560 10

DN 400 Pre- Pre-

setting setting
3.0 338 308 14.1 2729 5

3.1 352 284 14.2 2746 5
Presetting 3.2
3.3
365
379
265
245
14.3
14.4
2762
2779
5
5
3.4 392 229 14.5 2796 5
Pressure loss ∆p [Pascal]

3.5 406 214 14.6 2813 4

3.6 420 200 14.7 2830 4
3.7 433 188 14.8 2846 4
3.8 447 176 14.9 2863 4
3.9 460 167 15.0 2880 4
4.0 474 157 15.1 2891 4
4.1 497 143 15.2 2901 4
4.2 520 130 15.3 2912 4
4.3 544 119 15.4 2922 4
4.4 567 110 15.5 2933 4
4.5 590 101 15.6 2944 4
4.6 611 94 15.7 2954 4
4.7 632 88 15.8 2965 4
4.8 653 83 15.9 2975 4
4.9 674 78 16.0 2986 4
5.0 695 73 16.1 2999 4
5.1 720 68 16.2 3012 4
5.2 745 63 16.3 3025 4
5.3 770 59 16.4 3038 4
5.4 795 56 16.5 3051 4
5.5 820 52 16.6 3064 4
5.6 845 49 16.7 3076 4
5.7 870 47 16.8 3089 4
5.8 895 44 16.9 3102 4
5.9 920 42 17.0 3115 4
6.0 945 39 17.1 3126 4
6.1 972 37 17.2 3137 4
6.2 998 35 17.3 3148 4
6.3 1025 34 17.4 3159 4
6.4 1051 32 17.5 3170 4
6.5 1078 30 17.6 3182 3
6.6 1104 29 17.7 3193 3
6.7 1131 28 17.8 3204 3
6.8 1157 26 17.9 3215 3
6.9 1184 25 18.0 3226 3
7.0 1210 24 18.1 3235 3
7.1 1235 23 18.2 3245 3
7.2 1261 22 18.3 3254 3
Flow rate qm [l/s] 7.3 1286 21 18.4 3264 3
7.4 1312 20 18.5 3273 3
7.5 1337 20 18.6 3282 3
7.6 1362 19 18.7 3292 3
7.7 1387 18 18.8 3301 3
7.8 1413 18 18.9 3311 3
7.9 1438 17 19.0 3320 3
8.0 1463 16 19.1 3329 3
8.1 1489 16 19.2 3338 3
8.2 1515 15 19.3 3347 3
8.3 1540 15 19.4 3356 3
8.4 1566 14 19.5 3365 3
8.5 1592 14 19.6 3374 3
8.6 1617 13 19.7 3383 3
8.7 1645 13 19.8 3392 3
8.8 1672 13 19.9 3401 3
8.9 1698 12 20.0 3410 3
9.0 1725 12 20.1 3418 3
9.1 1746 12 20.2 3426 3
9.2 1767 11 20.3 3434 3
9.3 1788 11 20.4 3442 3
9.4 1809 11 20.5 3450 3
9.5 1830 11 20.6 3458 3
9.6 1852 10 20.7 3466 3
9.7 1873 10 20.8 3474 3
9.8 1894 10 20.9 3482 3
9.9 1915 10 21.0 3490 3
10.0 1936 9 21.1 3500 3
10.1 1954 9 21.2 3510 3
10.2 1972 9 21.3 3520 3
10.3 1990 9 21.4 3530 3
10.4 2008 9 21.5 3540 3
10.5 2026 9 21.6 3550 3
10.6 2044 8 21.7 3560 3
10.7 2062 8 21.8 3570 3
10.8 2080 8 21.9 3580 3
10.9 2098 8 22.0 3590 3
11.0 2116 8 22.1 3599 3
11.1 2137 8 22.2 3608 3
11.2 2158 8 22.3 3617 3
11.3 2180 7 22.4 3626 3
11.4 2201 7 22.5 3635 3
11.5 2222 7 22.6 3644 3
11.6 2243 7 22.7 3653 3
11.7 2264 7 22.8 3662 3
11.8 2286 7 22.9 3671 3
11.9 2307 7 23.0 3680 3
12.0 2328 7 23.1 3687 3
12.1 2348 6 23.2 3694 3
12.2 2368 6 23.3 3701 3
12.3 2388 6 23.4 3708 3
12.4 2408 6 23.5 3715 3
12.5 2428 6 23.6 3722 3
12.6 2449 6 23.7 3729 3
12.7 2469 6 23.8 3736 3
12.8 2489 6 23.9 3743 3
12.9 2509 6 24.0 3750 3
13.0 2529 6
13.1 2547 5
13.2 2566 5
13.3 2584 5
13.4 2602 5
13.5 2621 5
13.6 2639 5
13.7 2657 5
13.8 2675 5
13.9 2694 5
14.0 2712 5

Tolerance [±%]
Presetting
Flow tolerances depending on the presetting for DN 350 and DN 400
Insulation shells DN 20 – DN 150
The insulation shells have a CFC-free inner core made of poly-
urethane foam with a 1.5 mm plastic coat.
It consists of two double shells which are tightened by two metal H max.
straps.
H
Complies with the specifications of the Energy Saving Directive
(EnEV), appendix 5, table 1, line 5. D
For heating and cooling systems.
Technical data:
Building material class B2 according to DIN 4102. L
Operating temperature ts: -20 °C to +130 °C
DN 20 – DN 50
Cold insulation:
Min. fluid temperature: +6 °C
The insulation shells have to be bonded hermetically (restricted
diffusion tightness at low fluid temperature and at high ambient
temperature and/or humidity).
Size Item no. H

DN 20 1062581
D
DN 25 1062582
DN 32 1062583
DN 40 1062584
DN 50 1062585
DN 65 1062586
L
DN 80 1062587
DN 100 1062588
DN 65 – DN 150
DN 125 1062589
DN 150 1062590 DN L D Hmax. H Item no.
20 270 145 280 190 1062581
Accessories sets DN 20 – DN 400:
Set no. 1 = 1 fill and drain ball valve 1060191 25 270 155 280 190 1062582
Measuring adapter 1060298 32 310 180 310 220 1062583
Extension for accessories sets (80 mm) 1060295
40 330 200 340 230 1062584
Extension for accessories sets (40 mm) 1688296
Stem extension (DN 20 to DN 50, 35 mm) 1688297 50 400 220 370 270 1062585
Stem extension (DN 65 to DN 150, 35 mm) 1688297 65 480 270 – 405 1062586
Lead sealing set (10-fold) (DN 20-DN 50) 1089091
80 515 300 – 430 1062587
Locking set (1-fold) (DN 20-DN 50) 1060180
100 595 350 – 500 1062588
125 660 385 – 573 1062589
150 740 415 – 598 1062590
Dimensions

Correction factor for mixtures of water 5 °C

and glycol: 5 °C 20 °C
Correction factor f
Correction factor f
1.3
When antifreeze liquids are added to the 1.3
20 °C
heating water, the pressure loss given in the 35 °C
chart must be multiplied by the correction
factor f.
1.2 1.2
35 °C
50 °C
50 °C
1.1 1.1
65 °C
65 °C
80 °C
1.0 1.0 80 °C
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50
Weight proportion of ethylene glycol [%] Weight proportion of propylene glycol [%]
Measurement and regulation

Oventrop measuring system “OV-DMC 2”
with memory and microprocessor
featuring numerous functions and a wide range of applications:
- flow rate indication (in l/s, m3/h and gal/min.)
- differential pressure measurement (indication in mbar, Pa or
kPa)
- temperature measurement (indication °C or °F)
- presetting Arriving at the value of presetting based on
the measured differential pressure, the given
flow rate and the valve size.
The characteristic lines of all Oventrop double regulating and

commissioning valves are memorised in the “OV-DMC 2”.
With the use of a respective kv value, it is possible to carry out

all measurements on valves of other manufacturers.
For practical use of the “OV-DMC 2”, special operating instruc-

tions are available.
Oventrop measuring system “OV-DMPC”

consisting of a differential pressure transmitter “DMPC-sensor”
with USB interface and software including extensive accesso-
ries. The measuring system is connected to commercial compu-
ters (not included in the delivery).
Flow-meter “OV-DMC 2”, item no. 106 91 77

with “Hydrocontrol VFC/VFR/VFN”

Automatic air vent

DESCRIPTION MV Part No. Size
The MINIVENT valves are inspectable by unscrewing the MINIVENT.
cover from the tank. Tight seal between the tank and cover 0250008 1/4”
Automatic valve with
is thanks to the presence of an O-ring; therefore it is also 0250010 3/8”
vertical air vent.
0250215 1/2”
possible to clean the internal parts (float and lever) in case
of ingress of foreign matter in the valve. Long-term effi-
ciency and performance of the vent movement is ensured
by the valve design features. The seal system is designed M VR Part No. Size
to withstand vibrations, therefore it is unaffected by any
Like MV but with automatic
external vibrations. 0250108 1/4”
shut-off valve RIA.
0250110 3/8”
APPLICATION 0250115 1/2”
The MINIVENT valve is used for automatic venting of air in
water distribution pipes in order to avoid certain phenome-
na of damage (corrosion processes, cavitation) and loss of
efficiency (air pockets in radiators) of the heating system. DESIGN FEATURES
Body Brass OT 58
The MINIVENT MVR valve is provided with an automatic
shut-off valve (Art. RIA) which allows the vent valve to be Cover Brass OT 58
removed without having to empty the system. Lever Polyacetal
The MINIVENT valve is used in independent, central, Float High density expanded polyethylene
radiant panel heating systems, etc.
Plug EPDM rubber
OPERATION Spring Stainless steel
Valve opening and closing is determined by the float Seals NBR rubber
movement (up-down). When there is air in the MINIVENT,
the force of the float weight acts on the lever which is Cap Polyamide
integral with the plug, thus causing it to move down. In Connections M 1/4" - 3/8" - 1/2" DIN-ISO 228/1
such situation the seat is free and allows the air to be
vented outside. When filling the system with water, the air
entrapped in the water circuit is pushed towards the TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
outside via the MINIVENT valve. As soon as all the entrap- Max. operating pressure 12 bar
ped air is discharged, the water, entering the tank, pushes
the float up. Consequently the lever moves the plug to Max. operating temperature 115°C
press against the seat thus ensuring tight sealing of the
system.
Air discharge rate - Operating pressure
INSTALLATION 70
65
The MINIVENT valve is normally installed: 60
- In the highest point of the air separator 55
50
Air discharge rate (NL/min)
- At the top of the columns installed in heating systems

45
with expansion vessel 40
- In all points where there is risk of air building up 35
30
In order to ensure maximum air venting efficiency, it is 25
advisable to install the MINIVENT valve in those points 20
15
where water speed is relatively low. 10
After installation, in order to allow perfect air venting, 5
unscrew the protective cap by at least two turns (such 0
condition ensures the vent characteristics as given in the 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
previous diagram). Operating pressure (bar)
M AINTENANCE Overall dimensions (mm)

Normally the MINIVENT valve does not require maintenan-
ce. If maintenance is required, remove the valve; the pre- MV
sence of shut-off valve Art. RIA allows this operation
without emptying the system.
8 SIZE CH
1. Body 2 7 1/4” 19
2. Cover
3. Lever 1 6 3/8” 19
4. Float 5
5. Plug 3
1/2” 22
6. Spring
7. Seals 4
8. Cap

Safety relief valve PSV ¾”

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES
Dimensions (mm)
Self-closing
Self ClosingP&TP&TRelief
Relief Valves
Valves for Water Heaters.
Heaters.
Thecombined
The combined22inin11P&T P&Trelief
reliefvalve
valves provides
provides thethe least
least expensive
expensive andand proven
proven
68400-68401 68402 68403
meansfor
means for protection
protection against both excessive
excessive pressure
pressureandandtemperature
temperatureemergency
emergen-
Ø 33 Ø 33 Ø 33 46
conditions.
cy conditions. 53 53
Provides fully
Provides fullyautomatic
automaticpressure
pressureand andtemperature
temperaturerelief
reliefprotection
protectionfor
forhot
hotwater
water
storagetanks
storage tanks and
and heaters.
heaters.
85
86
Application:
Application:
94
Fully automatic
Fully automatic pressure
pressure and temperature relief
relief protection
protection for
fordomestic
domestichot
hotwater
water
supplytanks
supply tanks and
and heaters.
heaters. 15 mm comp. 1 5 m m co m p . F 1/2"
M1/2"
188
188
188
M 1/2"
Typical installation:
installation: 1 5 m m c om p.
Please refer
refer to
to local
local Regulation
Regulation.and ensure installation is by a suitable qualified person.
All
All recognized
recognised codescodes require
requirethatthataatemperature
temperatureactuated
actuated relief
relief valve
valve be be installed
installed on aon a storage
storage water water heater,
heater, generally
generally in such a
in such a manner manner
that that the temperature
the temperature sensing
sensing element element
is in contactiswith
in contact with
hot water in hot
the water
top 6 in the top
inches (152mm)
6 of
the tank.(152mm) of the tank.
inches
A drain
A drain line
line must
must bebefitted
fittedtotoeach
eachP&T P&Tvalve and discharge into a floor drain. It is important that the drain line should
valve.
discharge
The into should
drain line a floor discharge
drain, check intotoasee
floorthat a discharge
drain, check to line
see is connected
that to this
a discharge linevalve directing to
is connected the flow
this of hot
valve
directing
water from thetheflow of hot
valve is towater
a properfrom the valve
place to a proper
of disposal place
otherwise of disposal
through otherwise
a tundish in a safe personal injury
and visible may result.
position to alert
The drain pipe from
the householder of athe
faultP&T must discharge
condition through a tundish, to a safe and visible position to alert the house-
with the system.
holder of a fault condition with the system.
The P&T relief valves must be installed by a qualified plumber in accordance with current regulations.
The P&T relief valves must be installed by qualified technical plumbers in accordance with current regulations.
The P&T relief valve must be installed observing the direction of flow indicated by the arrow on the valve body and
The P&T relief valve must be installed observing the direction of flow indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
the 684 P&T relief valve can be fitted vertically or horizontally, but not inverted, see below.
The 684 P&T relief valves can be fitted vertically or horizontally, but not overturned.
68450-68451-68452-68453-68455 68454 68456-68457
Correct installations Incorrect installation Ø 33 48 Ø 33 48 Ø 33 44
85
85
85
F 3/4" F 3/4" 1 5 m m co m p .
292
HOT WATER HOT WATER HOT WATER
188
188
STORAGE STORAGE STORAGE M 3/4" M 3/4" M 3/4"
HEATER HEATER HEATER
Features:
Features:
These P&T
These P&T valves
valves feature
feature aa unique
unique probe
specialwith
thermo-bonded coating. Thermostat
special thermo-bonded is accurateis and
coating. Thermostat proven
accurate andand are
pro-
exclusively designed and manufactured by WATTS INDUSTRIES.
ven. Exclusively designed and manufactured by WATTS INDUSTRIES.
Temperature nominal
Temperature nominal setting:
setting 92ºC,
: 92°C,the
thevalve
valve opens
opensbetween
between 89ºC
89°C and 95ºC.
and 95°C.
The European
The European Standard
StandardENEN1490:
1490:2000,
2000,entitled
entitled“Building
“Buildingvalves
valves- Combined
- Combined pressure
pressureandand
temperature
temperaturerelief valves
relief
- Tests –and
valves requirements”,
Tests describes
and requirements”, the constructional
describes and performance
the constructional specifications
and performance that P&T that
specifications reliefP&T
valves must
relief
valves
have. must have.
The WATTS
The WATTS INDUSTRIES
INDUSTRIESseriesseries684
684P&T
P&Trelief valves
relief areare
valves certified to comply
certified withwith
to comply the the
requirements of this
requirements of European
this
68458-68459
Standard EN 1490 (for settings 4 - 7 - 10 bar).
European Standard EN 1490 (for settings 4 – 7 – 10 bar). Ø 33 47
Range
Range PN10PN10
Watts Art.Nr. Type Size Ø inlet - outlet ND Setting Weight
68400 P&T relief valve M 1/2” - comp.15mm 1/2” 7 bar 190 gr.
85
68401 P&T relief valve M 1/2” - comp.15mm 1/2” 10 bar 190 gr.
68402 P&T relief valve Comp.15 mm - comp.15 mm 1/2” 7 bar 215 gr.
68403 P&T relief valve M/F 1/2” 1/2” 7 bar 217 gr. 22mm comp.
68404 P&T relief valve M/F 1/2” 1/2” 10 bar 217 gr.
188
68450 P&T relief valve M/F 3/4” 3/4” 3 bar 192 gr. M 3/4"
68454 P&T relief valve M/F 3/4” - 9” probe 3/4” 7 bar 215 gr.
68456 P&T relief valve M 3/4” - comp. 15 mm 3/4” 7 bar 202 gr.
68459 P&T relief valve M 3/4” - comp. 22 mm 3/4” 10 bar 230 gr. Water accessories booklet page 224 of 258
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES
� The valve
valvestem
stemisisnot
notmanufactured
in brass as � The control
controlknob
knobmade
madeofofPA6GF,
PA6GF, ins-
in brass
other like of
valve other
the valves
market, onbut
themade
market,
of instead
tead of of a lever
a lever typevalve,
type valve,isismore
more
but
PA6.6made of PA6.6and
fiberglass fiberglass reinforced
reinforced high aesthetic and
aesthetic andwith
withaamodern
moderndesigndesign to
high resistance
resistance polymer.
polymer. to complement
complement thefinish
the finishofoftoday’s
today’ssys-
This synethic
syntheticmaterial
materialpresents
presents systems.
tems.
exceptional
exceptional mechanical
mechanicalresistance,
resistance,
and itit is
is largely
largelyused
usedininwater
watermeters
meters
� The pressure
pressurerelief
relieffunction
functionisisreliable
reliable
and guaranteed
and guaranteedbybyboth
botha aEuropean
European
and valves.
valves.
ISO9001 production
ISO9001 productionandandaawealth
wealthofof
100%
100% recyclable,
recyclable,PA6.6PA6.6isisparticularly
particularly
experience gained
experience gainedininitsitsdifferent
differentworld
world
appreciated
appreciated by by leading-edge
leading-edgeindustries
industries
markets.
markets.
for its
its endurance,
endurance,insulation,
insulation,andandtotal
total
absence
absence of of corrosion.
corrosion.This Thisensures
ensures The diaphragm
� The diaphragmisismade of EPDM
in EPDM and
and sani-
correct
correct operations
operationseven evenwith
withcorrosive
corrosive sanitary
tary approved.
approved.
atmosphere
atmosphere (ie (ie close
closetotothe
thesea)
sea)oror This piece
piece of
is cast
castsolid,
solid,thethebrass
brassinsert
with anan outside
outsideinstallation
installationas assolar
solar is vulcanised
insert with a rubber
is vulcanized with thediaphragm,
rubber
roof top
top andand avoids
avoid anyany risk of binding
binding providing a better
diaphragm, reliability
providing and reliabili-
a better no risk
or locking.
locking. to escape.
ty and no risk of escape.
� Robust
Robust and
and low
lowcomplexity
complexity construc- � The probe
probe isishung
hungby
byan
a innovative
innovating
construction
tion providingproviding
superiorsuperior reliability
reliability and attachment unit.
attachment unit.
and longevity.
longevity.
� The probe
probe isisaccurate
accurateand
andproven.
proven.
� Dezincification
Dezincification resistant
resistantbrass
brass hou- Exclusively designed
Exclusively designedand
andmanufactured
manufactu-
housing.
sing. by WATTS
red INDUSTRIES.
by WATTS INDUSTRIES.
Installation example:
Approval:
WRAS N°1003045
Discharge rating:
- 1/2” and 3/4” Ø 15 : 10 kW
- 3/4” Ø 22 : 25 kW
Technical specifications Material specifications

Pressure opening 3-4-6-7-10 bar Body DZR Brass
Temp. opening 92°C Spring Steel
Medium Sanitary water Control knob PA6 GF
Nominal pressure PN 10 Diaphragm EPDM
The photographs, illustrations and descriptions contained in this brochure are given for information only.
Watts Industries reserves the right to change the technical specifications or the design of these products without prior notice.

Safety relief valve ZSH VTFN 40

THERMAL DRAIN VALVES
VTFN
THERMOFLUX
Positive action thermal drain valve, with manual resetting and optical signal.
2 Protection class : IP40. Set temperature : 95°C. Drain capacity without filling :
VTF 1.1/4" - 176.775 kcal/h equal to 7070 l/h
VTF 1.1/2" - 318.200 kcal/h equal to 12728 l/h.
ISPESL approved. According to EEC 89/336, EEC 73/23,

PED 97/23/CE. Identification number CE1115.
Tipo Codice Dn Weight (g)

VTFN 0230232 1.1/4" x 1.1/4" 1300
VTFN 0230240 1.1/2" x 1.1/2" 1350
Dimensioning
A) Partial or zero filling
It should be pointed out that Body R (Dossier R.2.A.) specifies that, in the case of partial or zero filling, the valve
should have a drain capacity not less than :
G= P
25
where :
G = flow rate of water to be drained in kg/h

P = thermal capacity of the boiler in kcal/h, assuming the hydrostatic pressure to be 0,5 kg/cm2.
The value of drain capacity G depends on the value of the water head hydrostatic pressure (pressure difference
acting on the valve) by the relation :
G = Kv . √∆p
where :
Kv = flow coefficient
∆p = hydrostatic pressure acting on the valve in kg/cm2.
By inserting known numeric values we obtain :
G = K .√∆p = 10.000 .√0,5 = 7.071 kg/h

1. for VTF/N32: P =25v . G = 25 . 7.071 = 176.775 kcal/h
G = Kv .√∆p = 18.000 .√0,5 = 12.728 kg/h

2. for VTF/N40:
P = 25 . G = 25 . 12.728 = 318.200 kcal/h
B) Total filling
In the case of total filling from the water main, the flow to be drained at the effective operating pressure should
not be less than:
G= P
80
where :
G = flow rate of water to be drained

P = thermal capacity of the boiler, being on the other side always : G = Kv . √∆p
where : Kv = flow rate coefficient.
The flow rate G depends on the hydrostatic pressure ∆p acting on the valve.

VTFN32 VTFN40
∆ (bar) G (l/h) P (kcal/h) ∆ (bar) G (l/h) P (kcal/h)
0,1 3.162 252.982 0,1 5.692 455.368
0,2 4.472 357.770 0,2 8.050 643.988
0,3 5.477 438.178 0,3 9.859 788.720
0,4 6.324 505.964 0,4 11.384 910.736
0,5 7.071 565.680 0,5 12.728 1.018.234
0,6 7.746 619.677 0,6 13.943 1.115.419
0,7 8.366 669.328 0,7 15.060 1.204.790
0,8 8.944 715.541 0,8 16.100 1.287.975
0,9 9.486 758.946 0,9 17.076 1.366.104
1,0 10.000 800.000 1,0 18.000 1.440.000
1,1 10.488 839.047 1,1 18.879 1.510.285
1,2 10.954 876.356 1,2 19.718 1.577.441
1,3 11.401 912.140 1,3 20.523 1.641.853
1,4 11.832 946.572 1,4 21.298 1.703.831
1,5 12.247 979.795 1,5 22.045 1.763.633
1,6 12.649 1.011.928 1,6 22.768 1.821.472
1,7 13.038 1.043.072 1,7 23.469 1.877.530
1,8 13.416 1.073.312 1,8 24.150 1.931.963
1,9 13.784 1.102.724 1,9 24.811 1.984.903
2,0 14.142 1.131.370 2,0 25.456 2.036.468
2,1 14.491 1.159.310 2,1 26.084 2.086.758
2,2 14.832 1.186.591 2,2 26.698 2.135.865
2,3 15.165 1.213.260 2,3 27.298 2.183.868
2,4 15.492 1.239.354 2,4 27.885 2.230.838
2,5 15.811 1.264.911 2,5 28.460 2.276.840
2,6 16.124 1.289.961 2,6 29.024 2.321.930
2,7 16.431 1.314.584 2,7 29.577 2.366.161
2,8 16.733 1.338.656 2,8 30.120 2.409.581
2,9 17.029 1.362.350 2,9 30.653 2.452.232
3,0 17.320 1.385.640 3,0 31.177 2.494.153
Technical features
Valve type VTFN32 VTFN40
Connections 1.1/4” x 1.1/4” 1.1/2” x 1.1/2”
Certificate of ISPEL conformity VST/341/90 VST/342/90
t0 - calibration 95 °C 95 °C
temperature fluid temperature at which the valve
starts to drain continuously
t1 - drain temperature 96 °C 96 °C
max. fluid temperature at which, during the temperature rise
phase, there is maximum opening allowed by the control device,
consequently the nominal flow rate
t2 - closing temperature 92 °C 90 °C
fluid temperature at which, during the temperature lowering phase,
the valve stops draining continuously.
tE - emergency operating temperature 90 °C 92 °C
temperature at which opening of the valve starts in case of damage
to the thermostatic element.
Kv - flow coefficient 11.000 20.000
water flow rate in kg/h at drain temperature t1 with differential
pressure ∆p = 1 kg/cm2
KVE - emergency flow coefficient 10.000 18.000
water flow rate in kg/h at drain temperature t1 with differential
pressure ∆p = 1 kg/cm2
P = Drain capacity 176.775 318.200
in kg/h, with partial or zero filling and with ∆p = 0,5 kg/cm2
The above values are taken from the I.S.P.E.S.L. reports enclosed with the certificates of conformity
N° VST/341/90 and VST/342/90 and represent the average of the values obtained during the inspection tests.

Design features
Body and cover Shot-blasted stamped brass
Inlet connection VTF/N32 G 1”1/4 M (ISO 228/1)
Inlet connection VTF/N40 G 1”1/2 M (ISO 228/1) 4
Outlet connection VTF/N32 G 1”1/4 F (ISO 228/1)
Outlet connection VTF/N40 G 1”1/2 F (ISO 228/1)
Thermal sensitive element Wax
Springs Stainless steel
Protective cap Black polycarbonate
Microswitch 220V-50Hz, with manual resetting button
Optical indicator red signalling valve opening
Mounting
Technical specification of Body R ed. 82 (R.3B.1.2) required as follow:
• Thermal drain valve has to be connected to the outlet pipe within 0,5 m from boiler, with the bulb sensing
element into the hot water flow rate (see drawing).
• For correct positioning of the bulb sensing element into the hot water flow rate, respect the measure
showed between end of the threaded and the axis of the pipe (see drawing).
≤ 0,5 m
VTFN40 = 64 mm
VTFN32 = 58 mm
Boiler
Wiring diagram Overall dimensions (mm)

For correct connection to the supply (220-50Hz), follow the drawing.
VTFN
Brown
Black NO Contact
Blue NC Contact
Green/Yellow
Maintenance Size A B C D E
No maintenance foreseen for VTFN valves; in case of failure 1.1/4” 222 99 123 35 52
please to dismantle the valve and send to Watts Industries Italia. 1.1/2” 242 114 128 38 60

Safety regulations
The applicable technical specification of Italian Decree DM 1.12.1975 contained in Body R prescribes the
5 use of one or more thermal drain valves in the following cases:
1. Hot water heating systems, with open expansion vessel

when the inner diameter of the safety piping is less than the minimum permissible diameter in relation
to the boiler capacity and the virtual length of the safety piping (R.3.A.3.1. tab. 2).
N.B. The minimum permissible inner diameter of the safety piping is equal to 18 mm; under this size, it
is not sufficient to install a thermal drain valve, rather the piping must be replaced as well.
2. Heating systems with closed expansion vessel
2.1. System with 4-way mixing valve

in the case of a single expansion vessel dimensioned for the entire system and in direct connection with
the boiler (Pic. 1)
2.2. System with 3-way mixing valve installed on the delivery line
in the case of a single expansion vessel dimensioned for the entire system and in direct connection
with the boiler (Pic. 2)
a) in the case of two or more expansion vessels, of which one is connected directly to the boiler,
if no check valve is provided on the return line (Pic. 3);
3. System with 3-way mixing valve installed on the return line

in the case of one or more expansion vessels of which one is in direct connection with the boiler
(Pic. 4).
4. System with overdimensioned expansion vessel

when the capacity of the expansion vessel (or vessels) exceeds the theoretical calculated capacity by
more than 10% it will always be necessary to install one or more thermal drain valves.
N.B. The distance "L" of the thermal drain valve from the boiler should not exceed 0.5 metres.
NOTE
If a check (non return) valve is to be installed in the return piping, make sure that it is correctly positioned.
The three-way valve, installed in the delivery line, can act as a mixer or diverter.
1. In the case of the three-way valve acting as a mixer valve, way 2 (Pic. 5) always remains open;
the sector shifts from way 1 to way 3. The check valve should be inserted in the boiler circuit (Pic. 5)
2. In the case of the three-way valve acting as a diverter valve (Pic. 6) , way 1 always remains open;
the sector shifts from way 2 to way 3. The check valve should be inserted in the user circuit (Pic.6).
Pic.1 Pic.2 Pic.3
1 A 2 1 A 2
B B 3
3 Pic.6
Pic.5
Pic.4
1. Mixer 1. Mixer
2. Check valve 2. Check valve
3. Circulating pump 3. Circulating pump

Flow rate against differential pressure

Positive action
VTFN32
6
3
2
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (bar)
Normal action
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50
FLOW RATE (m3/h) 7.070 (l/h)
VTFN40 Normal action
2
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (bar)
Positive action
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50
FLOW RATE (m3/h)

12728 (l/h)

Pneumatic control valve with electro pneumatic actuator

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Control valve - straight through
with screwed seat ring, shaftguided plug and blow-out protected stem
With pneumatic and electric actuators
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471

Pneumatic actuator
ARI-DP 32 - 35
• Reversible pneumatic actuator
• Actuator with rolling diaphragm
• Air supply pressure max. 6 bar
• Stem protection by bellow
• Maintenance-free O-ring sealing
• Assembly of additional devices acc. to
DIN IEC 60534-6
Page 4
Fig. 470

Electric actuator
ARI-PREMIO 2,2 - 25 kN
ARI-PREMIO-Plus 2G 2,2 - 25kN
• Enclosure IP 65
• 2 torque switches
• Handwheel
• Additional devices available, e.g. potentiometer
Page 14

Fig. 470....4
Electric actuator
with fail-safe function
ARI-PREMIO-Plus 2G 9 kN
• Enclosure IP 65
• Handwheel
Page 16

Electric actuator
AUMA SAR 07.2 - 14.6
• Enclosure IP 67
• 2 travel switches
• Handwheel
• Overheating protection for motor as standard
• Explosion proof version available
Page 18
Fig. 471
Edition 05/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 470001 englisch (english)
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Technical data
Figure Version Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter

Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed!
22.470 / 22.471 with flanges PN16 EN-JS1049 DN15-150
ARI-Valves of EN-JL1040 are not allowed to be operated in
23.470 / 23.471 with flanges PN25 EN-JS1049 DN15-150 systems acc. to TRD 110.
34.470 / 34.471 with flanges PN25 1.0619+N DN15-150 A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available.
35.470 / 35.471 with flanges PN40 1.0619+N DN15-150 (Acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.)
35.470....4 / 35.471....4 with butt weld ends PN40 1.0619+N DN25-150 The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for
the selection of the correct valve.
54.470 / 54.471 with flanges PN25 1.4581 DN15-150
Resistance and fitness must be verified, contact manufacturer
55.470 / 55.471 with flanges PN40 1.4581 DN15-150 for information (refer to Product overview and Resistance list).
Other materials and versions on request.
Stem sealing
Fig. 470 standard optional
DN15- 150 DN15- 150 DN15- 150
I. PTFE-V-ring unit I. EPDM-sealing II. PTFE-packing

-10°C to 220°C -10°C to 150°C -10°C to 250°C
(allowed for water and steam II. Pure graphite-packing
up to 180°C) -10°C to 450°C
Fig. 471 standard optional

DN15- 150 DN15- 100 DN125-150
III. Stainless steel-bellow with III. Stainless steel-bellow with III. Stainless steel bellows seal with
pure graphite-packing V-ring unit EPDM-sealing
-60°C to 450°C -60°C to 220°C -60°C to 150°C
(allowed for water and steam up to 180°C)
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation
Pressure-temperature-ratings of the given temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JS1049 PN16 (bar) on request 16 15,5 14,7 13,9 12,8 11,2 -- --
EN-JS1049 PN25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N PN25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N PN40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4581 25 (bar) 12,5 25 24,5 23,3 22,1 20,8 20,1 19,5 --
1.4581 40 (bar) 20 40 39,2 37,3 35,4 33,3 32,1 31,2 --
1) Valve with extended bonnet, studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Plug design
Plug design standard Guiding Rangeability
- Leakage class IV acc. to DIN EN 60534-4

- from Kvs 0,1
Parabolic plug,
- Flow characteristic: Plug shaft 50 : 1
metal seat
equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
linear (lin) (from Kvs 1)
Plug design optional Guiding Rangeability
- Leakage class IV-S1 acc. to DIN EN 60534-4

(special actuator forces necessary)
Parabolic plug, - from Kvs 0,1
Plug shaft 50 : 1
tight closure - Flow characteristic:
- equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
- linear (lin) (from Kvs 1)
- Leakage class VI acc. to DIN EN 60534-4

Parabolic plug - from Kvs 1,0
with PTFE-soft seal - Flow characteristic: Plug shaft 50 : 1
(max. 200°C) - equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
- linear (lin)

- from Kvs 1,0
Parabolic plug
- Flow characteristic: Plug shaft 50 : 1
with armoured sealing edge
- linear (lin)
Parabolic plug - Leakage class IV acc. to DIN EN 60534-4

with pressure balanced plug - from Kvs 6,3
metal seat - Flow characteristic: Plug shaft 50 : 1
Piston seal: PTFE with stainless - equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
steel spring (max. 200°C) - linear (lin)

- from Kvs 63
V-port plug Plug shaft /
- Flow characteristic: 30 : 1
metal seat Seat ring
- linear (lin)

Perforated plug
metal seat - from Kvs 1
- Flow characteristic:
optional: - equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
Plug shaft /
Pressure balanced - linear (lin) 30 : 1
Seat ring
perforated plug Flow direction for gas and steam to reduce
metal seat the sound level
Piston seal: PTFE with stainless
steel spring (max. 200°C) Flow direction for liquids at critical operating
conditions (cavitation / flashing)

- from Kvs 1
- Flow characteristic:
Perforated plug equal percentage (glp) (from Kvs 100 modified)
Plug shaft /
with suppporting basket linear (lin) 30 : 1
Seat ring
metal seat - multistage pressure reduction
Flow direction for gas / steam and liquids to
reduce the sound level at critical operating
conditions

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP
Control valve in straightway form with pneumatic actuator ARI-DP
Fig. 470 Fig. 471
Heights and weights

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Fig. 470 DP32 H (mm) 470 470 473 473 504 504 489 522 524 579 584
PN16 / 25 (kg) 16 17 18 19 24 26 30 40 54 75 99
PN 40 (kg) 16 18 19 21 26 28 33 45 61 83 109
DP33 H (mm) 525 525 528 528 559 559 555 588 590 645 650
PN16 / 25 (kg) 22 23 24 25 30 32 36 46 60 81 105
PN 40 (kg) 22 24 25 27 32 34 39 51 67 89 115
DP34 H (mm) -- -- -- -- 694 694 690 723 725 780 785
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- 60 62 66 76 90 111 135
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- 62 64 69 81 97 119 145
DP34T H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1021 1051
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 190 222
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 197 232
DP34Tri H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1243 1273
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 224 256
PN 40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 231 266
DP35 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1124 1154
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 389 421
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 396 431
Fig. 471 DP32 H (mm) 627 627 630 630 715 715 713 722 752 905 911
PN16 / 25 (kg) 18 19 19 21 27 29 39 47 62 89 116
PN 40 (kg) 19 20 20 22 28 30 41 50 66 99 123
DP33 H (mm) 682 682 685 685 770 770 779 788 818 971 977
PN16 / 25 (kg) 24 25 25 27 33 35 45 53 68 95 122
PN40 (kg) 25 26 26 28 34 36 47 56 72 105 129
DP34 H (mm) -- -- -- -- 905 905 914 923 953 1106 1112
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- 63 65 75 83 98 125 152
PN 40 (kg) -- -- -- -- 64 66 77 86 102 135 159
DP34T H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1543 1573
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 223 254
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 230 265
DP34Tri H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1765 1795
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 257 288
PN 40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 264 299
DP35 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1613 1643
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 422 453
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 429 464
Further dimensions refer to pages 251-54.

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP
DP32 / DP33 / DP34 DP34T DP34Tri DP35
Actuator data DP32 DP33 DP34 DP34T DP34Tri DP35

ØA (mm) 250 300 405 755
Effective diaphragm area (cm2) 250 400 800 1600 2400 2800
Ø D1 (mm) 225 300 400 500
Top mounted
H1 (mm) 270 284 442 635 635 731
handwheel
Weight (kg) 5 17 41 49
Further technical data of the actuator: refer to data sheet ARI-DP.

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Closing pressures: Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP32
max. permissible closing pressures on flow-to-open P2 = 0.
Observe pressure-temperature-limits, refer to page 2.
DN 15 20 25 32 40
0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/
0,63/ 0,63/ 0,63/
Kvs-value (m3/h) 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25
Parabolic plug 0,4 0,4 0,4
0,1 1 0,1 1 0,1 1
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 30
1,6/
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- 2,5 -- 2,5 4 -- 2,5 4 6,3 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16
Perforated plug 1
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- 40 -- 40 -- 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 3 5 12 18 3 5 12 18 22 3 5 12 18 22 25 22 25 32 25 32 40
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 30
I. (bar) 30,6 29,2 21,2 8,1 30,6 29,2 21,2 8,1 4,8 30,6 29,2 21,2 8,1 4,8 3,3 4,8 3,3 1,3 2,5
0,2-1,0 1,2 II. (bar) 20 18,6 11,9 3,8 20 18,6 11,9 3,8 1,8 20 18,6 11,9 3,8 1,8 1 1,8 1
III. (bar) 2,3 2 1 2,3 2 1
DP32 I. (bar) 40 25,8 40 25,8 16,8 40 25,8 16,8 12,6 16,8 12,6 7,1 11,9 6,7 3,8
250 cm2
Air supply pressure min. (bar) 2)
0,4-1,2 1,4 II. (bar) 40 21,4 40 21,4 13,8 40 21,4 13,8 10,3 13,8 10,3 5,7 8,8 4,8 2,6
Spring
closes III. (bar) 11,2 10,9 9,9 9 11,2 10,9 9,9 9 8,4 9,7 9,4 8,4 7,5 7 6,5 7 6,5 3,6 6,5 3,6 1,8
Spring range (bar)
on air I. (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 31,4 40 31,4 18,7 30,6 18,3 11,3

failure
0,8-2,4 2,7 II. (bar) 40 40 37,8 40 37,8 29,1 37,8 29,1 17,3 27,5 16,4 10,1
III. (bar) 28,9 28,6 27,6 26,7 28,9 28,6 27,6 26,7 26,2 27,5 27,2 26,2 25,3 24,7 24,3 24,7 24,3 15,2 24,3 15,2 9,3
I. (bar) 40 40 39 40 38,6
(stem 1,5-2,9 3,2 II. (bar) 40 40 40 37,6 40 36,7
extending
by spring) III. (bar) 40 40 40 40 35,5 40 35,5
I. (bar) 40 40
2,0-3,8 4,1 II. (bar) 40 40
III. (bar) 40 40
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 30 30 15 30 15 8 15 8 4 8 4 4
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 25
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 100
Perforated plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 100
Travel (mm) 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
I. (bar) 6,7 3,8 2,1 3,8 2,1 2
0,4-1,2 1,4 II. (bar) 4,8 2,6 1,3 2,6 1,3 1,1
DP32
250 cm2 III. (bar) 3,6 1,8 1,8
Spring I. (bar) 18,3 11,3 6,9 11,3 6,9 3,8 6,8 3,7 2,2 3,7 2,2 1,2 2,2 1,2 1,2
closes
Spring range (bar)
on air 0,8-2,4 2,7 II. (bar) 16,4 10,1 6,1 10,1 6,1 3,3 5,9 3,2 1,9 3,2 1,9 1 1,9 1 1
failure III. (bar) 15,2 9,3 5,6 9,3 5,6 3 5,6 3 1,8 3 1,8 1,5
I. (bar) 38,6
1,5-2,9 3,2 II. (bar) 36,7
III. (bar) 35,5
(stem
extending I. (bar) 40
by spring)
2,0-3,8 4,1 II. (bar) 40
III. (bar) 40
I. Fig. 470: PTFE-V-ring unit / EPDM-sealing

II. Fig. 470: PTFE- / pure graphite-packing
III. Fig. 471: Bellows seal
1) max. differential pressure drop
2) Air supply pressure max. to actuator: 6 bar Restriction: a) 5 bar b) 4,5 bar c) 4 bar d) 3,5 bar e) 3 bar
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
DN 15 20 25 32 40
0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/
0,63/ 0,63/ 0,63/
Kvs-value (m3/h) 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25
0,1 1 0,1 1 0,1 1
1,6/
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- 2,5 -- 2,5 4 -- 2,5 4 6,3 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16
Perforated plug 1
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- 40 --- 40 --- 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 3 5 12 18 3 5 12 18 22 3 5 12 18 22 25 22 25 32 25 32 40
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 30
I. (bar) 40 25,8 40 25,8 16,8 40 40 40 25,8 16,8 12,6 16,8 12,6 7,1 11,9 6,7 3,8
1,4 II. (bar) 40 21,4 40 21,4 13,8 40 40 40 21,4 13,8 10,3 13,8 10,3 5,7 8,8 4,8 2,6
DP32 III. (bar) 11,2 10,9 9,9 9 11,2 10,9 9,8 9 8,4 9,7 9,4 8,4 7,5 7 6,5 7 6,5 3,6 6,5 3,6 1,8
250 cm2
I. (bar) 40 40 40 40 24,5 40 24,1 15,1
Spring opens
on air failure 2 II. (bar) 40 40 40 38,4 40 38,4 23,1 36,9 22,2 13,8
III. (bar) 37,8 37,5 36,5 35,6 37,8 37,5 36,5 35,6 35 36,3 36,1 35 34,2 33,6 33,2 33,6 33,2 21 33,2 21 13,1
I. (bar) 40 40 33,8
3 II. (bar) 40 40 40 32,6
(stem III. (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 31,8
retracting
by spring) I. (bar) 40
4 II. (bar) 40
III. (bar) 40
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 100
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 100
Travel (mm) 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
I. (bar) 6,7 3,8 2,1 3,8 2,1 2
1,4 II. (bar) 4,8 2,6 1,3 2,6 1,3 1,1
III. (bar) 3,6 1,8 1,8
I. (bar) 24,1 15,1 9,3 15,1 9,3 5,2 9,2 5,1 3,2 5,1 3,2 1,8 3,2 1,8 1,8
2 II. (bar) 22,2 13,8 8,5 13,8 8,5 4,7 8,3 4,6 2,8 4,6 2,8 1,6 2,8 1,6 1,6
DP32
III. (bar) 21 13,1 8 13,1 8 4,4 8 4,4 2,7 4,4 2,7 1,5 2,4 1,4 1,4
2)
250 cm2
Air supply pressure min. (bar)
Spring I. (bar) 40 33,8 21,4 33,8 21,4 12,4 21,3 12,4 8 12,4 8 4,9 8 4,9 4,9
opens 3 II. (bar) 40 32,6 20,6 32,6 20,6 11,9 20,4 11,8 7,6 11,8 7,6 4,7 7,6 4,7 4,7
on air failure
III. (bar) 40 31,8 20,1 31,8 20,1 11,6 20,1 11,6 7,5 11,6 7,5 4,6 7,2 4,4 4,4
I. (bar) 40 33,5 40 33,5 19,6 33,4 19,6 12,7 19,6 12,7 8 12,7 8 8
4 II. (bar) 40 32,7 40 32,7 19,1 32,5 19 12,4 19 12,4 7,8 12,4 7,8 7,8
(stem III. (bar) 40 32,2 40 32,2 18,9 32,2 18,9 12,3 18,9 12,3 7,7 12 7,5 7,5
retracting I. (bar) 40 40 26,8 40 26,8 17,5 26,8 17,5 11,1 17,5 11,1 11,1
by spring)
5 II. (bar) 40 40 26,4 40 26,2 17,2 26,2 17,2 10,8 17,2 10,8 10,8
III. (bar) 40 40 26,1 40 26,1 17 26,1 17 10,8 16,8 10,6 10,6
I. (bar) 34 34 22,3 34 22,3 14,1 22,3 14,1 14,1
6 II. (bar) 33,6 33,4 21,9 33,4 21,9 13,9 21,9 13,9 13,9
III. (bar) 33,3 33,3 21,8 33,3 21,8 13,8 21,5 13,6 13,6

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
DN 15 20 25 32 40
0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/
0,63/ 0,63/ 0,63/
Kvs-value (m3/h) 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25
0,1 1 0,1 1 0,1 1
1,6/
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- 2,5 -- 2,5 4 -- 2,5 4 6,3 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16
Perforated plug 1
Seat-Ø (mm) 3 5 12 18 3 5 12 18 22 3 5 12 18 22 25 22 25 32 25 32 40
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 30
I. (bar) 40c) 18,6c) 40c) 18,6c) 11,9c) 40c) 18,6c) 11,9c) 8,8c) 11,9c) 8,8c) 4,8c) 8a) 4,3a) 2,3a)
0,2-1,0 1,2 II. (bar) 40c) 34,4c) 14,2c) 40c) 34,4c) 14,2c) 8,9c) 40c) 34,4c) 14,2c) 8,9c) 6,5c) 8,9c) 6,5c) 3,4c) 5a) 2,4a) 1,1a)
III. (bar) 7,5a) 7,2a) 6,2a) 5,4a) 7,5a) 7,2a) 6,2a) 5,4a) 4,8a) 6,1a) 5,8a) 4,8a) 3,9a) 3,3a) 2,9a) 3,3a) 2,9a) 1,2a) 2,9a) 1,2a)
I. (bar) 40c) 40c) 31c) 40c) 31c) 23,7c) 31c) 23,7c) 14c) 22,9a) 13,5a) 8,3a)
.DP33
0,4-1,2 1,4 II. (bar) 40c) 40c) 28c) 40c) 28c) 21,4c) 28c) 21,4c) 12,6c) 19,9a) 11,6a) 7a)
400 cm2
III. (bar) 21,7a) 21,4a) 20,4a) 19,5a) 21,7a) 21,4a) 20,4a) 19,5a) 18,9a) 20,2a) 19,9a) 18,9a) 18a) 17,5a) 17a) 17,5a) 17a) 10,5a) 17a) 10,5a) 6,3a)
Spring
closes I. (bar) 40a) 40a) 40a) 32,5a) 40 32 20,2
Spring range (bar)
on air 0,8-2,4 2,7 II. (bar) 40a) 40a) 40a) 31,1a) 40 30,1 19
failure III. (bar) 40 40 40 40 28,9 40 28,9 18,2
I. (bar) 40
1,5-3,0 3,3 II. (bar) 39,9
III. (bar) 39,1
(stem I. (bar) 40a) 40
extending 1,7-2,7 3,1 II. (bar) 40a) 40
by spring)
III. (bar) 40 40
I. (bar)
2,0-4,0 4,5 II. (bar) 40
III. (bar) 40
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- --- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 25
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 100
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 32 40 50 50 40 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 100
Travel (mm) 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
I. (bar) 4,3a) 2,3a) 1,1a) 2,3a) 1,1a) 1
0,2-1,0 1,2 II. (bar) 2,4a) 1,1a) 1,1a)
III. (bar) 1,2a)
I. (bar) 13,5a) 8,3a) 4,9a) 8,3a) 4,9a) 2,6a) 4,8 2,5 1,4 2,5 1,4 1,4
DP33
0,4-1,2 1,4 II. (bar) 11,6a) 7a) 4,1a) 7a) 4,1a) 2,1a) 3,9 2 1,1 2 1,1 1,1
400 cm2
III. (bar) 10,5a) 6,3a) 3,7a) 6,3a) 3,7a) 1,8a) 3,7 1,8 1 1,8 1
Spring
closes I. (bar) 32 20,2 12,6 20,2 12,6 7,2 12,5 7,1 4,5 7,1 4,5 2,7 4,5 2,7 2,7
Spring range (bar)
on air 0,8-2,4 2,7 II. (bar) 30,1 19 11,8 19 11,8 6,7 11,6 6,6 4,1 6,6 4,1 2,5 4,1 2,5 2,5
failure III. (bar) 28,9 18,2 11,3 18,2 11,3 6,4 11,3 6,4 4 6,4 4 2,4 3,7 2,2 2,2
I. (bar) 40 26,1 40 26,1 15,2 26 15,1 9,8 15,1 9,8 6,1 9,8 6,1 6,1
1,5-3,0 3,3 II. (bar) 39,9 25,3 39,9 25,3 14,7 25,1 14,6 9,5 14,6 9,5 5,9 9,5 5,9 5,9
III. (bar) 39,1 24,8 39,1 24,8 14,4 24,8 14,4 9,3 14,4 9,3 5,8 9 5,6 5,6
(stem I. (bar) 40
extending 1,7-2,7 3,1 II. (bar) 40
by spring)
III. (bar) 40
I. (bar) 35,7 35,7 20,9 35,6 20,9 13,6 20,9 13,6 8,5 13,6 8,5 8,5
2,0-4,0 4,5 II. (bar) 40 34,9 40 34,9 20,5 34,7 20,4 13,3 20,4 13,3 8,3 13,3 8,3 8,3
III. (bar) 40 34,4 40 34,4 20,2 34,4 20,2 13,1 20,2 13,1 8,2 12,9 8,1 8,1

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
DN 15 20 25 32 40
0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/
0,63/ 0,63/ 0,63/
Kvs-value (m3/h) 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25
0,1 1 0,1 1 0,1 1
1,6/
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- 2,5 -- 2,5 4 -- 2,5 4 6,3 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16
Perforated plug 1
Seat-Ø (mm) 3 5 12 18 3 5 12 18 22 3 5 12 18 22 25 22 25 32 25 32 40
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 30
I. (bar) 40d) 40d) 31d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 31d) 23,7d) 31d) 23,7d) 14d) 22,9d) 13,5d) 8,3d)
DP33
1,4 II. (bar) 40d) 40d) 28,2d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 28d) 21,4d) 28d) 21,4d) 12,6d) 19,9d) 11,6d) 7d)
400 cm2
Spring opens III. (bar) 21,7d) 21,4d) 20,4d) 19,5d) 21,7d) 21,4d) 20,4d) 19,5d) 18,9d) 20,2d) 19,9d) 18,9d) 18,2d) 17,5d) 17d) 17,5d) 17d) 10,5d) 17d) 10,5d) 6,3d)
on air failure I. (bar) 40d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 26,2d)
2 II. (bar) 40d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 39,3d) 24,9d)
III. (bar) 40d) 40d) 40d) 40d) 38,2d) 40d) 38,2d) 24,2d)
(stem I. (bar) 40d)

retracting 3 II. (bar) 40d)
by spring)
III. (bar) 40d) 40d)
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 160
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 100
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 100
Travel (mm) 20 30 30 30 30 30 30
I. (bar) 13,5d) 8,3d) 4,9d) 8,3d) 4,9d) 2,6d) 4,8d) 2,5d) 1,4d) 2,5d) 1,4d) 1,4d)
1,4 II. (bar) 11,6d) 7d) 4,1d) 7d) 4,1d) 2,1d) 3,9d) 2d) 1,1d) 2d) 1,1d) 1,1d)
III. (bar) 10,5d) 6,3d) 3,7d) 6,3d) 3,7d) 1,8d) 3,7d) 1,8d) 1d) 1,8d) 1d)
I. (bar) 40d) 26,2d) 16,5d) 26,2d) 16,5d) 9,5d) 16,4d) 9,4d) 6d) 9,4d) 6d) 3,7d) 6d) 3,7d) 3,7d)
2 II. (bar) 39,3d) 24,9d) 15,7d) 24,9d) 15,7d) 9d) 15,5d) 8,9d) 5,7d) 8,9d) 5,7d) 3,4d) 5,7d) 3,4d) 3,4d)
DP33 III. (bar) 38,2d) 24,2d) 15,2d) 24,2d) 15,2d) 8,7d) 15,2d) 8,7d) 5,5d) 8,7d) 5,5d) 3,4d) 5,2d) 3,2d) 3,2d)
400 cm2
I. (bar) 40d) 35,7d) 40d) 35,7d) 20,9d) 35,6d) 20,9d) 13,6d) 20,9d) 13,6d) 8,5d) 13,6d) 8,5d) 8,5d)
Spring
opens 3 II. (bar) 40d) 34,9d) 40d) 34,9d) 20,5d) 34,7d) 20,4d) 13,3d) 20,4d) 13,3d) 8,3d) 13,3d) 8,3d) 8,3d)
on air failure
III. (bar) 40d) 34,4d) 40d) 34,4d) 20,2d) 34,4d) 20,2d) 13,1d) 20,2d) 13,1d) 8,2d) 12,9d) 8,1d) 8,1d)
I. (bar) 40a) 40a) 32,4a) 40 32,4 21,2 32,4 21,2 13,4 21,2 13,4 13,4
4 II. (bar) 40a) 40a) 31,9a) 40 31,8 20,9 31,8 20,9 13,2 20,9 13,2 13,2
(stem III. (bar) 40a) 40a) 31,6a) 40 31,6 20,7 31,6 20,7 13,1 20,5 12,9 12,9
retracting
by spring) I. (bar) 40a) 40 28,8 40 28,8 18,3 28,8 18,3 18,3
5 II. (bar) 40a) 40 28,5 40 28,5 18,1 28,5 18,1 18,1
III. (bar) 40a) 40 28,4 40 28,4 18 28,1 17,8 17,8
I. (bar) 36,4 36,4 23,2 36,4 23,2 23,2
6 II. (bar) 36,1 36,1 23 36,1 23 23
III. (bar) 36 36 22,9 35,7 22,7 22,7

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
DN 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 25 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 30 30 15 30 15 8 15 8 4 8 4 2 4 2
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 15 25 15
Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 40 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 8,3 e) 8,3 e) 5 e) 8,3 e) 5 e) 2,6 e) 4,9 2,6 1,5 2,6 1,5 1,5
0,2-1,0 1,2 II. (bar) 7,1 e) 7,1 e) 4,2 e) 7,1 e) 4,2 e) 2,1 e) 4 2 1,1 2 1,1 1,1
III. (bar) 6,4 e) 6,4 e) 3,7 e) 6,4 e) 3,7 e) 1,9 e) 3,7 b) 1,9 b) 1 b) 1,9 b) 1 b)
I. (bar) 20,4d) 20,4d) 12,7d) 20,4d) 12,7d) 7,2 d) 12,6 7,2 4,5 7,2 4,5 2,7 4,5 2,7 1,6 2,7 1,6 1
0,4-1,2 1,4 II. (bar) 19,1d) 19,1d) 11,9d) 19,1d) 11,9d) 6,8 d) 11,7 6,6 4,2 6,6 4,2 2,5 4,2 2,5 1,4 2,5 1,4
DP34 III. (bar) 18,4d) 18,4d) 11,4d) 18,4d) 11,4d) 6,5 d) 11,4b) 6,5 b) 4,1 b) 6,5 b) 4,1 b) 2,4 b) 3,8 2,2 1,3 2,2 1,3
800 cm2 I. (bar) 40 b) 40 b) 28,2b) 40 b) 28,2b) 16,5b) 28,1 16,4 10,6 16,4 10,6 6,6 10,6 6,6 4,1 6,6 4,1 2,7
Spring 0,8-2,4 2,7 II. (bar) 40 b) 40 b) 27,4b) 40 b) 27,4b) 16 b) 27,2 15,9 10,3 15,9 10,3 6,4 10,3 6,4 4 6,4 4 2,6
closes
Spring range (bar)
III. (bar) 40 b) 40 b) 26,9b) 40 b) 26,9b) 15,7b) 26,9 15,7 10,2 15,7 10,2 6,3 9,9 6,2 3,8 6,2 3,8 2,5
on air
I. (bar) 8,5 8,5 5,8
failure
1,5-3,0 3,3 II. (bar) 8,4 8,4 5,7
III. (bar) 8,2 8,2 5,6
I. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 40 30,5 40 30,5 19,4 30,5 19,4 19,4
2,1-3,0 3,3 II. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 40 30,2 40 30,2 19,2 30,2 19,2 19,2
(stem
extending III. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 40 30,1 40 30,1 19,1 29,8 18,9 18,9
by spring) I. (bar) 11,7 11,7 8
2,0-4,0 4,5 II. (bar) 11,5 11,5 7,9
III. (bar) 11,4 11,4 7,8
I. (bar) 35,1 35,1 22,4 35,1 22,4 22,4
2,4-3,6 4 II. (bar) 34,8 34,8 22,2 34,8 22,2 22,2
III. (bar) 34,7 34,7 22,1 34,4 21,9 21,9
DN 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 25 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 15 25 15
Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 40 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 20,4e) 20,4e) 12,7e) 20,4e) 12,7e) 7,2e) 12,6 7,2 4,5 7,2 4,5 2,7 4,5 2,7 1,6 2,7 1,6 1
1,4 II. (bar) 19,1e) 19,1e) 11,9e) 19,1e) 11,9e) 6,8e) 11,7 6,6 4,2 6,6 4,2 2,5 4,2 2,5 1,4 2,5 1,4
III. (bar) 18,4e) 18,4e) 11,4e) 18,4e) 11,4e) 6,5e) 11,4b) 6,5b) 4,1b) 6,5b) 4,1b) 2,4b) 3,8 2,2 1,3 2,2 1,3
I. (bar) 40e) 40e) 36e) 40e) 36e) 21,1e) 35,9 21 13,7 21 13,7 8,6 13,7 8,6 5,4 8,6 5,4 3,6
DP34 2 II. (bar) 40e) 40e) 35,2e) 40e) 35,2e) 20,6e) 35 20,5 13,4 20,5 13,4 8,4 13,4 8,4 5,2 8,4 5,2 3,5
800 cm2 III. (bar) 40e) 40e) 34,7e) 40e) 34,7e) 20,3e) 34,7b) 20,3b) 13,2b) 20,3b) 13,2b) 8,3b) 12,9 8,1 5,1 8,1 5,1 3,4
Spring I. (bar) 40e) 40e) 40 29 40 29 18,4 29 18,4 11,7 18,4 11,7 8
opens 3 II. (bar) 40e) 40e) 40 28,7 40 28,7 18,2 28,7 18,2 11,5 18,2 11,5 7,9
on air failure
III. (bar) 40e) 40e) 40b) 28,5b) 40b) 28,5b) 18,1b) 28,3 18 11,4 18 11,4 7,8
I. (bar) 40 40 28,3 40 28,3 18 28,3 18 12,4
4 II. (bar) 40 40 28,1 40 28,1 17,9 28,1 17,9 12,3
III. (bar) 40b) 40b) 28b) 40 27,8 17,7 27,8 17,7 12,2
(stem
I. (bar) 38,1 38,1 24,3 38,1 24,3 16,8
retracting
by spring) 5 II. (bar) 37,9 37,9 24,2 37,9 24,2 16,7
III. (bar) 37,6 24 37,6 24 16,6
I. (bar) 40 40 30,6 40 30,6 21,2
6 II. (bar) 40 40 30,5 40 30,5 21,1
III. (bar) 40 30,3 40 30,3 21
I. Fig. 470: PTFE-V-ring unit / EPDM-sealing II. Fig. 470: PTFE- / pure graphite-packing III. Fig. 471: Bellows seal
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN125-150)
Closing pressures: Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP34T
DN 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 8 4 2 4 2
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 4,5 2,7 1,6 2,7 1,6 1
0,2-1,0 1,5 II. (bar) 3,7 2,2 1,2 2,2 1,2
III. (bar) 3,5 a) 2 a) 1,1 a) 2 a) 1,1 a)
I. (bar) 10,6 6,6 4,1 6,6 4,1 2,7
0,4-1,2 1,7 II. (bar) 9,8 6,1 3,8 6,1 3,8 2,5
DP34T III. (bar) 9,6 a) 6 a) 3,7 a) 6 a) 3,7 a) 2,4 a)
1600 cm2 I. (bar) 22,9 14,5 9,2 14,5 9,1 6,3

Spring closes 0,8-2,4 2,9 II. (bar) 22,1 14 8,8 14 8,8 6
Spring range (bar)
on air failure III. (bar) 21,8 13,8 8,7 13,8 8,7 6

I. (bar) 18 18 12,4
1,5-3,0 3,5 II. (bar) 17,7 17,7 12,2
III. (bar) 17,6 17,6 12,1
I. (bar) 40 40 40
2,1-3,0 3,5 II. (bar) 40 39,6 39,6
(stem extending III. (bar) 40 39,4 39,4
by spring) I. (bar) 24,3 24,3 16,8
2,0-4,0 4,5 II. (bar) 24 24 16,6
III. (bar) 23,9 23,9 16,5
I. (bar)
2,4-3,6 4,1 II. (bar) 40 40
III. (bar) 40 40
DN 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 13,7 8,6 5,3 8,6 5,3 3,6
1,5 II. (bar) 12,9 8,1 5 8,1 5 3,4
III. (bar) 12,6 a) 7,9 a) 4,9 a) 7,9 a) 4,9 a) 3,3 a)
DP34T I. (bar) 29 18,4 11,7 18,4 11,7 8
1600 cm2 2 II. (bar) 28,2 17,9 11,3 17,9 11,3 7,8
III. (bar) 27,9 a) 17,8 a) 11,2 a) 17,8 a) 11,2 a) 7,7 a)
Spring opens
on air failure I. (bar) 40 38,1 24,3 38,1 24,3 16,8
3 II. (bar) 40 37,6 24 37,6 24 16,6
III. (bar) 40 a) 37,4 a) 23,9 a) 37,4 a) 23,9 a) 16,5 a)
I. (bar) 40 36,9 40 36,9 25,6
4 II. (bar) 40 36,6 40 36,6 25,4
III. (bar) 40 a) 36,5 a) 40 a) 36,5 a) 25,3 a)
(stem retracting I. (bar) 40 40 34,4
by spring) 5 II. (bar) 40 40 34,2
III. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 34,1 a)
I. (bar) 40
6
II. (bar) 40
I. Fig. 470: EPDM-sealing II. Fig. 470: PTFE- / pure graphite-packing III. Fig. 471: Bellows seal
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN125-150)
Closing pressures: Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP34Tri
DN 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 7,5 a) 4,6 a) 2,8 a) 4,6 a) 2,8 a) 1,9 a)
0,2-1,0 1,5 II. (bar) 6,8 a) 4,1 a) 2,5 a) 4,1 a) 2,5 a) 1,6 a)
III. (bar) 6,5 d) 4 d) 2,4 d) 4 d) 2,4 d) 1,6 d)
I. (bar) 16,7 a) 10,6 a) 6,6 a) 10,6 a) 6,6 a) 4,5 a)
0,4-1,2 1,7 II. (bar) 16 a) 10,1 a) 6,3 a) 10,1 a) 6,3 a) 4,3 a)
III. (bar) 15,7 c) 9,9 c) 6,2 c) 9,9 c) 6,2 c) 4,2 c)
DP34Tri
I. (bar) 35,1 22,4 14,2 22,4 14,2 9,8
2400 cm2
Spring range (bar)
Spring closes 0,8-2,4 2,9 II. (bar) 34,3 21,9 13,9 21,9 13,9 9,5
on air failure III. (bar) 34,1 a) 21,7 a) 13,8 a) 21,7 a) 13,8 a) 9,5 a)
I. (bar) 27,5 27,5 19
1,5-3,0 3,5 II. (bar) 27,1 27,1 18,8
III. (bar) 27 a) 27 a) 18,7 a)
I. (bar) 40 40 40
(stem extending 2,1-3,0 3,5 II. (bar) 40 40 40

by spring) III. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 40 a)
I. (bar) 36,9 36,9 25,6
2,0-4,0 4,5 II. (bar) 36,6 36,6 25,4
III. (bar) 36,5 36,5 25,3
I. Fig. 470: EPDM-sealing

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN125-150)
DN 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 250 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 250 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 160 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 125 125 150
Travel Air supply pressure min. (bar) 2) (mm) 50 50
I./II. (bar) 40 40 37,4

DP35
2800 cm2
Spring range (bar)
2,45-3,28 3,8
Spring closes
on air failure
III. (bar) 40 a) 40 a) 37,3 a)
(stem extending 2,97-3,8 4,3 I./II. (bar) 40

by spring)
DN 125 150
Kvs-value (m3/h) 250 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 250 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 160 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 125 125 150
Travel (mm) 50 50
I./II. (bar) 12,7 b) 12,7 b) 8,7 b)

1,5
DP35
III. (bar) 12,6 e) 12,6 e) 8,6 e)

2800 cm2
Spring opens I./II. (bar) 23,9 b) 23,9 b) 16,6 b)
on air failure 2
III. (bar) 23,8 e) 23,8 e) 16,5 e)
I./II. (bar) 40 b) 40 b) 32,2 b)

3
(stem retracting
III. (bar) 40 e) 40 e) 32,2 e)
by spring)
4 I./II. (bar) 40 b)
I. Fig. 470: EPDM-sealing

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Electric actuator ARI-PREMIO / PREMIO-Plus 2G
Control valve in straightway form with electric actuator ARI-PREMIO / PREMIO-Plus 2G
Fig. 470 Fig. 471

Actuator data 2,2 - 5 kN 12 - 25 kN
A (mm) 171 210
B (mm) 156 184
C (mm) 50 90
Ø D1 (mm) 90 130
X (mm) 150 200
Further technical data of the actuator: refer to data sheet ARI-PREMIO/PREMIO-Plus 2G
Heights and weights

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Fig. 470 2,2 kN H (mm) 579 579 582 582 613 613 609 642 644 719 724
PN16 / 25 (kg) 13 13 14 15 20 22 26 36 50 71 95
PN40 (kg) 13 14 15 17 22 24 29 41 57 79 105
5 kN H (mm) 579 579 582 582 613 613 609 642 644 719 724
PN16 / 25 (kg) 13 14 15 17 21 23 28 38 52 73 97
PN40 (kg) 14 15 16 18 23 25 31 42 58 81 107
12 kN H (mm) -- -- -- -- 787 787 783 816 818 873 878
15 kN PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- 25 27 32 42 56 77 101
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- 27 29 35 46 62 85 111
25 kN H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 816 818 873 878
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 43 57 78 102
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 47 63 86 112
Fig. 471 2,2 kN H (mm) 736 736 739 739 824 824 833 842 872 1045 1051
PN16 / 25 (kg) 14 15 16 17 23 26 35 43 58 85 112
PN40 (kg) 15 16 17 18 24 27 37 46 62 95 119
5 kN H (mm) 736 736 739 739 824 824 833 842 872 1045 1051
PN16 / 25 (kg) 15 16 17 18 25 27 36 44 60 87 114
PN40 (kg) 16 17 18 20 25 28 38 47 63 97 121
12 kN H (mm) -- -- -- -- 998 998 1007 1016 1046 1199 1205
15 kN PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- 29 31 40 48 64 91 118
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- 29 32 42 51 67 101 125
25 kN H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1016 1046 1199 1205
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 49 65 92 119
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 52 68 102 126
Water accessories booklet page 246of 258

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Closing pressures: Electric actuator ARI-PREMIO / PREMIO-Plus 2G
DN 15 20 25 32 40
0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/ 0,25/ 2,5/
0,63/ 0,63/ 0,63/
Kvs-value (m3/h) 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 0,16/ 1,6/ 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25
0,1 1 0,1 1 0,1 1
1,6/
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- 2,5 -- 2,5 4 -- 2,5 4 6,3 4 6,3 10 6,3 10 16
Perforated plug 1
Seat-Ø (mm) 3 5 12 18 3 5 12 18 22 3 5 12 18 22 25 25 22 32 25 32 40
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 20 20 30
I. (bar) 40 40 40 35,9 40 35,9 21,6 35,2 21,1 13,2
Closing
II. (bar) 40 40 40 33,7 40 33,7 20,2 32,1 19,2 11,9
pressure
2,2 kN III. (bar) 33,3 33 32 31,1 33,3 33 32 31,1 30,5 31,8 31,5 30,5 29,6 29,1 28,6 29,1 28,6 18 28,6 18 11,2
Operating time (s) 53 53 53 53 53 79
Operating speed 2) (mm/s) 0,38
I. (bar) 40 40 40 34,6
Closing
II. (bar) 40 40 40 33,4
pressure
5 kN III. (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 32,6
Operating time (s) 53 53 53 53 53 79
Operating speed (mm/s) 0,38
I. (bar) 40
Closing
II. (bar) 40
pressure
12 kN III. (bar) 40
Operating time (s) 79
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 15 25 15
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 20 30 30 30 30 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 21,1 13,2 8,1 13,2 8,1 4,5 8 4,4 2,7 4,4 2,7 1,5 2,7 1,5 1,5
Closing
II. (bar) 19,2 11,9 7,3 11,9 7,3 4 7,1 3,9 2,3 3,9 2,3 1,3 2,3 1,3 1,3
pressure
2,2 kN III. (bar) 18 11,2 6,8 11,2 6,8 3,7 6,8 3,7 2,2 3,7 2,2 1,2 1,9 1 1
Operating time (s) 53 79 79 79 79 79 79
Operating speed 2) (mm/s) 0,38
I. (bar) 40 34,6 21,9 34,6 21,9 12,7 21,8 12,6 8,2 12,6 8,2 5 8,2 5 3,1 5 3,1 2
Closing
II. (bar) 40 33,4 21,1 33,4 21,1 12,2 20,9 12,1 7,8 12,1 7,8 4,8 7,8 4,8 2,9 4,8 2,9 1,9
pressure
5 kN III. (bar) 40 32,6 20,6 32,6 20,6 11,9 20,6 11,9 7,7 11,9 7,7 4,7 7,4 4,5 2,8 4,5 2,8 1,8
Operating time (s) 53 79 79 79 79 79 132 79 132
I. (bar) 40 40 33,3 40 33,2 21,8 33,2 21,8 13,8 21,8 13,8 8,7 13,8 8,7 5,9
Closing
II. (bar) 40 40 32,8 40 32,7 21,5 32,7 21,5 13,6 21,5 13,6 8,6 13,6 8,6 5,8
pressure
12 kN III. (bar) 40 40 32,5 40 32,5 21,3 32,5 21,3 13,5 21 13,3 8,4 13,3 8,4 5,7
Operating time (s) 79 79 79 79 79 132 79 132
I. (bar) 40 40 27,7 40 27,7 17,6 27,7 17,6 11,1 17,6 11,1 7,6
Closing
II. (bar) 40 40 27,3 40 27,3 17,3 27,3 17,3 11 17,3 11 7,5
pressure
15 kN III. (bar) 40 40 27,2 40 27,2 17,3 26,9 17,1 10,8 17,1 10,8 7,4
Operating time (s) 79 79 79 79 132 79 132
I. (bar) 40 40,1 30,1 40 30,1 19,2 30,1 19,2 13,2
Closing
II. (bar) 40 40 29,9 40 30,1 19 29,9 19 13,1
pressure
25 kN III. (bar) 40 40 29,8 40 29,6 18,8 29,6 18,8 13
Operating time (s) 79 79 79 132 79 132
Further operating speeds: refer to data sheet ARI-PREMIO/PREMIO-Plus 2G

Travel [mm]
Operating time [s]=
III. Fig. 471: Bellows seal Operating speed [mm/s]
1) max.differential pressure drop
2) Based on a frequency of 50Hz the control speed and power consumption of the synchronous motors PREMIO 2,2kN are 20% higher at frequency of 60 Hz.

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN40-150)
Electric actuator ARI-PREMIO-Plus 2G with fail-safe function
Control valve in straightway form with electric actuator PREMIO-Plus 2G
Fig. 470 Fig. 471

Actuator data 9 kN
A (mm) 210
B (mm) 184
C (mm) 90
Ø D1 (mm) 130
X (mm) 200
Supply voltage: 24V AC/DC
Other voltages: 90-264V AC 47-63Hz, 127-370V DC
Further technical data of the actuator:
refer to data sheet ARI-PREMIO-Plus 2G with fail-safe function
Heights and weights

DN 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Fig. 470 9 kN H (mm) 1194 1194 1190 1223 1225 1280 1285
PN16 / 25 (kg) 42 44 48 58 72 93 117
PN40 (kg) 44 46 51 63 79 101 127
Fig. 471 9 kN H (mm) 1405 1405 1414 1423 1453 1606 1612
PN16 / 25 (kg) 45 47 57 65 80 107 134
PN40 (kg) 46 48 59 68 84 117 141

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN40-150)
Closing pressures: Electric actuator ARI-PREMIO-Plus 2G with fail-safe function
DN 40 50 65 80
Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 30 40 30 30 15 30 15 8
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- -- 63 -- 63 100
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- -- 30 -- 30
Kvs-value (m3/h) 6,3 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63
Perforated plug
Seat-Ø (mm) 25 32 40 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80
Travel (mm) 20 30 20 30 30 30
I. (bar) 40 40 40 24,5 40 24,4 16
Closing pressure II. (bar) 40 40 40 24 40 23,9 15,6
III. (bar) 40 40 40 23,7 40 23,7 15,5
9 kN Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 53 79 53 79 79 79

Operating time
(s) 1
on electrical power failure
Operating speed
(mm/s) 100
DN 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 15 8 4 8 4 2 4 2
Kvs-value (m3/h) 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
Kvs-value (m3/h) 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 30 30 50 30 50
I. (bar) 24,4 16 10,1 16 10,1 6,3 10,1 6,3 4,3
Closing pressure II. (bar) 23,9 15,6 9,8 15,6 9,8 6,1 9,8 6,1 4,2
III. (bar) 23,7 15,5 9,7 15,2 9,6 6 9,6 6 4
9 kN Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 79 79 132 79 132

Operating time
(s) 1
Operating speed
(mm/s) 100

ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN40-150)
Electric actuator AUMA SAR (MATIC)
Control valve in straightway form with electric actuator AUMA
Fig. 470 Fig. 471
Actuator data SAR 07.2 SAR 07.6 SAR 10.2 SAR 14.2 SAR 14.6
A (mm) 265 283 389
B (mm) 249 254 336 339
H1 (AUMA MATIC) (mm) 130 182
Supply voltage: 400V 50Hz 3~ (Other voltages on request)
Technical data for actuator refer to price list.
Heights and weights

DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Fig. 470 SAR 07.2 H (mm) 652 652 683 683 679 712 714 769 774
SAR 07.6 PN16 / 25 (kg) 37 39 44 45 50 60 74 95 119
PN40 (kg) 38 40 45 47 53 64 80 103 129
SAR 10.2 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 714 716 771 776
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- 62 76 97 121
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- 67 83 105 131
SAR 14.2 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 839 869
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 140 172
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 147 182
SAR 14.6 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1097 1127
LE100 PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 186 218
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 193 228
Fig. 471 SAR 07.2 H (mm) 809 809 894 894 903 912 942 1095 1101
SAR 07.6 PN16 / 25 (kg) 39 41 47 49 59 67 82 109 136
PN40 (kg) 40 42 47 50 60 69 85 119 143
SAR 10.2 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 914 944 1097 1103
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- 69 84 111 138
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- 72 88 121 145
SAR 14.2 H (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1398 1428
PN16 / 25 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 173 204
PN40 (kg) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 180 215
For version with AUMA SAR Ex other heights.

Further dimensions refer to pages 20-23.
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN40-150)
Closing pressures: Electric actuator AUMA SAR (MATIC)
Fig. 470 DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 30 40 30 30 15 30 15 8 15 8 4 8 4 2 4 2
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- -- -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- -- -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 15 25 15
Kvs-value (m3/h) 6,3 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 25 25 32 25 32 40 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 30 20 30 30 30 30 30 50 30 50
shut off (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30,6 40 30,6 19,4
SAR 07.2 Closing pressure I./II.
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 40 40 37,6 40 37,6 22 37,4 21,9 14,3 21,9 14,3 9
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 15 15 15 15 20 15 20 30 20 30 30
Form A
TR 20 x 4 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 54 54 54 56 54 56 56 56 56
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 8 5,6 8 8 8 8
shut off (bar) 40 40 40 40 27,5 40 27,5 17,5 27,5 17,5 12
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 31,5 40 31,3 20,6 31,3 20,6 13 20,6 13 8,2 13 8,2 5,6
Output drive
Torque (Nm) (Nm) 30 30 40 30 40 60 40 60 60 60
Form A
TR 26 x 5 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 64 64 64 64 64 55 64 55
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 5,6 5,6 11 5,6 11
shut off (bar) 40 40 40 29,8 40 29,8 20,7
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 27,5 40 27,5 17,5 27,5 17,5 12
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 60 60 90 60 90 100 90 100
Form A
TR 26 x 5 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 64 64 64 55 64 55
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 11 5,6 11
shut off (bar) 40 40
controlling 2) (bar) 40 28,9 40 28,9 20
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 120 175 120 175 250
Form A
TR 30 x 6 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 38 63 38 63
Output drive (rpm) 8 8 8 8
SAR 14.6 shut off (bar) 40 40
Closing pressure I./II.
with LE100 controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 27,7
Output drive Torque (Nm) 400 400 400
Form A Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 54 54
TR 40 x 7 - LH Output drive (rpm) 8 8
Fig. 471 DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

Kvs-value (m3/h) 10 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
Parabolic plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 30 40 30 30 15 30 15 8 15 8 4 8 4 2 4 2
Kvs-value (m3/h) -- -- -- -- -- 63 -- 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250 160 250 400
V-port plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) -- -- -- -- -- 30 -- 30 30 25 30 25 15 25 15
Kvs-value (m3/h) 6,3 6,3 10 6,3 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 63 100 160 100 160 250
Perforated plug
max. diff. pressure 1) (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Seat-Ø (mm) 25 25 32 25 32 40 32 40 50 40 50 65 50 65 80 65 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 150
Travel (mm) 20 20 20 30 20 30 30 30 30 30 50 30 50
shut off (bar) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30,4 40 30,4 19,4
SAR 07.2 Closing pressure III.
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 40 40 37,1 40 37,1 21,7 37,1 21,7 14,2 21,7 14,2 8,9
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 15 15 15 15 20 15 20 30 20 30 30
Form A
TR 20 x 4 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 54 54 54 56 54 56 56 56 56
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 8 5,6 8 8 8 8
shut off (bar) 40 40 40 40 27,4 40 27,2 17,3 27,2 17,3 11,9
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 31,2 40 31,2 20,4 31,2 20,4 12,9 20,1 12,7 8,0 12,7 8,0 5,5
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 30 30 40 30 40 60 40 60 60 60
Form A
TR 26 x 5 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 64 64 64 64 64 55 64 55
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 5,6 5,6 11 5,6 11
shut off (bar) 40 40 32,2 40 29,7 40 29,7 20,5
controlling 2) (bar) 40 40 27,4 40 27,2 17,3 27,2 17,3 11,9
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 60 60 70 60 90 100 90 100
Form A
TR 26 x 5 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 64 64 64 55 64 55
Output drive (rpm) 5,6 5,6 5,6 11 5,6 11
shut off (bar) 40 40 33,9
controlling 2) (bar) 40 28,8 40 28,8 19,9
Output drive
Torque (Nm) 120 175 120 175 200
Form A
TR 30 x 6 - LH Operating time (50 Hz) (s) 38 63 38 63
Output drive (rpm) 8 8 8 8

2) Restrictions through max. permissible torque of the actuator at controlling operation.
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN15-150)
Dimensions: Standard design with flanges
Control valve in straightway form with flanges
Fig. 470 Fig. 471

DN15-150 DN15-150
(e.g.: DP32-34; PREMIO 2,2-25kN; AUMA 07.2-10.2) (e.g.: DP32-34; PREMIO 2,2-25kN; AUMA 07.2-10.2)
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Dimensions
Fig. 470 (mm) M10 M12 M16 x 1,5
M
Fig. 471 (mm) M12 M14 x 1,5 M16 x 1,5
Fig. 470 (mm) 131 131 134 134 165 165 161 194 196 251 256
H1
Fig. 471 (mm) 288 288 291 291 376 376 385 394 424 577 583
H2 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 83
A Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 100
ØB Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 16
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558

L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 Flange holes / -thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533/2544/2545
PN16 (mm) 220 250 285
ØD 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200
PN25 / 40 (mm) 235 270 300
PN16 (mm) 180 210 240
ØK 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160
PN25 / 40 (mm) 190 220 250
PN16 (mm) 4 x 14 4 x 18 8 x 18 8 x 22
n x Ød
PN25 / 40 (mm) 4 x 14 4 x 18 8 x 18 8 x 22 8 x 26
Weights
PN16 / 25 (kg) 7 8 9 10 15 17 21 31 45 66 90
Fig. 470
PN40 (kg) 7 9 10 12 17 19 24 36 52 74 100
PN16 / 25 (kg) 9 10 10 12 18 20 30 38 53 80 107
Fig. 471
PN40 (kg) 10 11 11 13 19 21 32 41 57 90 114
max. permissible thrust

Fig. 470 (kN) 12,7 18,2 40,6
Fig. 471 (kN) 18,2 29,6 40,6
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN125-150)
Dimensions: Stem connection M27 with flanges
Control valve in straightway form with flanges
Fig. 470 Fig. 470

DN125-150 DN125-150
(e.g.: DP34T-34Tri) (e.g.: DP35; AUMA 14.2-14.6)
DN 125 150
Dimensions
M Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) M27
Fig. 470 (mm) 242 272
H1
Fig. 471 (mm) 649 679
Fig. 470 (mm) 98
H2
Fig. 471 (mm) 185
H4 Fig. 470 (mm) 210 240
H5 Fig. 470 (mm) 130
A Fig. 470 (mm) 100
n x ØB Fig. 470 (mm) 2 x 16
A1 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 150
n x ØB1 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 4 x 16
A2 Fig. 470 (mm) 170
n x M1 Fig. 470 (mm) 8 x M20
T Fig. 470 (mm) 32
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558

L (mm) 400 480
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2

PN16 (mm) 250 285
ØD
PN25 / 40 (mm) 270 300
PN16 (mm) 210 240
ØK
PN25 / 40 (mm) 220 250
PN16 (mm) 8 x 18 8 x 22
n x Ød
PN25 / 40 (mm) 8 x 26 8 x 26
Weights
PN16 / 25 (kg) 74 106
Fig. 470
PN40 (kg) 81 116
PN16 / 25 (kg) 107 138
Fig. 471
PN40 (kg) 114 149
max. permissible thrust Fig. 471

Fig. 470 (kN) 112 DN125-150
Fig. 471 (kN) 70 (e.g.: DP34T-35; AUMA 14.2)
Water accessories booklet page 253of 258
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN25-150)
Dimensions: Standard design with butt weld ends
Control valve in straightway form with butt weld ends
Fig. 470....4 Fig. 471....4

DN25-150 DN25-150
(e.g.: DP32-34; PREMIO 2,2-25kN; AUMA 07.2-10.2) (e.g.: DP32-34; PREMIO 2,2-25kN; AUMA 07.2-10.2)
DN 25 40 50 80 100 150
Dimensions
Fig. 470 (mm) M10 M12 M16 x 1,5
M
Fig. 471 (mm) M12 M14 x 1,5
Fig. 470 (mm) 134 165 165 194 196 256
H1
Fig. 471 (mm) 291 376 376 394 424 583
H2 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 83
H3 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 50 70 70 100 115 160
A Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 100
ØB Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 16
Face-to-face dimension ETE series 73 according to DIN EN 12982

L (mm) 210 251 286 337 394 508
Butt weld ends acc. to DIN EN 12627 Fig. 4 (refer to page 26)
Weights
Fig. 470 PN40 (kg) 8 14 15 28 43 82
Fig. 471 PN40 (kg) 9 16 17 33 48 96

Fig. 470 (kN) 12,7 18,2 40,6
Fig. 471 (kN) 18,2 29,6 40,6
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN150)
Dimensions: Stem connection M27 with butt weld ends
Control valve in straightway form with butt weld ends
Fig. 470....4 Fig. 470....4

DN150 DN150
(e.g.: DP34T-34Tri) (e.g.: DP35; AUMA 14.2-14.6)
DN 150
Dimensions
M Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) M27
Fig. 470 (mm) 272
H1
Fig. 471 (mm) 679
Fig. 470 (mm) 98
H2
Fig. 471 (mm) 185
H3 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 160
H4 Fig. 470 (mm) 240
H5 Fig. 470 (mm) 130
A Fig. 470 (mm) 100
n x ØB Fig. 470 (mm) 2 x 16
A1 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 150
n x ØB1 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 4 x 16
A2 Fig. 470 (mm) 170
n x M1 Fig. 470 (mm) 8 x M20
T Fig. 470 (mm) 32

L (mm) 508
Butt weld ends acc. to DIN EN 12627 Fig. 4 (refer to page 26)
Weights
Fig. 470 PN40 (kg) 98
Fig. 471 PN40 (kg) 131
Fig. 471....4
DN150
Fig. 470 (kN) 112 (e.g.: DP34T-35; AUMA 14.2)
Fig. 471 (kN) 70
ARI-STEVI® 470 (DN15-150)
Parts: Standard design
I. EPDM-sealing
I. PTFE-V-ring unit II. PTFE- / pure graphite-packing
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 22.470 / Fig. 23.470 Fig. 34.470 / Fig. 35.470 Fig. 54.470 / Fig. 55.470
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
2 x Seat ring X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
3 x Plug X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
4 x Clamping sleeve X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
5 x Stem X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
6 Mounting bonnet EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
7 Giude bushing X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT (hardened) X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
8 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
9 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4-70
10 Hexagon nuts C35E, 1.1181 A4
11 V-ring unit PTFE
refer to Pos. 100
13 Washer X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301

14 Compression spring X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
Set:
15 Guide bush PTFE25%C

17 Scraper PTFE
18 Stem guiding X8CrNiS18-9, 1.4305
19 Packing box flange P250GH, 1.0460 X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
20 Stud A4-70
21 Hexagon nuts A4
25 x Distance bush X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
26 x Packing ring PTFE or Pure graphite
28 x Packing follower X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17 12 2, 1.4571
Stem sealings Fig. 470

100 x V-ring unit (set) Set of Pos. 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18
120 x EPDM-sealing, cpl. EPDM / X8CrNiS18-9, 1.4305
26 x Packing ring PTFE
26 x Packing ring Pure graphite
└ Spare parts
ARI-STEVI® 471 (DN15-150)
Parts: Standard design
III. Stainless steel-bellow with V-ring unit
III. Stainless steel-bellow with PTFE-packing / Pure graphite-packing III. Stainless steel bellows seal with EPDM-sealing
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 22.471 / Fig. 23.471 Fig. 34.471 / Fig. 35.471 Fig. 54.471 / Fig. 55.471
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N 1.4581
2 x Seat ring X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT 1.4571
3 x Plug X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT 1.4571
4 x Clamping sleeve X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310 A2
9 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4-70
2201 Bellows housing EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N 1.4581
2202 Mounting bonnet EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N 1.4581
2203 x Stem- / Bellows unit X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / X6CrNiTi18-10, 1.4541 1.4571
2204 Giude bushing X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT (hardened) 1.4571
2205 Giude bushing X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT (hardened) 1.4571
2207 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4-70
2210 x Packing ring Pure graphite or PTFE
2212 x Washer X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
2217 x Screw joint X8CrNiS18-9, 1.4305
2212 Washer X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
refer to Pos. 100
2218 Compression spring X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310

2221 V-ring unit PTFE
Set:
2224 Screw joint X8CrNiS18-9, 1.4305

2225 Scraper PTFE
2226 Gasket X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
2231 x Gasket Cu
Stem sealings Fig. 471

2210 x Packing ring Pure graphite or PTFE
100 x V-ring unit (set) Set of Pos. 2212, 2218, 2221, 2224, 2225, 2226
120 x EPDM-sealing, cpl. EPDM / X8CrNiS18-9, 1.4305
└ Spare parts
ARI-STEVI® 470 / 471 (DN25-150)
Valves with butt weld ends
L = Face-to-face dimension
Edge shaping acc. to DIN EN 25817
DN 25 40 50 80 100 150
Butt weld ends acc. to DIN EN 12627

L Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 210 251 286 337 394 508
ØA Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 35 50 62 91 117 172
ØB Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 28,5 43,1 53,9 80,9 104,3 157,1
Ødi Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 25 40 50 80 100 150
R Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 3 3 3 3 3 3
L1 (ähnl.) Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 10 10 10 12 14 20
Ød3 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 33,7 48,3 60,3 88,9 114,3 168,3
s1 Fig. 470 / 471 (mm) 2,6 2,6 3,2 4 5 5,6
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 Fig. 4
Weld joint according to DIN EN 29692 code number 1.3.3
The material used for ARI valves with butt weld ends are: GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N acc. to DIN EN 10213-2,
Based on our experience we recommend electric welding process for connecting valves or strainers with tubes or with each other.
Lime based electrodes with an appropriate composite material should be used as filler material for welding.
Gas welding should be avoided.
Because of the different material compositions and wall thickness of the steam traps and the pipe gas welding shall not be applied. Quenching cracks and coarse grain
structure may develop.

1H18B0 - Water Accessories Booklet Rev. 2A PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1H18B0 - Water Accessories Booklet Rev. 2A PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1H18B0 - Water Accessories Booklet Rev. 2A PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOCUMENT FRONT PAGE

Type of Document : Specification

Supplier revision Codes:

1A 06.06.2018 General update LPR LPR AOR

Water Accessories booklet

Water accessories booklet page 3 of 258

Applications • Protection of pumps, valves, pressure

Technical description DN • Connection : female/female, BSP threaded

1½ 40/49 149B 1772

2 50/60 149B 1773

Overall dimensions DN A B Weight

1/2 15/21 61 38 0,180

3/4 20/27 68 45 0,280

1 26/34 86,5 57 0,450

1¼ 33/42 105 69 0,800

1½ 40/49 117 80 0,900

2 50/60 147 99 1,200

Water accessories booklet page 4 of 258

Spare parts list and Nb Description Materials EURO ANSI

Water accessories booklet page 5 of 258

Water accessories booklet page 6 of 258

Applications • Protection of pumps, valves, pressure

and special features reducing valves, backflow preventers,

against any impurity in the piping system

Technical description • Connection : with PN 10 flanges

Important notice : 6 150 10/16 16 13 16 X X 3.3 149B 3266

Overall dimensions DN A C D Mesh Weight A

3 80 310 159 75 1,25 13,5

8 200 600 403 220 1,25 83

14 350 980 587 315 1,6 297

Water accessories booklet page 7 of 258

Spare parts list and Nb Description Materials EURO ANSI

2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 1000 2000 DEBIT M3/H

* Head loss value for non clogged strainer

Water accessories booklet page 8 of 258

Water accessories booklet page 9 of 258

Water accessories booklet page 10 of 258

da DN25 a DN300 da DN300 a DN700

Water Accessories Booklet pag. 11 of 117

Water accessories booklet page 12 of 258

Pressure independent balancing and control valve

Water accessories booklet page 13 of 258

Control performance The AB‑QM has a linear control characteristic.

For any given 100 % setting

Air handling unit (AHU) / fan coil unit (FCU)

An AB‑QM with a Danfoss actuator is used

Because of the integrated differential pressure

Water accessories booklet page 14 of 258

In constant flow system with FCUs or in a one

Water accessories booklet page 15 of 258

AB‑QM flanged version

Set‑pack (one MSV‑S and one AB‑QM without test plugs)

Water accessories booklet page 16 of 258

Ordering (continuous) Comments

Type Code No.

Type Comments Code No.

Type Code No.

Water accessories booklet page 17 of 258

Ordering (continuous) For Valve Sizes DN 10 ‑ 32